SERVICE HANDBOOK MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 e-STUDIO523/603/723/853
Model: DP-5200/6000/7200/8500 Publish Date: March 2005 File No. SHE040005I0 R04102168901-TTEC Ver09_2007-11
Trademarks • • • • • •
• • • • •
The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation. Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective companies.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1) Transportation/Installation - When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 210 kg (463 lb), therefore pay full attention when handling it. - Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the RADF) when transporting the equipment. - Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115 V / 16 A, 127 V / 16 A, 220 V or 220-240 V / 9 A for its power source. - The equipment must be grounded for safety. - Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. - Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. - To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear. - The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible. - Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.
07/11
2) General Precautions at Service - Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service should be done with the power turned ON). - Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. - When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places. - Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. - The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity. -
-
-
Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting service. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp heater and areas around them. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, IH control circuit, developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g. rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser optical unit). Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam. Use designated jigs and tools. Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents. Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished. Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause malfunctions.
3) Important Service Parts for Safety - The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4) Cautionary Labels - During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION. LASER BEAM”, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.
06/09
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs - Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules. Caution: Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual. Attention: Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel. Vorsicht: Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS e-STUDIO520/600/720/850
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 1-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1 Accessories ....................................................................................................................... 1-10 Options .............................................................................................................................. 1-11 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-12 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-13
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1 2.1 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam........................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call ............................................................................................................... 2-9 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function.............................................................. 2-15 2.1.4 Printer function error............................................................................................... 2-25 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ........................................................................................................ 2-27 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03).................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) .................................................................................. 2-36 2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) .............................................................................. 2-40 2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ............................................................................................ 2-41 2.2.5 Setting mode (08) ................................................................................................... 2-74 2.2.6 Pixel counter......................................................................................................... 2-190 2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08).......................... 2-200
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 General description .................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ................................................................. 3-5 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment ........................................................................................ 3-9 3.2.4 Scanner related adjustment ................................................................................... 3-14 3.3 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) .................................................................. 3-23 3.3.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-23 3.3.2 Gamma slope adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-24 3.3.3 Background adjustment.......................................................................................... 3-24 3.3.4 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-24 3.3.5 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-25 3.3.6 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-25 3.3.7 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-26 3.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) ................................................................... 3-27 3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ........................................................................... 3-27 3.4.2 Gamma balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-27 3.4.3 Image density adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-28 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ................................................................ 3-29 3.5.1 Density adjustment ................................................................................................. 3-29 3.5.2 Sharpness adjustment............................................................................................ 3-30 3.5.3 Setting range correction ......................................................................................... 3-31 3.5.4 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ................................... 3-31 3.5.5 Background adjustment.......................................................................................... 3-32 3.6 Measurement at Replacement of High-Voltage Transformer ............................................ 3-33 3.6.1 Measurement ......................................................................................................... 3-33 3.7 Adjustment of the Scanner Section ................................................................................... 3-37 3.7.1 Carriages ................................................................................................................ 3-37 3.7.2 Lens unit ................................................................................................................. 3-41 3.7.3 Scan motor ............................................................................................................. 3-44 © 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 CONTENTS
1 05/05
3.8 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ......................................................................... 3-45 3.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .............................................. 3-45 3.8.2 Separation roller pressure force adjustment .......................................................... 3-47 3.9 Adjustment of Developer Unit ............................................................................................ 3-49 3.10 Adjustment of Fuser Unit ................................................................................................... 3-50 3.10.1 Adjustment of fuser roller pressure ........................................................................ 3-50 3.10.2 Setting of fuser/pressure roller temperature ........................................................... 3-52 3.10.3 Adjustment of fuser entrance guide........................................................................ 3-53 3.10.4 High-fusing mode ................................................................................................... 3-54 3.10.5 Changing Printing Speed ....................................................................................... 3-55 3.11 Adjustment of the RADF .................................................................................................... 3-56 3.11.1 Adjustment of RADF position ................................................................................. 3-56 3.11.2 Adjustment of RADF height .................................................................................... 3-60 3.11.3 Skew adjustment .................................................................................................... 3-61 3.11.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ............................ 3-63 3.11.5 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .............................................................................. 3-64 3.11.6 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch.......................................................... 3-66 3.11.7 Adjustment of original tray width ............................................................................ 3-67 3.12 Adjustment of Finisher ....................................................................................................... 3-68 3.12.1 Adjusting the Height Sensor (PS1)......................................................................... 3-68 3.12.2 Adjusting the Alignment Position ............................................................................ 3-69 3.12.3 Adjusting the Staple Position (stapler movement range)........................................ 3-70 3.12.4 Adjusting the Buffer Roller Winding Amount .......................................................... 3-72 3.13 Adjustment of Saddle stitch finisher................................................................................... 3-75 3.13.1 Adjusting the Folding Position ................................................................................ 3-75 3.13.2 Stitching Position (adjusting center stitching) ......................................................... 3-78 3.14 Adjustment of Hole punch unit........................................................................................... 3-79 3.14.1 Sensor output adjustment ...................................................................................... 3-79 3.14.2 Registering the number of punch holes.................................................................. 3-80 3.14.3 Checking the sensitivity level of the transmission sensor....................................... 3-81 3.15 Adjustment of Inserter........................................................................................................ 3-82 3.15.1 Tray guide width adjustment .................................................................................. 3-82 3.15.2 Input check 1 .......................................................................................................... 3-83 3.15.3 Check of sensor operations 1................................................................................. 3-85 3.15.4 Check of sensor operations 2................................................................................. 3-86 3.16 Adjustment of LCF (MP-4004) ........................................................................................... 3-87 3.16.1 Sheet sideways deviation adjustment .................................................................... 3-87 3.16.2 LCF slant adjustment ............................................................................................. 3-89
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 4-1 4.1 PM Support Mode................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.1 General description .................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen .................................................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ................................................................................ 4-7 4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure .............................................................................. 4-8 4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ........................................................................................ 4-9 4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist..................................................................................... 4-10 4.5 PM KIT............................................................................................................................... 4-33 4.6 Jig List ............................................................................................................................... 4-34 4.7 Grease List ........................................................................................................................ 4-36 4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................. 4-37 4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ............................................................ 4-37 4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum................................................... 4-37 4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade... 4-38 4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaning brush and transfer belt cleaning brush ........................ 4-38 4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt ......................................................................................... 4-38 e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 CONTENTS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 05/05
4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ...................................... 4-39 4.8.7 Checking and replacing of cleaning web ................................................................ 4-40
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1 Paper transport jam .................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................... 5-25 5.1.3 Cover open jam ...................................................................................................... 5-33 5.1.4 Transport jam (RADF) ............................................................................................ 5-36 5.1.5 Finisher jam ............................................................................................................ 5-42 5.1.6 Paper feeding system related service call .............................................................. 5-56 5.1.7 Scanning system related service call ..................................................................... 5-60 5.1.8 Fuser unit related service call................................................................................. 5-62 5.1.9 Communication related service call........................................................................ 5-66 5.1.10 RADF related service call ....................................................................................... 5-68 5.1.11 Laser optical unit related service call ..................................................................... 5-71 5.1.12 Finisher related service call .................................................................................... 5-75 5.1.13 Service call for others ............................................................................................. 5-96 5.1.14 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function............................................................ 5-101 5.1.15 Troubleshooting for image quality control ............................................................ 5-119 5.1.16 Troubleshooting for surface potential control ....................................................... 5-124 5.1.17 Troubleshooting for remaining toner detection sensor ......................................... 5-126 5.2 Troubleshooting for the Image......................................................................................... 5-127 5.3 Replacement of PC Boards and HDD ............................................................................. 5-153 5.3.1 Replacing HDD..................................................................................................... 5-153 5.3.2 Replacing SYS board ........................................................................................... 5-156 5.3.3 Cautions when Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is installed .................................... 5-157 5.3.4 Replacing NVRAM ............................................................................................... 5-158 5.3.5 HDD information display....................................................................................... 5-159 5.4 Other errors ..................................................................................................................... 5-161
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ................................................................................ 6-3 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ..................................................... 6-5 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) .............................................................. 6-11 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ............................... 6-26 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320.................................................................................................... 6-28 6.2 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device ................................................................... 6-39
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1 Output Channel ................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Fuse..................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit..................................................................................... 7-5
8. REMOTE SERVICE....................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Auto Supply Order ............................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.2 Setting Item .............................................................................................................. 8-2 8.1.3 Setting procedure ..................................................................................................... 8-5 8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ............................................................................................... 8-13 8.2 Service Notification ............................................................................................................ 8-15 8.2.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.2.2 Setting .................................................................................................................... 8-15 8.2.3 Items to be notified ................................................................................................. 8-21
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 CONTENTS
3 05/06
9. DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE ......................................................... 9-1 10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 10-1 10.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 DC Wire Harness....................................................................................................... Appendix 10.3 Electric Parts Layout.................................................................................................. Appendix
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 CONTENTS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4 05/11
1.
2.
3.
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/ SUPPLIES
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
2
ADJUSTMENT 3
4.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 4
5.
TROUBLESHOOTING 5
6.
FIRMWARE UPDATING 6
7.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT 7
8.
REMOTE SERVICE 8
9.
DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE 9
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 10
05/11
1.
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1.1
1
Specifications
Destinations (machine versions) of e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 • The machine versions of e-STUDIO600/720/850 are as follows : TNA / NAD: North America / Central and South America TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia ASD: Asia / Central and South America / Other ASU: Asia / Other ARD: Argentina AUD / DAU: Australia MJD / DMJ: Europe CND: China KRD: Korea • The drawer configuration of each model differs depending on its destination (machine version). Destination (Machine version)
e-STUDIO520
e-STUDIO720 Tandem LCF
e-STUDIO850
TNA
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
NAD
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
TWD
-
4 drawers
4 drawers
Tandem LCF
SAD
-
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
ASD
-
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
ASU
-
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
ARD
-
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
AUD
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
DAU
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
-
-
MJD
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
DMJ
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
-
CND
-
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
KRD
-
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Destination (Machine version)
*
e-STUDIO600
e-STUDIO523
e-STUDIO603
e-STUDIO723
e-STUDIO853
TNA
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
-
NAD
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
ARD
-
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
MJD
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
DMJ
4 drawers
4 drawers
4 drawers
-
CND
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF
Tandem LCF: This means 2 drawers and a tandem LCF.
In this manual, a standard LCF is called the Tandem LCF (T-LCF), and MP-4004A/L is called the Option LCF (O-LCF).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-1 07/11
•
Accepted originals........................ Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled. (Single-sided originals: 50 to 127 g/m² / 13 to 34 lb. Bond, Double-sided originals: 50 to 105 g/m² / 13 to 28 lb. Bond) Carbon paper are not acceptable either. Maximum size: A3/LD
•
Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO520/523 Paper size A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
1st 52
Drawer 3rd 2nd (*1) 52 52
4th (*1) 52
Tandem LCF(*2) 52
Bypass feed Size Size not specified specified 45 28
Option LCF(*3) 52
52
52
52
52
52
45
28
52
42
42
42
42
-
37
28
-
42
42
42
42
-
37
28
-
37
37
37
37
-
32
28
-
37
37
37
37
-
32
28
-
33
33
33
33
-
28
28
-
31
31
31
31
-
28
28
-
Drawer 3rd 2nd (*1) 60 60
4th (*1) 60
e-STUDIO600/603 Paper size A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
1st 60
Tandem LCF(*2) 60
Bypass feed Size Size not specified specified 46 30
Option LCF(*3) 60
60
60
60
60
60
46
30
60
46
46
46
46
-
38
30
-
46
46
46
46
-
38
30
-
41
41
41
41
-
34
30
-
38
38
38
38
-
34
30
-
36
36
36
36
-
30
30
-
32
32
32
32
-
30
30
-
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-2 07/11
e-STUDIO720/723 Paper size A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
1st 72
Drawer 3rd 2nd (*1) 72 72
4th (*1) 72
Tandem LCF(*2) 72
Bypass feed Size Size not specified specified 46 30
Option LCF(*3) 72
72
72
72
72
72
46
30
72
52
52
52
52
-
38
30
-
50
50
50
50
-
38
30
-
44
44
44
44
-
34
30
-
41
41
41
41
-
34
30
-
37
37
37
37
-
30
30
-
34
34
34
34
-
30
30
-
Drawer 3rd 2nd (*1) 85 85
4th (*1) 85
e-STUDIO850/853 Paper size A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
1st 85
Tandem LCF(*2) 85
Bypass feed Size Size not specified specified 50 34
Option LCF(*3) 85
85
85
85
85
85
50
34
85
61
61
61
61
-
42
34
-
56
56
56
56
-
42
34
-
52
52
52
52
-
38
34
-
45
45
45
45
-
38
34
-
43
43
43
43
-
34
34
-
37
37
37
37
-
34
34
-
*1 : The 3rd drawer and 4th drawer are standard equipments for NAD, SAD, DAU, DMJ and TWD (e-STUDIO600/720) versions. *2 : The Tandem LCF is a standard equipment for TNA, ASD, ASU, ARD, AUD, MJD, CND, KRD and TWD (e-STUDIO850) versions. Only A4/LT can be used for the Tandem LCF. *3 : Only A4, B5 and LT can be used for the Option LCF. * * * * *
Each copy speed has been measured in the Continuous Copy Mode, using single-sided originals placed on the original glass manually. Accuracy: Within ±2 sheets (Bypass feed) / Within ±1 sheet (Other paper sources) A hyphen ("-") indicates that the combination is invalid for the subject paper source. Values may vary depending on its use condition and environment. When the RADF is used, each copy speed per minute of e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/ 853 has reached 52/60/72/85 sheets. These copy speeds can be realized only in the following conditions. • Original: A4/LT / 1 sheet
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-3 07/11
1
• • •
Copy mode: A4/LT / Plain paper / Automatic Paper Selection - OFF / Automatic Copy Density OFF Number of copy set: 52 or more / 60 or more / 72 or more / 85 or more Reproduction ratio: 100%
• Copy speed for thick paper (Copies/min.) Thick 1 (Paper weight: From over 80 g/m² (21.3 lb. Bond) to 105 g/m² (28 lb. Bond)) Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
* *
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
e-STUDIO 520/523 52
e-STUDIO 600/603 60
e-STUDIO 720/723 72
e-STUDIO 850/853 85
52
60
72
85
42
46
52
61
42
46
50
56
37
41
44
52
37
38
41
45
33
36
37
43
31
32
34
37
Tandem LCF - A4/LT only / Option LCF -A4/B5/LT only Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
Thick 1 (Paper weight: From over 80 g/m² (21.3 lb. Bond) to 105 g/m² (28 lb. Bond)) Paper source: Bypass feed Size specified A4, B5, A5-R, Top side LT, ST-R discharging Back side discharging A4-R, B5-R, Top side LT-R discharging Back side discharging Top side B4, FOLIO, discharging LG, COMPUTER Back side discharging A3, LD Top side discharging Back side discharging
*
e-STUDIO 520/523 Yes No 45 28
e-STUDIO 600/603 Yes No 46 30
e-STUDIO 720/723 Yes No 46 30
e-STUDIO 850/853 Yes No 50 34
45
28
46
30
46
30
50
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-4 07/11
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m² (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m² (90 lb. Index)) Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
* *
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
e-STUDIO 520/523 52
e-STUDIO 600/603 60
e-STUDIO 720/723 72
e-STUDIO 850/853 85
52
60
72
85
42
46
52
61
42
46
50
56
37
41
44
52
37
38
41
45
33
36
37
43
31
32
34
37
Tandem LCF - A4/LT only / Option LCF -A4/B5/LT only Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m² (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m² (90 lb. Index)) Paper source: Bypass feed Size specified A4, B5, A5-R, Top side LT, ST-R discharging Back side discharging A4-R, B5-R, Top side LT-R discharging Back side discharging Top side B4, FOLIO, discharging LG, COMPUTER Back side discharging A3, LD Top side discharging Back side discharging
*
e-STUDIO 520/523 Yes No 45 28
e-STUDIO 600/603 Yes No 46 30
e-STUDIO 720/723 Yes No 46 30
e-STUDIO 850/853 Yes No 50 34
45
28
46
30
46
30
50
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
37
28
38
30
38
30
42
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
32
28
34
30
34
30
38
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
28
28
30
30
30
30
34
34
Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-5 07/11
1
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m² (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m² (115.7 lb. Index)) Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
* *
Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging
e-STUDIO 520/523 52
e-STUDIO 600/603 60
e-STUDIO 720/723 65
e-STUDIO 850/853 72
52
60
65
72
42
46
80
52
42
46
48
50
37
41
43
44
37
38
40
41
33
36
37
37
31
32
34
34
Tandem LCF - A4/LT only / Option LCF -A4/B5/LT only Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m² (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m² (115.7 lb. Index)) Paper source: Bypass feed Size specified A4, B5, A5-R, Top side LT, ST-R discharging Back side discharging A4-R, B5-R, Top side LT-R discharging Back side discharging Top side B4, FOLIO, discharging LG, COMPUTER Back side discharging A3, LD Top side discharging Back side discharging
*
e-STUDIO 520/523 Yes No 45 28
e-STUDIO 600/603 Yes No 46 30
e-STUDIO 720/723 Yes No 46 30
e-STUDIO 850/853 Yes No 46 30
45
28
46
30
46
30
46
30
37
28
38
30
38
30
38
30
37
28
38
30
38
30
38
30
32
28
34
30
34
30
34
30
32
28
34
30
34
30
34
30
28
28
30
30
30
30
30
30
28
28
30
30
30
30
30
30
Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-6 07/11
•
System copy speed Sec. Copy mode Single-sided originals ↓ Single-sided copies Single-sided originals ↓ Double-sided copies Double-sided originals ↓ Double-sided copies Double-sided originals ↓ Single-sided copies
*
1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets
e-STUDIO 520/523 20.17 43.13 65.20 23.79 46.44 69.30 41.18 87.04 132.36 37.00 82.38 128.19
e-STUDIO 600/603 18.11 38.30 57.72 21.83 41.78 62.37 35.57 75.26 114.96 31.28 70.87 110.63
e-STUDIO 720/723 17.20 32.95 49.56 20.56 37.03 54.52 35.14 68.23 101.34 30.88 63.86 97.23
e-STUDIO 850/853 14.89 29.86 43.93 18.63 32.59 46.65 33.96 61.79 89.88 30.54 58.79 86.92
* * *
The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured value. 1st drawer is selected and copying is at the sort mode. Finisher, hole punch unit and inserter are installed. Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off.
•
Copy paper Duplex copy A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, FOLIO, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16K-R Drawer
Size
Weight Special paper
Tandem LCF A4, LT
Bypass copy
A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, FOLIO, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16K-R (Non-standard or user-specified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209g/m² ( 17 lb. Bond to 115.7 lb. Index) Tracing paper (75g/m² only), Tab paper Labels, OHP film, Tab paper, (2nd drawer is recommended)
Remarks
These special papers recommended by Toshiba Tec
• First copy time ..............e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723: Approx. 4.0 sec. or less e-STUDIO850/853: Approx. 3.5 sec. or less (A4/LT, 1st drawer, 100%, original placed manually, Top side discharge) • Warming-up time ..........e-STUDIO520/523: Approx. 130 sec. e-STUDIO600/603: Approx. 130 sec. (Approx. 160 sec : TWD) e-STUDIO720/723: Approx. 130 sec. (Approx. 160 sec : TWD) e-STUDIO850/853: Approx. 130 sec. (temperature: 20°C or over, rated voltage / rating current) • Multiple copying ............Up to 9999 copies; Key in set numbers Reproduction ratio...........Actual ratio: 100±0.5% Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1% (25 to 200% when using RADF) • Resolution/Gradation ....Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Gradation: 256 steps
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-7 07/11
1
• Eliminated portion .........Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (copy) Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (print) • Paper feeding ...............Drawers: 2 drawers + Tandem LCF or 4 drawers (Depends on versions) - Drawer: Stack height 55 mm, equivalent to 500 sheets; 80 g/m² (22 lb. Bond) - Tandem LCF: Stack height 137 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 80 g/m² (22 lb. Bond) Bypass feeding: Bypass tray Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 80 g/m² (22 lb. Bond) Option LCF: MP-4004 Stack height 428 mm: equivalent to 4000 sheets; 80 g/m² (22 lb. Bond) • Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder ........................................A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: Stack height 16 mm or less / 100 sheets; 80 g/m² (22lb. Bond) • Automatic duplexer .......Stackless, Switchback type
• Toner supply .................Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method (There is a recycle toner supplying mechanism.) • Density control ..............Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps • Weight...........................Approximately 210 kg (463 lb.): NAD, TWD, SAD, DAU, DMJ Approximately 204 kg (450 lb.): TNA, ASD, ASU, ARD, AUD, MJD, CND, KRD • Power requirements......AC 115 V / 16 A, 127 V / 16 A, 220 V or 220-240 V / 9 A (50/60 Hz) * The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10% • Power consumption ......2.0 kW or less * The electric power is supplied to the options through the equipment. * 1.5 kW or less: TWD version of e-STUDIO520/600/720 only
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1-8
• Dimensions of the equipment ........... See the figure below (W 698 x D 789 x H 1213 (mm))
1
1213 m m
698 m m
789 mm Fig. 1-1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-9
1.2
Accessories
Unpacking/setup instruction Operator's manual CD-ROM Drum Toner bag (Installed inside of the equipment) Operator's manual pocket Original feeding tray spacer Tab paper end guide Cleaning cloth Cloth case Power cable Setup report Customer satisfaction card Approval sheet Envelope Packing list Label
1 pc. 1 pc. (not available for MJD, DMJ, ASU, KRD) 4 pcs 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for TWD, ASD, ASU, ARD, AUD, DAU, MJD, DMJ, CND, KRD) 1 set (for TNA, NAD, ASU, MJD, KRD) 1 pc. (for ASU, MJD, DMJ, KRD) 1 pc. (for CND) 1 pc. (for CND) 1 pc. (for CND) 2 pc. (for MJD)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 - 10 06/09
1.3
Options
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher Saddle stitch finisher Saddle stitch finisher (100 sheets stapling) Staple cartridge
Finisher guide rail Hole punch unit Inserter Damp heater Fax board Printer kit Printer/Scanner kit Scanner kit Printer ELK Printer/Scanner ELK Scanner ELK Memory Wireless LAN adapter Bluetooth module Antenna Scrambler board Data overwrite kit PCI slot Parallel interface kit
* * * * * *
* * *
MP-4004L/A MJ-1027 MJ-1028 MJ-1029 STAPLE-700 (for MJ-1027/1028) STAPLE-1700 (for MJ-1029) STAPLE-1800 (for MJ-1029) STAPLE-1900 (for MJ-1029) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitch) KN-1017 MJ-6003N/E/F/S MJ-7001 MF-6000U/E GD-1170NA/EU/AU GM-1050/1051 GM-2040/2041 GM-4010 GM-1110 GM-2110 GM-4110 GC-1230 GN-1040/1041 GN-2010 GN-3010 GP-1040 GP-1060 GO-1050 GF-1140
The finisher (MJ-1027/1028) is necessary for the installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6003N/E/F/ S) and the inserter (MJ-7001). The PCI slot (GO-1050) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040), the parallel interface kit (GF-1140) and the fax board (GD-1170NA/EU/AU). The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010). Up to 2 antennas (GN-3010) can be connected to the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041). When the wireless LAN module (GN-1040/1041) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010) are installed together, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each. STAPLE-1700 (100 sheets stapling): 3 cases of 5000 staples in a package STAPLE-1800 (50 sheets stapling): 3 cases of 5000 staples and one exclusive cartridge in a package STAPLE-1900 (50 sheets stapling): 3 cases of 5000 staples in a package The Printer kit (GM-1050) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2040) does not have a function for printing an XPS file. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer kit (GM-1051) or Printer/Scanner kit (GM-2041), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed. To enable an XPS file to be printed by the Printer ELK (GM-1110) or Printer/Scanner ELK (GM2110), the Memory (GC-1230) is required to be installed.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1 - 11 07/11
1
1.4
Supplies
Drum Developer Toner
Toner bag
OD-6510 D-6000 e-STUDIO520/600/720/850: PS-ZT6000D (for other) PS-ZT6000E (for MJD, DMJ) PS-ZT6000 (for TNA, NAD) e-STUDIO523/603/723/853: PS-ZT6000D (for CND) PS-ZT7200 (for TNA, NAD, ARD) PS-ZT7200E (for MJD, DMJ) PS-TB6510E (for MJD, DMJ) PS-TB6510 (for other)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 - 12 07/11
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 - 13
07/11
Staple cartridge STAPLE-1700 STAPLE-1800 STAPLE-1900
Staple cartridge STAPLE-600
Finisher guide rail KN-1017
Staple cartridge STAPLE-700
Saddle stitch finisher MJ-1029
Saddle stitch finisher MJ-1028
Finisher MJ-1027
Parallel interface kit GF-1140
FAX board GD-1170
Hole punch unit MJ-6003N/E/F/S
Scrambler board GP-1040
PCI slot GO-1050
Inserter MJ-7001
Damp heater MF-6000U/E
Wireless LAN modude GN-1040/1041
Printer kit.ELK GM-1050/1051 GM-1110
LCF MP-4004L/A
Memory GC-1230
Data overwrite kit GP-1060
Scanner kit.ELK GM-4010 GM-4110
Printer/ Scanner kit.ELK GM-2040/2041 GM-2110
Bluetooth modude GN-2010
Antena GN-3010
1.5 System List 1
Fig. 1-2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 - 14
2.
ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2.1
Error Code List
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALL SERVICE” symbol is blinking.
2.1.1
Jam
Error code E010
Classification Paper exit jam
E020
E030
Other paper jam
E061
E062
E063
E064
E065
E090 E110
E120
E130
E140
Paper misfeeding
Contents Paper not reaching fuser transport sensor: Paper which has passed the fuser unit does not reach the fuser transport sensor. Paper stopping at fuser transport sensor: The trailing edge of paper does not pass the fuser transport sensor after its leading edge has reached the fuser transport sensor. Power-ON jam: Paper is remaining on the paper transport path of the equipment when the power is turned ON. Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer: The size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer: The size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for 3rd drawer: The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size setting of the equipment. Incorrect paper size setting for 4th drawer: The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size setting of the equipment.
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.1
Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray: The size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size setting of the equipment. Image data delay jam: Image data to be printed cannot be prepared. Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which passed the reverse transport section does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper fed out of the bypass tray does not reach the registration sensor. 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 1st drawer feed sensor): Paper does not reach the 1st drawer feed sensor during the feeding at the 1st drawer. 2nd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 2nd drawer feed sensor): Paper does not reach the 2nd drawer feed sensor during the feeding at the 2nd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1 Ch.5.1.2
Ch.5.1.2
Ch.5.1.2
Ch.5.1.2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-1
2
Error code E150
Classification Paper misfeeding
E160
E180
E190
E200
Paper transport jam
E201
E210
E211
E220
E230
E240
E250
E260
Contents
Troubleshooting
3rd drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor): Paper does not reach the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer. 4th drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching 4th drawer feed sensor): Paper does not reach the 4th drawer feed sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. Option LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching Option LCF feed sensor): Paper does not reach the Option LCF feed sensor during the feeding at the Option LCF. Tandem LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor): Paper does not reach the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF. 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 1st drawer. 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at the 1st drawer. 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 2nd drawer. 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at the 2nd drawer. 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 2nd drawer transport sensor does not reach the 1st drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 2nd drawer. 1st drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer feed sensor does not reach the 1st drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 1st drawer. 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 2nd drawer feed sensor does not reach the 2nd drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 2nd drawer. Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching Option LCF transport sensor): Paper does not reach the Option LCF transport sensor during the feeding at the Option LCF. Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the Option LCF.
Ch.5.1.2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Ch.5.1.2
Ch.5.1.2
Ch.5.1.2
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-2
Error code E261
E2A1
E300
E301
E310
E320
E330
E331
E340
E350
E360
E370
Classification Paper transport jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
Option LCF transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at the Option LCF. Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the reverse section and horizontal transport section does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during duplex printing. 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer. 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer. 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 2nd transport sensor does not reach the 1st drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor does not reach the 2nd drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer. 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st drawer transport sensor does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 1st transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 2nd drawer transport sensor does not reach the 1st drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor does not reach the 2nd drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 4th drawer transport sensor does not reach the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor does not reach the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor during the feeding at the 3rd drawer.
Ch.5.1.1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.1
2 Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-3
Error code E380
Classification Paper transport jam
E3C0
E3C1
E3D0
E3E0
E3F0
E410
Cover open jam
E440 E450 E460
E470
Contents
Troubleshooting
4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching 4th drawer transport sensor): Paper which passed the 4th drawer feed sensor does not reach the 4th drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the 4th drawer. Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching registration sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st transport sensor does not reach the registration sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF. Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching intermediate transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 1st transport sensor does not reach the intermediate transport sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF. Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching 1st drawer transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 2nd drawer transport sensor does not reach the 1st drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF. Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching 2nd transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor does not reach the 2nd drawer transport sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF.
Ch.5.1.1
Tandem LCF transport jam (paper not reaching 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor): Paper which has passed the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed sensor does not reach the 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport sensor during the feeding at the Tandem LCF. Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing. Right lower cover (feed cover) open jam: The feed cover has opened during printing. Option LCF side cover open jam: The side cover of the Option LCF has opened during printing. Right center cover (bypass feed unit cover) open jam: The bypass feed unit cover has opened during printing. Left lower cover (exit cover) open jam: The exit cover has opened during printing.
Ch.5.1.1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.3 Ch.5.1.3 Ch.5.1.3 Ch.5.1.3
Ch.5.1.3
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-4
Error code E510
Classification Paper transport jam (Exit/Reverse section or other sections)
E511
E512
E540
E550
E570
E580
E590
E5A0 E711
E712
E713
E714
E715
E716
RADF jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching reverse sensor-2): Paper which has passed the reverse sensor-1 does not reach the reverse sensor-2 during duplex printing. Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching horizontal transport sensor-1): Paper which has passed the reverse sensor-2 does not reach the horizontal transport sensor-1 during duplex printing. Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching horizontal transport sensor-2): Paper which has passed the horizontal transport sensor-1 does not reach the horizontal transport sensor-2 during duplex printing. Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching horizontal transport sensor-3): Paper which has passed the horizontal transport sensor-2 does not reach the horizontal transport sensor-3 during duplex printing. Paper remaining jam at paper transport path: Paper is remaining on the paper transport path when the printing has finished. (Jam caused by a multiple paper feeding) Transport jam during duplex printing (paper not reaching reverse sensor-1): Paper which has passed the fuser unit transport sensor does not reach the reverse sensor-1 during duplex printing. Paper stopping at reverse section: The trailing edge of paper does not pass the reverse sensor-1 or reverse sensor-2 after its leading edge has reached the reverse sensor-1 or reverse sensor-2. Paper stopping at exit section: The trailing edge of paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached the exit sensor. Paper not reaching exit sensor: The leading edge of paper does not reach the exit sensor. Original not reaching original length detection sensor: An original fed out of the original feeding tray does not reach the original length detection sensor. Original not reaching registration sensor: An original fed out of the original feeding tray does not reach the original registration sensor. Original stopping at original length detection sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original length detection sensor after its leading edge has reached the original length detection sensor. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received while no original is placed on the original feeding tray. Tray lifting movement time-out: The lifting tray does not reach the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor. Tray lowering movement time-out: The lifting tray does not reach the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor.
Ch.5.1.1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.1
2 Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1 Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-5
Error code E721
Classification RADF jam
E722
E723
E724
E725
E726
E728
E731
E732
E733 E741
E742
E743
E751
Contents
Troubleshooting
Original not reaching read sensor: An original which has passed the original registration sensor (while its front side is being scanned) or the reverse sensor (while its back side is being scanned) does not reach the read sensor. Original not reaching large original exit sensor (during scanning): An original which has passed the read sensor does not reach the large original exit sensor when this original is transported from the scanning section to the exit section. Original not reaching small original reverse sensor (during scanning): An original which has passed the read sensor does not reach the small original reverse sensor when this original is transported from the scanning section to the reverse section. Original stopping at registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached the registration sensor. Original stopping at read sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached the read sensor. Transport/exit signal reception jam: The RADF has received the transport/exit signal from the equipment while no original is at the exposure waiting position. Original not reaching small original exit sensor (during scanning): An original which has passed the read sensor does not reach the small original exit sensor when this original is transported from the scanning section to the exit section. Original stopping at large original exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the large original exit sensor after its leading edge has reached the large original exit sensor. Original stopping at small original exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the small original exit sensor after its leading edge has reached the small original exit sensor. Original not reaching large original exit sensor (exit section) Original stopping at small original reverse sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the small original reverse sensor after its leading edge has reached the small original reverse sensor. Original not reaching small original reverse sensor (during reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original does not reach the small original reverse sensor when this original is fed out of the reverse section. Original not reaching small original exit sensor (during reverse feeding): An original which has passed the small original reverse sensor does not reach the small original exit sensor when this original is exited out of the reverse section. Original stopping at original intermediate transport sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original intermediate transport sensor after its leading edge has reached the original intermediate transport sensor.
Ch.5.1.4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
Ch.5.1.4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-6
Error code E752
Classification RADF jam
E761 E762 E763 E764 E765 E766 E767 E768 E800 E860 E870 E9F0 EA10
Finisher jam (Puncher section) Finisher jam (Finisher section)
EA20 EA30 EA40
EA50 EA60 EA80
Finisher jam (Saddle Stitcher section)
EA90 EAA0
EAB0
EAC0 EAD0
Other paper jam
Contents
Troubleshooting
Original not reaching original intermediate transport sensor: The leading edge of the original which has passed the read sensor does not reach the original intermediate transport sensor. Original remaining at original length detection sensor Original remaining at original registration sensor Original remaining at original width detection sensor Original remaining at read sensor Original remaining at original intermediate transport sensor Original remaining at small original reverse sensor Original remaining at small original exit sensor Original remaining at large original exit sensor 24 VDC supply off jam: A job is started or continued while 24 VDC supply is shut off. Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during the operation of the RADF. RADF open jam: The RADF has opened during the operation of the RADF. Hole punch jam: Hole punching is not performed properly. Paper transport delay jam: Paper which has passed the exit sensor does not reach the inlet sensor. Paper transport stop jam: Paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass the inlet sensor. Power-ON jam: Paper is remaining at the inlet sensor when the power is turned ON. Door open jam: The upper cover or the front cover of the Finisher has opened, or the upper door or the front door of the Hole Punch Unit has opened during printing. Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects paper earlier than the specified timing. Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
Ch.5.1.4
Door open jam: The delivery cover or the inlet cover has opened during printing. Power-ON jam: Paper is remaining at the No. 1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No. 3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when the power is turned ON. Paper transport stop jam: Paper which has passed the inlet sensor does not reach or pass the No. 1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No. 3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. Transport delay jam: Paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass the inlet sensor. Print end command time-out jam: The printing has not finished normally due to the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board at the end of the printing.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.4 Ch.5.1.5 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 5 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-7
2
Error code EAE0
Classification Finisher jam
EB30
EB50
Paper transport jam
EB60
EC00
Finisher jam (Inserter section)
Contents
Troubleshooting
Receiving period time-out jam: The printing cannot be finished normally due to the communication error between the equipment and the Finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment to the Finisher. Ready period time-out jam: The equipment judges that the paper transport to the Finisher is disabled due to the communication error between the equipment and the Finisher at the start of the printing. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of the preceding paper caused the misfeeding of the upcoming paper. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of the preceding paper caused the misfeeding of the upcoming paper (= redetection after no jam is detected at [EB50]). Inserter feeding delay jam
Ch.5.1.5 [ 5 ]
Ch.5.1.5 [ 5 ]
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.1
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC10
Inserter feeding stop jam
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC20 EC30 EC40
Inserter reverse path delay jam-1 Inserter reverse path stop jam-1 Inserter reverse path delay jam-2
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
EC50 EC60 EC70 EC80 EC90 ECA0 ECB0 ECC0 ECD0
Inserter reverse path stop jam-2 Inserter transport delay jam-1 Inserter transport stop jam-1 Inserter transport delay jam-2 Inserter transport stop jam-2 Paper remaining in Inserter Unit at power-ON Incorrect setting of paper size for Inserter Unit Inserter Unit misfeeding Inserter Unit door open jam
Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.5 [ 4 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2-8
2.1.2
Service call
Error code Classification C130 Paper feeding system related service call C140
C150
C160
C180
C1A0
C1C0
C260
Scanning system related service call
C270 C280 C360 C370
Process related service call
Contents Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.6 1st drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-1 does not run normally or the 1st drawer tray does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the 1st drawer is possible.) 2nd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-1 does Ch.5.1.6 not run normally or the 2nd drawer tray does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the 2nd drawer is possible.) Ch.5.1.6 3rd drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-2 does not run normally or the 3rd drawer tray does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the 3rd drawer is possible.) Ch.5.1.6 4th drawer tray abnormality: The tray-up motor-2 does not run normally or the 4th drawer tray does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the 4th drawer is possible.) Ch.5.1.6 Tandem LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The Tandem LCF tray-up motor does not run normally or the Tandem LCF tray does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the Tandem LCF is possible.) Tandem LCF end fence motor abnormality: The Tandem Ch.5.1.6 LCF end fence motor does not run normally or the Tandem LCF end fence does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the Tandem LCF is possible.) Ch.5.1.6 Option LCF tray-up motor abnormality: The Option LCF tray-up motor does not run normally or the Option LCF tray does not move normally. (Feeding of any other drawer than the Option LCF is possible.) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp Ch.5.1.7 (white reference) is not detected when the power is turned ON. Ch.5.1.7 Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time: The carriages do not shift from their home position within a specified period of time. Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a Ch.5.1.7 specified period of time: The carriages do not reach their home position within a specified period of time. Wire cleaner drive motor abnormality: The wire cleaner Ch.5.1.13 drive motor does not run normally or the charger wire cleaner does not move normally. Ch.5.1.13 Transfer belt cam motor abnormality: The transfer belt cam motor does not run normally when the power is turned ON or the copying is started.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2-9
2
Error code Classification C411 Fuser unit related service call C412
C443 C445 C446 C447 C449 C465 C466 C467 C468 C471 C472 C473 C474 C475 C480 C481 C490 C4A0 C4B0 C550 C560 C570 C580 C590
Optional communication related service call
Contents Troubleshooting Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Thermistor Ch.5.1.8 abnormality is detected at power-ON or the fuser roller temperature does not rise within a specified period of time after power-ON. Thermistor/heater abnormality at power-ON: Thermistor Ch.5.1.8 abnormality is detected at power-ON or the fuser roller temperature does not rise within a specified period of time after power-ON. Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (not Ch.5.1.8 reaching to intermediate temperature) Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (pre-runCh.5.1.8 ning end temperature abnormality) Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (pre-runCh.5.1.8 ning end temperature abnormality) Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (temperaCh.5.1.8 ture abnormality at ready status) Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment (overheatCh.5.1.8 ing) Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering Ch.5.1.8 ready status (pre-running end temperature abnormality) Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering Ch.5.1.8 ready status (pre-running end temperature abnormality) Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering Ch.5.1.8 ready status (temperature abnormality at ready status) Pressure roller thermistor abnormality after entering Ch.5.1.8 ready status (overheating) IH power voltage abnormality or IH initial abnormality Ch.5.1.8 (IH board initial abnormality) IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnormality) Ch.5.1.8 IH power voltage abnormality (power voltage upper limit Ch.5.1.8 abnormality) IH power voltage abnormality (power voltage lower limit Ch.5.1.8 abnormality) IH power voltage abnormality (power supply abnormality Ch.5.1.8 when door is opened) IH abnormality Ch.5.1.8 IGBT abnormality Ch.5.1.8 IH control circuit abnormality or IH coil abnormality: The Ch.5.1.8 IH control circuit is under abnormal conditions, or the IH coil is broken or has a short-circuit. End of cleaning web Ch.5.1.8 Fuser unit counter abnormality Ch.5.1.8 RADF interface error: Communication error has occurred Ch.5.1.9 between the RADF and the scanner. Communication error between Engine-CPU and PFC Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and Finisher Communication error between Engine-CPU and LaserCPU
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Ch.5.1.9 Ch.5.1.9 Ch.5.1.9 Ch.5.1.9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 10
Error code Classification C730 RADF related service call C820 C830 C840 C850 C860 C870 C940 C970 CA10 CA20 CA30 CA41 CA42 CA43 CA44 CA50 CA90 CAA0
CAB0
CAC0 CAF0
Circuit related service call Process related service call Laser optical unit related service call
Contents Troubleshooting EEPROM error: EEPROM cannot be initialized normally Ch.5.1.10 when the code 05-352 is performed or the data cannot be read out of the EEPROM when the power is turned ON. Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot Ch.5.1.10 be adjusted normally when the code 05-356 is performed. Original length detection sensor adjustment error: The Ch.5.1.10 original length detection sensor cannot be adjusted normally when the code 05-356 is performed. Ch.5.1.10 Small original reverse sensor adjustment error: The small original reverse sensor cannot be adjusted normally when the code 05-356 is performed. Tray lift motor abnormality Ch.5.1.10 Large original exit sensor adjustment error: The large Ch.5.1.10 original exit sensor cannot be adjusted normally when the code 05-356 is performed. Temperature detection error Ch.5.1.10 Engine-CPU abnormality Ch.5.1.13 High-voltage transformer leakage abnormality: The highvoltage leakage of the main charger is detected. Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor does not run normally. H-sync detection error: Laser beam cannot be detected at the SNS board. Secondary scanning coarse adjustment error [e-STUDIO850] Window comparator abnormality (error during secondary scanning control) [e-STUDIO850 Sensor signal busy error (error during secondary scanning control) [e-STUDIO850] Comparator abnormality [e-STUDIO850] Beam sensor detection error [e-STUDIO850] Laser power adjustment error [e-STUDIO850] Image data transmission error of SYS board: Communication error has occurred between the PLG board and the SYS board. Secondary scanning fine adjustment error: Secondary scanning control by the galvanometer mirror does not end normally. [e-STUDIO850] Inter-page correction error of secondary scanning: Interpage secondary scanning control by the galvanometer mirror does not end normally. [e-STUDIO850] Primary scanning dot adjustment error: Primary scanning control does not end normally. [e-STUDIO850] Inter-page correction error of primary scanning: Interpage primary scanning control does not end normally. [e-STUDIO850]
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11
Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.11
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 11 06/09
2
Error code Classification CB10 Finisher related service call CB20 CB30 CB40 CB50 CB60 CB70 CB80
CB90 CBA0 CBB0 CBC0 CBD0 CBE0 CBF0 CC00
CC10 CC20
CC40
Contents Troubleshooting Feed motor abnormality: The feed motor does not run Ch.5.1.12 normally or the stack feed roller does not move normally. Delivery motor abnormality: The delivery motor does not Ch.5.1.12 run normally or the delivery roller does not move normally. Tray lift motor abnormality Ch.5.1.12 Alignment motor (rear) abnormality: The alignment motor Ch.5.1.12 (rear) does not run normally or the alignment plate does not move normally. Staple motor abnormality: The staple motor does not run Ch.5.1.12 normally or the stapler does not move normally. Stapler shift motor abnormality: The stapler shift motor Ch.5.1.12 does not run normally or the Staple Unit does not move normally. Stack amount detection sensor abnormality Ch.5.1.12 Ch.5.1.12 Backup RAM data abnormality: 1) Abnormality of checksum value on the finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. 2) Abnormality of checksum value on the punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. Ch.5.1.12 Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: The paper pushing plate motor does not run normally or the paper pushing plate does not move normally. Stitch motor (front) abnormality: The stitch motor (front) Ch.5.1.12 does not run normally or the rotational cam does not move normally. Ch.5.1.12 Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: The stitch motor (rear) does not run normally or the rotational cam does not move normally. Alignment motor abnormality: The alignment motor does Ch.5.1.12 not run normally or the alignment plate does not move normally. Guide motor abnormality: The guide motor does not run Ch.5.1.12 normally or the guide does not move normally. Paper folding motor abnormality: The paper folding motor Ch.5.1.12 does not run normally or the paper folding roller does not move normally. Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: The paper Ch.5.1.12 positioning plate motor does not run normally or the paper positioning plate does not move normally. Sensor connector abnormality: Disconnection of each Ch.5.1.12 connector of the guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor and paper pushing plate leading position sensor is detected. Ch.5.1.12 Microswitch abnormality: Any of the inlet door switch, delivery door switch and front cover closing detection switch is opened while all the covers are closed. Communication error between Finisher and Saddle Stitch Ch.5.1.12 section: Communication error has occurred between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC board. Swing motor abnormality: The swing motor does not run Ch.5.1.12 normally or the swing unit does not move normally.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 12
Error code Classification CC50 Finisher related service call CC60 CC80 CCC1 CCD1 CCE1 CD00 CD10
Laser optical unit related service call Process related service call
CD20 CD30 CD40 CD50 CDE0 CE50
Fuser unit related service call Finisher related service call Image quality control related service call
CE90 CF00
Finisher related service call
CF10
CF70
Process related service call
CF80 F070 F090 F091 F092 F100 F101 F102 F103
Communication related service call Other service call
Contents Horizontal registration motor abnormality: The horizontal registration motor does not run normally or the puncher does not move normally. Punch motor abnormality: The punch motor does not run normally or the puncher does not move normally. Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1029] Communication error between Inserter Unit and Finisher Inserter EEPROM abnormality Inserter fan motor abnormality Laser initialization time-out: Laser control does not end within the initialization period. [e-STUDIO850] Cleaning brush drive motor abnormality: The cleaning brush drive motor does not run normally when the power is turned ON or the copying is started. Used toner transport motor abnormality: The used toner transport motor does not run normally when the power is turned ON or the copying is started. Recycle toner transport motor abnormality: The recycle toner transport motor does not run normally when the power is turned ON or the copying is started. Toner bag full Web motor signal path abnormality
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.12
Paddle unit home position error detection: The paddle unit does not leave the home position when the paddle motor has been driven for specified time. [MJ-1029] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of the temperature/humidity sensor is out of the specified range. Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of the drum thermistor is out of the specified range. Belt escape unit home position error detection: The belt escape unit does not leave the home position when the Knurled belt motor has been driven for specified time. [MJ-1029] Undefined error code processing: If the engine of the equipment judges that a code (command) other than the defined error codes is sent from the finisher, it regards this as a CF10 error. New toner transport motor abnormality: The new toner transport motor does not run normally when new toner is supplied. Hopper motor lockup: The hopper motor does not run normally when the power is ON or the copying is started. Communication error between System-CPU and EngineCPU SRAM abnormality on SYS board FRAM abnormality on SYS board SRAM and FRAM abnormality on SYS board HDD format error: The HDD cannot be formatted normally. HDD unmounted: Connection of the HDD is not detected. HDD boot error: HDD does not become ready for booting. HDD data transfer time-out: Data reading or writing is not executed in a specified period of time.
Ch.5.1.12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.12 Ch.5.1.12 Ch.5.1.12 Ch.5.1.12 Ch.5.1.12 Ch.5.1.11 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.8
Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.12
Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.9 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 13 07/04
2
Error code Classification F104 Other service call F105 F106 F107 F108 F110 F111 F120 F130 F200
Communication related service call Other service call
Contents HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of the HDD. Other HDD errors Point and Print partition damage /BOX partition damage /SHA partition damage Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Scanner response abnormality Database abnormality: Databases do not run normally. Invalid MAC address Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is taken off
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.9 Ch.5.1.9 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13 Ch.5.1.13
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 14 05/05
2.1.3
Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function
1) Internet FAX related error (When GM-1050/4010, GM-1051/4010, GM-2040, GM-2041, GM-1110/4110, or GM-2110 is installed) Error code 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C20 1C21 1C22 1C30 1C31 1C32 1C33 1C40 1C60 1C61 1C62 1C63 1C64 1C65 1C66 1C69 1C6A 1C6B 1C6C 1C6D 1C70 1C71 1C72 1C80 1C81 1C82 1CC0 1CC1
Contents
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time-out error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Onramp Gateway transmission failure Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Job canceling Power failure
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 1 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 15 07/11
2
2) RFC related error (When GM-1050/4010, GM-1051/4010, GM-2040, GM-2041, GM-1110/4110, or GM-2110 is installed) Error code 2500
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Syntax error, command unrecognized
2501
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
2503
Bad sequence of commands
2504 2550
Command parameter not implemented Mailbox unavailable
2551
User not local
2552
Insufficient system storage
2553
Mailbox name not allowed
Contents
Troubleshooting
HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) HOST NAME error (RFC: 504)
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
Destination mail address error (RFC: 550) Destination mail address error (RFC: 551) Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552) Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 2 ]
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 16 07/11
3) Electronic Filing related error Error code 2B10 2B11 2B20 2B21 2B30 2B31
2B32
2B50 2B51 2B60
2B70
2B71 2B80 2B90 2BA0 2BA1 2BB0 2BB1 2BC0 2BC1 2BD0 2BE0 2BF0 2BF1
2BF2
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen There was no applicable job.
Contents No applicable job error in job control module JOB status abnormality File library function error Exceeding file capacity
Job status failed. Failed to access file. Message size exceeded limit or maximum size Insufficient disk space. Insufficient disk space in /BOX partition Failed to access Electronic Filing. Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/ deleted Failed to print Electronic Filing Electronic Filing printing failure: document. Specified document can not be printed because of client's access (being edited, etc.). Failed to process image. Image library error Failed to process print image. List library error The folder was renamed. A folder A folder with the same name exists in the box. of the same name already existed. The document was renamed. A A document with the same name exists document of the same name in the box or folder. already existed. Document(s) expire(s) in a few Documents expiring in a few days exist days Hard Disk space for Electronic Hard disk space in /BOX partition is Filing nearly full. nearly full (90%). Insufficient Memory. Insufficient memory capacity Invalid Box password specified. Invalid Box password Incorrect paper size A Paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected. Job canceled Job canceling Power failure occurred Power failure System fatal error. Fatal failure occurred. Failed to acquire resource. System management module resource acquiring failure Power failure occurred during ePower failure occurred during restoring Filing restoring. of Electronic Filing Failed to get machine parameter. Machine parameter reading failure Maximum number of pages has Exceeding maximum number of pages been exceeded (list Maximum) Maximum number of documents Exceeding maximum number of documents has been exceeded (list Maximum) Maximum number of folders has Exceeding maximum number of folders been exceeded (list Maximum)
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] -
-
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 3 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 17 07/11
2
4) E-mail related error (When GM-1050/4010, GM-1051/4010, GM-2040, GM-2041, GM-1110/4110, or GM-2110 is installed) Error code 2C10 2C11 2C12 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C20 2C21 2C22 2C30 2C31 2C32 2C33 2C40 2C43 2C44 2C60 2C61 2C62 2C63 2C64 2C65 2C66 2C69 2C6A 2C6B 2C6C 2C6D 2C70 2C71 2C72 2C80 2C81 2CC0 2CC1
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status
Contents
Troubleshooting
System access abnormality
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified Message size exceeded limit or maximum size Illegal Job status
Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
System management module access abnormality
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. Failed to convert image file format Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. Failed to read AddressBook Not enough memory Invalid Domain Address Invalid Domain Address Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Invalid address specified in From: field Invalid address specified in To: field NIC system error SMTP service is not available Failed SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP Authentication Failed Failed to process received E-mail job Failed to process received Fax job Job canceled Power failure occurred
Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Encryption error. Failed to create file.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Encryption PDF enforced mode error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
HDD full failure during processing
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time-out error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Terminal mail address error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Destination mail address error (No RFC error) System error SMTP client OFF SMTP authentication error POP before SMTP error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Process failure of FAX job received
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
Job canceling Power failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Ch.5.1.14 [ 4 ]
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 18 07/11
5) File sharing related error (When GM-1050/4010, GM-1051/4010, GM-2040, GM-2041, GM-1110/4110, or GM-2110 is installed) Error code 2D10 2D11 2D12 2D13 2D14 2D15
2D20 2D21 2D22 2D30 2D31 2D32 2D33 2D40 2D43 2D44 2D60 2D61 2D62 2D63 2D64 2D65
2D66 2D67 2D68 2DA0 2DA1 2DA2 2DA3
2DA4
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Encryption error. Failed to create file. Creating the image file was not permitted. Failed to copy file Invalid parameter specified Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path Specified network path is invalid. Check destination path Logon to file server failed. Check username and password There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. FTP service is not available File Sharing service is not available Expired scan documents deleted from share folder. Expired Sent Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Expired Received Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Scanned documents in shared folder deleted upon user's request. Sent Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user's request.
Contents
Troubleshooting
System access abnormality
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding document number
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Encryption error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Encryption PDF enforced mode error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
File library access abnormality Invalid parameter File server connection error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Invalid network path
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Login failure
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed.
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
HDD full failure during processing
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
FTP service not available File sharing service not available
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly.
-
Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly.
-
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
-
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 19 07/11
2
Error code 2DA5
2DA6 2DA7 2DA8 2DC0 2DC1
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Received Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon user's request. Failed to delete file. Failed to acquire resource. The HDD is running out of capacity for the shared folder. Job canceled Power failure occurred
Contents Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure Hard disk space in /SHA partition is nearly full (90%). Job canceling Power failure
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting -
Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 5 ]
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 20 07/11
6) E-mail reception related error (When GM-1050/4010, GM-1051/4010, GM-2040, GM-2041, GM-1110/4110, or GM-2110 is installed) Error code 3A10 3A11
3A12
3A20 3A21
3A22
3A30 3A40 3A50 3A51
3A52
3A60 3A61
3A62
3A70
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Whole partial mails were not reached by timeout. Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable.
Contents E-mail MIME error
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
E-mail analysis error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Partial mail time-out error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Partial mail related error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Insufficient HDD capacity error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Warning of partial mail interruption
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 21 07/11
2
Error code 3A80 3A81
3A82
3B10 3B11
3B12
3B20 3B21
3B22
3B30 3B31
3B32
3B40 3B41
3B42
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Contents Partial mail reception setting OFF
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
E-mail format error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Content-Type error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Charset error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
E-mail decode error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 22
Error code 3C10 3C11
3C12
3C13 3C20 3C21
3C22
3C30 3C31
3C32
3C40 3C41
3C42
3C50
3C51
3C52
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Contents TIFF analysis error
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] TIFF compression error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
TIFF resolution error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
TIFF paper size error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Offramp destination error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 23
2
Error code 3C60 3C61
3C62
3C70 3D10
3D20
3D30 3E10 3E20
3E30 3E40 3F00 3F10 3F20 3F30 3F40
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen
Contents
Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Power Failure has been occurred in E-mail receiving. SMTP Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail was deleted. Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail. Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail.
Offramp security error
POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error occurred in the received mail. File I/O Error has been occurred in this mail. The mail could not be received until File I/O is recovered.
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Power failure error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Destination address error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Offramp destination limitation error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
FAX board error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
POP3 server connection error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
POP3 server connection time-out error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
POP3 login error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
POP3 login method error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
File I/O error
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 24
2.1.4
Printer function error
Following codes are displayed at the end of the user name on the print job log screen (When GM-1050/4010, GM-1051/4010, GM-2040, GM-2041, GM-1110/4110, or GM-2110 is installed) Error code 4030
4031 4032 4033
4034 4035 4036 A221 A222 A290 A291 A292
Contents No Printer Kit / Printer Kit function disabled: The Printer Kit (GM-1010) or the Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2010) is not installed. Or network printing of an XPS file is performed without the Expansion Memory (GC-1230), or network printing is performed after the termination of a trial period. HDD full during print: Large quantity image data by private print or invalid network print are saved in HDD. Private-print-only error: Jobs other than Private print jobs cannot be performed. Printing data storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD temporarily (Proof print, Private print, Scheduled print, etc.) cannot be performed. e-Filing storing limitation error: Printing with its data being stored to the HDD (print and e-Filing, print to e-Filing, etc.) cannot be performed. Local file storing limitation error: Network FAX or Internet FAX cannot be sent when "Local" is selected for the destination of the file to save. User authentication error: The user who intended to print a document is not registered as a user. Print job cancellation: Print job (copy, list print, network print) is deleted from the print job screen. Print job power failure: The power of the equipment is turned OFF during print job (copy, list print, network print). Limit over error: The numbers of output pages have exceeded those specified with both of the department code and the user code at the same time. Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the user code. Limit over error: The number of output pages has exceeded the one specified with the department code.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Troubleshooting Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ] Ch.5.1.14 [ 6 ]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 25 07/11
2
In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example EA10 99999999 05 03 10 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 Error code Total counter YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 8 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.) A
Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: Tandem LCF 3: 1st drawer 4: 2nd drawer 5: 3rd drawer 6: 4th drawer 7: Option LCF 8: Inserter
B
Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13” LG G: Unused H: A6-R I: Postcard J: 8.5SQ K: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: Unused Q: Unused R: Unused S: Unused T: Unused Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode
C
D E F
G H I J K L
MMM NNN O
0: Not selected 1: APS 2: AMS Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive Reversal Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Mode 0: Unused 1: Unused 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Unused 5: Gray scale
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 26
2.2
Self-diagnosis Modes
Mode Control panel check mode
For start [0]+[1]+ [POWER]
Contents All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink.
For exit [POWER] OFF/ON
Display -
Test mode
[0]+[3]+ [POWER] [0]+[4]+ [POWER] [0]+[5]+ [POWER] [0]+[8]+ [POWER] [9]+[START] +[POWER] [6]+[START] +[POWER] [8]+[9]+ [POWER]
Checks the status of input/output signals.
[POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON
100% C A4 TEST MODE 100% P A4 TEST PRINT 100% A A4 TEST MODE 100% D TEST MOD 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT 100% K TEST MODE -
Test print mode Adjustment mode Setting mode List print mode PM support mode Firmware update mode
Outputs the test patterns. Adjusts various items. Sets various items. Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. Clears each counter. Performs updating of the system firmware.
Notes: 1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously. 2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagnosis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line connectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connecting the modular code. To exit from Self-diagnosis modes: Shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds except for the control panel check mode and the firmware update mode. • Control panel check mode (01): [0][1] [POWER]
LED lit/ LCD blinking
[START]
(Button check)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[START]
Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 27 06/09
2
•
Test mode (03): Refer to check (test mode 03)".
•
Test print mode (04): Refer to
•
Adjustment mode (05): Refer to
•
Setting mode (08): Refer to
•
List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code. [9][START] [POWER]
P.2-29 "2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03)" and
P.2-36 "2.2.2 Output
P.2-40 "2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04)". P.2-41 "2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)".
P.2-74 "2.2.5 Setting mode (08)".
[START] (Code) [Digital keys] 101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first 102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed
[START]
[Digital keys] Key in the last code to be printed
[START] List starts to be printed
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
(Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history (Maximum 1000 items) 107: Error history (Latest 80 items)
•
PM support mode (6S): [6][START] [POWER]
•
(Code) 1: Auto-toner adjustment 2: PM Support Screen
[START] (Operation started)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING”. [POWER] ON Normal [0][1]
Warming up
Control panel check mode
[0][3]
Test mode
[0][4] Test print mode
[0][5] Adjustment mode
[0][8] Setting mode
[9][START] List print mode
[6][START] PM support mode
[8][9]
Firmware update mode
Ready
[POWER] OFF *1 To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 28
2.2.1
Input check (Test mode 03)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and the digital keys in the test mode (03).
2
[0][3] [POWER]
[START]
[FAX] or [COPY]
[Digital keys]
(LCD ON)
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Fig. 2-2 Example of display during input check
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 29
[FAX] button: OFF / [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: OFF / [COPY] LED: OFF) Digital key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g.
e.g. A B C D E
Intermediate transport sensor 1st drawer transport sensor 1st drawer feed sensor 1st drawer tray-up sensor
No paper No paper No paper Upper limit position
F
1st drawer bottom sensor
Bottom position
G H A B C D E
1st drawer empty sensor 1st drawer detection sensor Feed cover sensor 2nd drawer transport sensor 2nd drawer feed sensor 2nd drawer tray-up sensor
No paper Drawer present Cover closed No paper No paper Upper limit position
F
2nd drawer bottom sensor
Bottom position
G H A B C
No paper Drawer present No paper
D E
2nd drawer empty sensor 2nd drawer detection sensor 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF drawer transport sensor 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF drawer feed sensor 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF drawer tray-up sensor
F
3rd drawer / Tandem LCF drawer bottom sensor Bottom position
G H A B C D E
3rd drawer / Tandem LCF drawer empty sensor 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF detection sensor 4th drawer transport sensor 4th drawer feed sensor 4th drawer tray-up sensor
No paper Drawer present No paper No paper Upper limit position
F
4th drawer bottom sensor
Bottom position
G H A B C D E
4th drawer empty sensor 4th drawer detection sensor LCF connection LCF set sensor LCF feed sensor LCF tray-up sensor
No paper Drawer present Not connected Unit opened No paper Upper limit position
F
LCF bottom sensor
Bottom position
G H
LCF empty sensor LCF tray sensor
No paper Tray opened
-
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
No paper Upper limit position
Paper present Paper present Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Paper present No drawer Cover opened Paper present Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Paper present No drawer Paper present Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Paper present No drawer Paper present Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Paper present No drawer Connected Unit closed Paper present Other than upper limit position Other than bottom position Paper present Tray closed
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 30
Digital key
Button
E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F
No paper Cover closed Cove opened Paper present No paper No paper No paper Connected Correct stacking No paper Bottom position
G
End fence home position sensor
Home position
H
End fence stop position sensor
Stop position
A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
Exit/Reverse section connection Horizontal transport sensor-1 Horizontal transport sensor-2 Horizontal transport sensor-3 Finisher connection (IPC connection) Fuser unit switch Web motor connection signal Developer unit switch
Not connected Paper present Paper present Paper present Not connected Connected Not connected Not connected
C
[8]
[9]
[0]
e.g.
Bypass paper size detection sensor-3 (Refer to Table 1) Bypass paper size detection sensor-2 (Refer to Table 1) Bypass paper size detection sensor-1 (Refer to Table 1) Bypass paper size detection sensor-0 (Refer to Table 1) Bypass feed sensor Bypass feed unit cover sensor Exit cover sensor Exit sensor Fuser transport sensor Reverse sensor-2 Reverse sensor-1 Tandem LCF connection switch Standby side mis-stacking sensor Standby side empty sensor Tandem LCF bottom sensor
B
[7]
Items to check
e.g. A
[6]
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
D
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 0 -
Paper present Cover opened Cover closed No paper Paper present Paper present Paper present Not connected Incorrect stacking Paper present Other than bottom position Other than home position Other than stop position Connected No paper No paper No paper Connected Not connected Connected Connected
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 31
2
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper size detection sensor and the paper width 3 0 1 1 1 0 1
Bypass paper-width sensor 2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
Paper-width size
0 1 1 1 0 1 1
A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4/LG B5-R
[FAX] button: ON / [COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON / [COPY] LED: OFF) Digital key
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G
Exit sensor Cover interlock switch (front cover (lower)) Toner bag full detection sensor Fuser exit sensor Front cover switch (front cover (upper)) Auto-toner sensor Cleaner unit connection Wire cleaner position detection switch
H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G
Exit cover sensor Destination detection-1 Destination detection-2
H
Transfer belt contact detection sensor
Counter connection signal-2 Key copy counter connection Toner cartridge detection switch Toner cartridge empty sensor High-voltage transformer charging error Web detection sensor Registration sensor Transfer belt release detection sensor
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Paper present Cover opened Full No paper Cover closed Not connected Not connected Stop position Cover opened Other than SAD Other than TWD Not connected Not connected No cartridge Toner present Cover closed End of web No paper Other than release position Other than contact position
e.g. No paper Cover closed Not full Paper present Cover opened Connected Connected Other than stop position Cover closed SAD TWD Connected Connected Cartridge present No drawer Error Web remaining Paper present Release position Contact position
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 32
Digital key
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[0]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g. A B C D E F G H
RADF connection RADF opening/closing switch Carriage home position sensor
Connected RADF opened Home position
A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A
Automatic original detection sensor (APS-R) Automatic original detection sensor (APS-C) Automatic original detection sensor (APS-3) Automatic original detection sensor (APS-2) Automatic original detection sensor (APS-1) Original tray sensor Original empty sensor Jam access cover opening/closing switch RADF opening/closing switch Large original exit sensor Original intermediate transport sensor Read sensor Original registration sensor Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor
No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present Lower limit position
B
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor
Upper limit position
C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
Small original exit sensor Small original reverse sensor Original length detection sensor Original width detection sensor-1 Original width detection sensor-2 Original width detection sensor-3 APS operation sensor 24V power supply (RADF) Original tray width sensor (higher bits) Original tray width sensor Original tray width sensor Original tray width sensor Original tray width sensor Original tray width sensor Original tray width sensor Original tray width sensor (lower bits)
Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present APS sensor ON Power OFF Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1 Bit 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e.g. Not connected RADF closed Other than home position Original present Original present Original present Original present Original present No original No original Cover closed RADF closed No original No original No original No original Other than lower limit position Other than upper limit position No original No original No original No original No original No original APS sensor OFF Power ON Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 Bit 0
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 33
2
[FAX] button: OFF / [COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF / [COPY] LED: ON) Digital key [1] [2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
Temperature/humidity sensor (displays temperature inside of the equipment) Temperature/humidity sensor (displays humidity inside of the equipment) Drum thermistor (displays drum surface temperature) -
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
e.g. -
Temperature [°C]
-
Humidity [%RH]
-
Temperature [°C]
-
-
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 34
Digital key
[9]
[0]
Button
Contents Highlighted display Normal display
Items to check
e.g. A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H
Dongle for Printer/Scanner Kit (GM-2040/2041) Dongle for Printer Kit (GM-1050/1051) Dongle for Scanner Kit (GM-4010) Dongles for other equipments / Other USB devices Judgement for acceptable USB storage device (*1) -
e.g.
Connectable Connectable Connectable Connectable
Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable Not connectable
Acceptable
Not acceptable
-
-
*1 • Be sure to install the USB storage device to the equipment and check if the device can be used with this code. • Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB storage device before performing the check, otherwise this code cannot be used. • It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB storage device.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 35 07/11
2
2.2.2
Output check (test mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by keying in the following codes in the test mode 03. Procedure 1 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
Operation ON
[START]
Stop code
[START]
Operation OFF
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 2 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
Operation One direction
[START]
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation ON
[START]
Operation OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
[POWER] OFF
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 36
Code 101
Function Drum motor ON (operational without developer unit)
Code 151
Function Code No. 101 function OFF
Procedure 1
102
152
Code No. 102 function OFF
1
153 158 160
Code No. 103 function OFF Code No. 108 function OFF Code No. 110 function OFF
1 1 1
111 112 113
New toner supply motor ON (operational with developer unit) Polygonal motor (600 dpi) ON Registration motor ON Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 ON Drum separation finger solenoid ON Developer unit motor ON Fuser motor ON
161 162 163
Code No. 111 function OFF Code No. 112 function OFF Code No. 113 function OFF
1 1 1
114 115 116 118 120 121 122 123
Transfer belt motor ON Cleaning brush drive motor ON Used toner transport motor ON Laser ON Exit motor (normal) ON Exit motor (increased speed) ON LCF feed motor ON Hopper motor ON
164 165 166 168 170 171 172 173
Code No. 114 function OFF Code No. 115 function OFF Code No. 116 function OFF Code No. 118 function OFF Code No. 120 function OFF Code No. 121 function OFF Code No. 122 function OFF Code No. 123 function OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
124 125 126
Web motor ON Feed motor ON Reverse motor (normal / forward rotation) ON Reverse motor (increased speed / forward rotation) ON Reverse motor (normal / reverse rotation) ON Reverse motor (increased speed / reverse rotation) ON Recycle toner transport motor ON New toner transport motor ON Transport motor ON (processing speed) Transport motor ON (feeding speed) Transport motor ON (ADU feeding speed)
174 175 176
Code No. 124 function OFF Code No. 125 function OFF Code No. 126 function OFF
1 1 1
177
Code No. 127 function OFF
1
178
Code No. 128 function OFF
1
179
Code No. 129 function OFF
1
181 182 183
Code No. 131 function OFF Code No. 132 function OFF Code No. 133 function OFF
1 1 1
184 185
Code No. 134 function OFF Code No. 135 function OFF
1 1
103 108 110
127 128 129 131 132 133 134 135
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 37
2
Code 201 202 204 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 218 220 221 225 226 228 229 230 231 234 235 236 237 240 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 254 255 257 258 259 260 261 264 267 270 271
Function 1st drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 2nd drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF Tandem LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF Tandem LCF end fence reciprocating movement Tandem LCF end fence motor ON/OFF 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch ON/OFF 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport clutch ON/OFF Document feed motor (forward rotation) ON/OFF Document feed motor (reverse rotation) ON/OFF Read motor (forward rotation) ON/OFF Key copy counter count-up Horizontal transport section drive clutch-2 ON/OFF Horizontal transport section drive clutch-3 ON/OFF 4th drawer transport clutch ON/OFF 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF feed clutch ON/OFF 4th drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 1st drawer transport clutch ON/OFF 2nd drawer transport clutch ON/OFF 3rd drawer / Tandem LCF transport clutch ON/OFF Bypass pickup solenoid ON/OFF Discharge LED ON/OFF Exit section cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Exit section cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Developer unit fan ON/OFF Wire cleaner drive motor ON Transfer belt cam motor up/down Transfer belt power supply roller bias TR1 ON/OFF Transfer belt power supply roller bias TR2 ON/OFF Transfer belt power supply roller bias TR3 ON/OFF Developer bias +DC ON/OFF (operational without developer unit) Developer bias -DC1 ON/OFF (operational without developer unit) Developer bias -DC2 ON/OFF (operational without developer unit) Developer bias -DC3 ON/OFF (operational without developer unit) Main charger ON/OFF (operational without developer unit) Duct in fan ON/OFF Transfer belt cleaning brush bias ON/OFF (operational without developer unit) Duct out fan (high speed) ON/OFF Duct out fan (low speed) ON/OFF Fuser cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Fuser cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Scan motor ON (automatically stops at limit position; speed can be changed with the [ZOOM] button) SLG board cooling fan ON/OFF Exposure lamp ON/OFF Tandem LCF tray-up motor up/down LCF tray motor tray-up
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 38
Code 272 273 274 276 278 279 280 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 292 293 295 450 451 452 454
Function LCF feed clutch ON/OFF LCF transport clutch ON/OFF Gate solenoid ON/OFF Tray-up motor-1 ON (1st drawer tray goes up) Tray-up motor-1 ON (2nd drawer tray goes up) Tray-up motor-2 ON (3rd drawer tray goes up) Tray-up motor-2 ON (4th drawer tray goes up) Large original exit roller (forward rotation) ON/OFF Large original exit roller (reverse rotation) ON/OFF Small original exit roller (forward rotation) ON/OFF Small original exit roller (reverse rotation) ON/OFF Large original exit solenoid ON/OFF Small original exit solenoid ON/OFF Large original exit roller release solenoid ON/OFF Tray lift motor tray-up/down Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Laser unit cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Power OFF mode IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Reverse section cooling fan-1 (front side) ON/OFF Reverse section cooling fan-2 (front side) ON/OFF
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 39
2
2.2.3
Test print mode (test mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04). [0][4] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation Continuous Test Printing
[CLEAR]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed. Code 111 113 142 182 184
Types of test pattern Primary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Grid pattern Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (dither) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps and dither process check pattern
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Remarks Error diffusion Error diffusion / gamma adjustment pattern Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm Gamma adjustment pattern Gamma adjustment check pattern
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 40
2.2.4
Adjustment mode (05)
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode. When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds. Procedure 1 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[CANCEL]
([FAX] [ENTER] [POWER] or or OFF/ON [COPY]) [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) (Test copy)
[CLEAR] *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). (Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[0][5] [POWER]
(Code)
(
[START]
Value displayed
)
([FAX] [ENTER] or or [COPY]) [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable) (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START] [CANCEL]
[UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
([FAX] [POWER] or OFF/ON [COPY]) (Exit) (Test copy)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] value (Stores in RAM )
([FAX] or [COPY]) (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 41
2
Procedure 6 [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
(
[START]
Automatic adjustment
([FAX] or [COPY]) (Test copy)
)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][5] [POWER]
[START]
Automatic ( adjustment )
(
[ENTER] Stores value in RAM
)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
*
([FAX] or [COPY]) (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed.
Procedure 10 [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
[START]
Value ( displayed )
[START]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17 [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
(
Automatic adjustment
)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] value ( Stores in RAM )
([FAX] or [COPY]) (Test copy)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 42 05/05
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen. Code 1 3 9
Types of test pattern Grid pattern Grid pattern (Duplex printing) Gamma adjustment pattern (dither)
10
Gamma adjustment pattern (error diffusion)
90
Duplex test copy (single->duplex)
91
Duplex test copy (single->single)
92
Duplex test copy (duplex->duplex)
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks Refer to 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment Refer to 3.2.3 Printer related adjustment Refer to 3.2.2 Paper alignment at registration roller Refer to 3.2.2 Paper alignment at registration roller Duplex printing from the specified drawer is performed. Any number of originals can be used for this test. Duplex scanning from the RADF is performed and then single-sided printing from the specified drawer is performed. Any number of originals can be used for this test. Duplex scanning from the RADF is performed and then duplex printing from the specified drawer is performed. Any number of originals can be used for this test.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 43
2
Notes: • The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. • In “RAM”, the NVRAM or FRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board and “SYS” stands for the SYS board.
Code
Classification
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Automatic adjustment of ALL auto-toner sensor (Fuser heater ON)
RAM
Contents
-
The adjustment starts approx. 3 minutes after this mode has been selected, and then the value is automatically adjusted. The adjustment value is fixed by pressing the [ENTER] button. * This selection is disabled when the developer unit is not installed. (Ch.3.1) The adjustment value of the auto-toner sensor set in the code 05-200 is verified. * This selection is disabled when the developer unit is not installed. The developer bias is output. Use this code to verify the output value of the high-voltage transformer. * The value is output while the developer unit is taken off from the drum. (Ch.3.6) The main charger grid bias is output. Use this code to verify the output value of the high-voltage transformer. * Take off the developer unit to enable this code. (Ch.3.6)
200
Developer
201
Developer
Correction of auto-toner sensor (Fuser heater ON)
ALL
128
M
205
Developer
Developer bias DC output adjustment
ALL
113
M
210
Charger
Main charger grid bias output adjustment
ALL
102
M
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure 17
3
3
3
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 44 05/05
Code 221
241
Adjustment mode (05) Default ClassiFunc- Transfer Transfer transformer DC ALL 138 output adjustment (C)
Image quality control
242
244
247
248
Image quality control
249
251-0
Charger
251-1 253-0 253-1
Development
Contents
M
When the value increases, the transfer transformer output increases. The output value of the transfer belt power supply roller is unmeasurable since its voltage is extremely high. * Make sure to close the front cover when this code is used. Never touch the highvoltage section. * This selection is disabled when the developer unit is not installed. A relative humidity detected at the image quality closed-loop control is displayed. 0: Normal 1: Error (control stopped) 2: Error (sensor abnormality) The drum surface potential of the main charger center bias measured by the sensor is displayed. The humidity of the inside of the equipment is displayed. [Unit: RH%] A drum surface temperature detected at the drum surface potential sensor control is displayed. The measured value of the residual voltage after discharging is displayed.
3
The lower limit bit value of the main charger grid control voltage is output. The upper limit bit value of the main charger grid control voltage is output. The lower limit bit value of the developer bias control voltage is output. The upper limit bit value of the developer bias control voltage is output.
4
Relative humidity display at image quality closed-loop control
ALL
55
M
Drum surface potential sensor control status
ALL
0
M
ALL
0
M
ALL
60
M
Latest value of drum temperature
ALL
22
M
Drum surface potential sensor / Residual voltage sensor output (Latest value) Main charger Lower limit grid calibration reference value adjustUpper limit ment
ALL
0
M
ALL
50
M
ALL
207
M
Lower limit
ALL
59
M
Upper limit
ALL
227
M
Drum surface potential sensor output (Latest value) (Center voltage) Transfer Temperature/humidity sensor Humidity display
Developer bias calibration reference value adjustment
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
RAM
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4 4 4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 45 05/11
Code 260
Classification Image quality control
261 262
Image quality control
263-0
Image quality control
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Contrast voltage open-loop ALL 250 control RMS value display
Image quality control
Image quality control
265-1 268
269
Image quality control
M
The default value of development contrast potential is displayed. The RMS value of development contrast potential is displayed. The RMS value of the background potential is displayed. [Unit: V] The RMS value of the laser power calculated in the open-loop control is displayed. [Unit: µW] e-STUDIO520 / e-STUDIO600 / e-STUDIO720: 665 e-STUDIO850: 304 The RMS value of the laser power calculated in the open-loop control is displayed. [Unit: µW] * Valid only for e-STUDIO850 The RMS value at the regular operation is displayed. [Unit: µW] e-STUDIO520/523/600/ 603/720/723: 665 e-STUDIO850/853: 304 The RMS value at the regular operation is displayed. [Unit: µW] * Valid only for e-STUDIO850/853 The number of times of the development contrast voltage correction performed is displayed.
ALL
300
M
ALL
100
M
RMS value display of open-loop control (Laser power initial value)
1st laser
ALL
Refer to contents
M
2nd laser
ALL
304
M
1st laser
ALL
Refer to contents
M
2nd laser
ALL
304
M
ALL
0
M
ALL
0
M
ALL
0
M
ALL
0
M
Laser power RMS value display
264-1
265-0
Contents
RMS value display of development contrast voltage Background potential RMS value display
263-1
264-0
RAM
Development contrast voltage correction Laser power correction Drum surface potential sensor output (Latest value) (Low voltage) Drum surface potential sensor output (Latest value) (High voltage)
Number of times of image quality closed-loop control correction
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
The number of times of laser power correction performed is displayed. The value of the main charger grid bias measured with the drum surface potential sensor is displayed.
Procedure 2 2 2
10
10
10
10
10
10 2
2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 46 07/11
Code 270
286-0
Adjustment mode (05) Default ClassiFunc- Transfer Temperature/humidity senALL 22 sor Temperature display Laser
Laser power adjustment
286-1
RAM
Contents
M
The temperature of the inside of the equipment is displayed. [Unit: °C] When the value increases, the laser power output increases. e-STUDIO520/523/600/ 603/720/723: 132 e-STUDIO850/853: 101 When the value increases, the laser power output increases. * Valid only for e-STUDIO850/853 Image quality control is performed forcibly when the density correction of the image is required. The control status of image quality control is displayed. 0: Normal 1: Error (control stopped) 2: Error (abnormal pattern density) 4: Sensor LED off-level abnormality or sensor LED light amount abnormality The output value of the image quality sensor (while the sensor light source is turned off) is displayed. The output value of the image quality sensor of the drum surface (when no test pattern exists) is displayed. The value of the low density pattern detected at the image quality closedloop control is displayed. The value of the high density pattern detected at the image quality closed-loop control is displayed. The result of the sensor LED light amount adjustment (to use the reflection amount from the drum surface as a reference) is displayed.
1st laser
ALL
Refer to contents
M
2nd laser
ALL
101
M
290
Image quality control
Image quality control enforcement
ALL
-
M
291
Image quality control
Control status display of image quality control
ALL
0
M
292
Image quality control
Image quality sensor output value display
Light source off
ALL
0
M
Drum surface
ALL
0
M
Low density pattern sensor output value
ALL
0
M
High density pattern sensor output value
ALL
0
M
Result display of image quality sensor light amount adjustment
ALL
0
M
293
294
Image quality control
295
296
Image quality control
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 2
14
14
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 47 07/11
2
Code 299
Classification Image quality control
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Image quality open-loop ALL control enforcement
Procedure
RAM
Contents
M
1
6
305
Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
140
SYS
306
Scanner Image location adjustment of primary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
135
SYS
308
Scanner Distortion mode
ALL
-
-
310
Scanner
ALL
0 0 128
SYS
When a service call has occurred or a warning message (IQC/SPC) has appeared, "Image quality control enforcement (05290)" should be performed after the equipment is repaired or the cause of the error is evaluated. In case the service call occurred or the warning message (IQC/SPC) appeared again after the performance of the code 05290, a test chart can be printed out by temporarily using this code (05299) if an image check is urgently needed. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts by approx. 0.143 mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts by approx. 0.169 mm toward the front side of the paper. Moves carriages to the adjusting position. (Ch.3.2.4) 0.1433 mm/step
SYS
0.1433 mm/step
1
SYS
When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. EEPROM is initialized.
1
311 340
Shading position adjustment
Original glass RADF
Scanner Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL ALL
352
RADF
EEPROM initialization
ALL
-
SYS
354
RADF
Adjustment of RADF paper alignment
ALL
10
SYS
ALL
10
SYS
355
for single sided original for double sided original
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5 mm.
1
1
6
6 1 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 48 07/11
Code
Classification
356
RADF
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Automatic adjustment of ALL RADF sensor
RAM
Contents
SYS
Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced. When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction when using the RADF increases by approx. 0.1%. When the value increases by “1”, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0846 mm. When the value increases by “1”, the carriage position when using the RADF shifts by approx. 0.1 mm toward the original feeding side. When the value increases by “1”, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge of paper by approx. 0.1 mm. Stores the current width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the minimum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-352) is performed. Stores the current width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the maximum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-352) is performed.
357
RADF
Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed
ALL
50
SYS
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation adjustment
ALL
120
SYS
ALL
128
SYS
ALL
50
SYS
ALL
50
SYS
359
365
Scanner Carriage position adjustment during scanning from RADF
RADF
366
RADF leading edge position adjustment
for single sided original for double sided original
367
RADF
RADF original guide width adjustment (Minimum)
ALL
-
-
368
RADF
RADF original guide width adjustment (Maximum)
ALL
-
-
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 6
2 1
1
1
1 1
6
6
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 49 07/11
Code
Classification
401
Laser
405
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- PRT 128 Fine adjustment of polygo nal motor rotation speed (adjustment of primary PPC 128 scanning direction repro duction ratio)
RAM
Contents
M
When the value increases in increments of "1", the reproduction ratio of the primary scanning direction increases as follows: e-STUDIO520/523/600/ 603/720/723: 0.3 mm/step e-STUDIO850/853: 0.1 mm/step When the value increases by "1", the image shifts approx. 0.4 mm to the trailing edge side of the paper.
M
Procedure 1 1
408
Laser
Secondary scanning laser writing start position adjustment (All)
ALL
40
M
409
Drive
FAX
Laser
128 128 128
M
410
Fine adjustment of drum motor rotation speed Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position.
FAX
128
M
PPC/ PRT FAX
128 139
M
PPC/ PRT FAX
107 121 128
M
M
1
128 20 20
M
1
411 412
Drive
421
Drive
422
424
Drive
Fine adjustment of registration motor rotation speed Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of main motor speed) Fine adjustment of exit motor speed
425 426
Drive
427
Drive
428
Laser
429
Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of fuser roller rotation speed 4th drawer Secondary scanning laser writing Tandem start position LCF adjustment
PPC PRT
FAX FAX ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M M
M
M
M M
1
1 When the value increases by “1”, the writing start position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423 mm.
1 1 1
When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.04%. When the value increases by “1”, the rotation becomes faster by approx. 0.05%.
When the value increases by "1", the image shifts approx. 0.4 mm to the trailing edge side of the paper.
1 1
1 1
1 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 50 07/11
Code
Classification
430
Image
431
Image
432
Image
433
Image
434-0
Image
434-1
Image
435
Image
436
Image
437
Image
438
Image
439
Drive
440
Laser
441 442 443 444 445 446-0 446-1
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Top margin adjustment PPC 0 (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment PPC 0 (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PPC 0 (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) PPC 0 Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) 0 Bottom margin adjustment PPC/ (blank area at the trailing PRT edge of the paper)/ Reverse side at duplexing PPC/ 0 Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the PRT paper along the paper feeding direction)/Reverse side at duplexing Top margin adjustment PRT 24 (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment PRT 0 (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment PRT 0 (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment PRT 0 (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Fine adjustment of feed FAX 128 motor rotation speed 20 Adjustment of 1st drawer ALL secondary scanning 2nd ALL 20 laser writing drawer start position Bypass ALL 20 feeding Option ALL 20 LCF 3rd drawer ALL 20 Duplex ALL 20 feeding Fine adjustNormal PPC 128 ment of drum speed motor rotaPPC 128 Increased tion speed speed
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M M
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
Procedure 1 1
M
1
M
1
M
4
M
4
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
1
M M M
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.4 mm.
1 1 1
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 51
2
Code
Classification
447-0
Drive
447-1 448-0
Paper feeding
448-1 448-2 448-3 448-4 449-0
Paper feeding
449-1 449-2 449-3 449-4 450-0
Paper feeding
450-1 450-2 450-3 450-4 451-0
Drive
451-1 452-0 452-1 452-2 452-3 452-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustNormal PRT 128 ment of drum speed motor rotaIncreased PRT 128 tion speed speed ALL 10 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (3rd drawer / 1 Tandem LCF) Short size- ALL 12 (Plain paper) 2 Postcard ALL 12 ALL 12 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 12 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (4th drawer/ 1 Plain paper) Short size- ALL 12 2 Postcard ALL 12 ALL 10 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (1st drawer/ 1 Plain paper) Short size- ALL 12 2 Postcard ALL 12 Fine adjustFAX 128 Normal ment of exit speed motor rotaIncreased FAX 128 tion speed speed ALL 12 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 12 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (2nd drawer/ 1 Plain paper) Short size- ALL 12 2 Postcard ALL 12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedure
M
4
M
4
M M M M M M M M
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M M
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
4 4 4 4 4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 52
Code
Classification
453-0
Drive
453-1 454-0
Drive
454-1 455-0
Paper feeding
455-1 455-2 455-3 455-4
456-0
Drive
456-1 457
Paper feeding
458-0
Paper feeding
458-1 458-2 458-3 458-4
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustNormal PPC 128 speed ment of reverse motor Increased PPC 128 rotation speed speed Fine adjustNormal PRT 128 ment of speed reverse motor Increased PRT 128 rotation speed speed Paper aligning Long size ALL 12 amount adjustment at Middle ALL 12 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (Duplex feed- 1 ing/Plain Short size- ALL 12 paper) 2 Postcard ALL 12
Normal speed Increased speed Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (Tandem LCF/Plain paper) Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle the registrasize tion section Short size(Bypass feed- 1 ing/Plain Short sizepaper) 2 Postcard
Fine adjustment of reverse motor rotation speed
FAX FAX ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedure
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M M M M
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
4 4 4 4 4
128 128 12
M
4
M
4
15 15 15 15 15
M
M
M M M M
When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
1
4 4 4 4 4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 53
2
Code 460-0
Classification Paper feeding
460-1 460-2 460-3 460-4 461-0
Paper feeding
461-1 461-2 461-3 461-4 462-0
Paper feeding
462-1 462-2 462-3 462-4 463-0
Paper feeding
463-1 463-2 463-3 463-4 464-0 464-1 464-2 464-3
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 15 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 15 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 15 (Bypass feed- 1 ing/Thick Short size- ALL 15 paper 1) 2 Postcard ALL 15 ALL 15 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 15 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 15 (Bypass feed- 1 ing/Thick Short size- ALL 15 paper 2) 2 Postcard ALL 15 ALL 15 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 15 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 15 (Bypass feed- 1 ing/Thick Short size- ALL 15 paper 3) 2 Postcard ALL 15 ALL 15 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 15 the registrasize tion section 15 Short size- ALL (Bypass feed- 1 ing/OHP film) Short size- ALL 15 2 Postcard ALL 15 Fine adjustPPC 128 Normal ment of trans- speed port motor PPC 128 Drawer rotation speed feeding speed ADU feed- PPC 128 ing speed PPC 128 Option LCF feeding speed
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M M M M M M M
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 54 05/06
Code 466-0
Classification Paper feeding
466-1 466-2 466-3 466-4 468-0
Finisher
468-1 468-2 469-0
Paper feeding
469-1 469-2 469-3 469-4 470-0
Paper feeding
470-1 470-2 470-3 470-4 471-0 471-1 471-2 471-3 471-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Paper pushPlain ALL 20 paper ing amount adjustment Thick 1 ALL 20 Thick 2 ALL 20 Thick 3 ALL 20 OHP film ALL 20 A4-R/LT-R ALL 0 Fine adjust ment of binding position/ B4/LG ALL 0 folding posi tion A3/LD ALL 0 ALL 10 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 registration size section Short size- ALL 12 (1st drawer) 1 (Thick paper Short size- ALL 12 1) 2 Postcard ALL 12 ALL 12 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 12 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (2nd drawer/ 1 Thick paper 1) Short size- ALL 12 2 Postcard ALL 12 ALL 10 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (3rd drawer / 1 Tandem LCF Short size- ALL 12 (Thick paper 2 1) Postcard ALL 12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
M
When the value increases by "1", the drive count of the bypass feed roller (at the start of the paper transport from the registration section) increases approx. 2 ms.
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4
When the value increases by “1”, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page by 0.25 mm. When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 55
2
Code 472-0
Classification Paper feeding
472-1 472-2 472-3 472-4 473-0
Paper feeding
473-1 473-2 473-3 474-0
Paper feeding
474-1 474-2 474-3 474-4 475-0 475-1 475-2 475-3
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 10 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 10 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (4th drawer/ 1 Thick paper 1) Short size- ALL 12 2 Postcard ALL 12 ALL 12 Paper aligning Thick paper 1 amount adjustment at Thick ALL 12 registration paper 2 section Thick ALL 12 (3rd drawer / paper 3 Tandem LCF) OHP film ALL 12 ALL 12 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 12 the registrasize tion section Short size- ALL 12 (Duplex feed- 1 ing/Thick Short size- ALL 12 paper 1) 2 Postcard ALL 12 Fine adjustPRT 128 Normal ment of trans- speed port motor PRT 128 Drawer rotation speed feeding speed 128 ADU feed- PRT ing speed PRT 128 Option LCF feeding speed
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M M M M M M M
Contents When the value increases by “1”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size: 330 mm or longer Middle size: 220 mm to 329 mm Short size-1: 205 mm to 219 mm Short size-2: 160 mm to 204 mm Postcard: 159 mm or shorter
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 56 05/06
Code 476-0
Classification Paper feeding
476-1
476-2
476-3
476-4 476-5 477-0
Paper feeding
477-1
477-2
477-3
477-4 477-5 478-0
Drive
478-1 478-2 478-3 480
Paper feeding
481
Drive
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- JPN: 8 M Adjustment of 1st drawer ALL UC: 10 remained Others: 6 paper amount (paper remained) 2nd ALL JPN: 8 M drawer UC: 10 Others: 6 3rd drawer ALL JPN: 8 M UC: 10 Others: 6 4th drawer ALL JPN: 8 M UC: 10 Others: 6 Option ALL 14 M LCF Tandem ALL 3 M LCF M Adjustment of 1st drawer ALL JPN: 20 UC: 18 remained paper amount Others:20 (no paper remained) 2nd ALL JPN: 20 M drawer UC: 18 Others:20 3rd drawer ALL JPN: 20 M UC: 18 Others:20 4th drawer ALL JPN: 20 M UC: 18 Others:20 Option ALL 8 M LCF Tandem ALL 6 M LCF Fine adjustNormal FAX 128 M ment of trans- speed port motor Drawer FAX 128 M rotation speed feeding speed ADU feed- FAX 128 M ing speed Option FAX 128 M LCF feed ing speed Adjustment of paper feedALL M The paper feeding aligning aligning amount ing amount is adjusted by pressing buttons on the LCD. Fine adjustment of drum PPC 128 M motor rotation speed
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 4
4
4
4
4 4 4
4
4
4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 57 05/06
2
Code
Classification
482
Drive
483
Drive
484
Drive
485
Drive
486
Drive
487
Drive
488
Drive
489
Drive
490
Drive
493
Drive
497-0
Laser
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Fine adjustment of drum PRT 128 motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of regisPPC 128 tration motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of regisPRT 128 tration motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of fuser PPC 128 roller rotation speed Fine adjustment of fuser PRT 128 roller rotation speed Fine adjustment of transPPC 128 fer belt motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of transPRT 128 fer belt motor rotational speed PPC
497-2
Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of feed motor rotation speed Fine adjustment of Developer unit motor rotation speed Adjustment of 1st drawer drawer sideways devia2nd tion drawer 3rd drawer
497-3
4th drawer
ALL
497-4
Tandem LCF Bypass feeding Option LCF Long size
ALL
497-1
497-5 497-6 498-0 498-1
Laser
Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position at duplex feeding
Short size (A4/LT or smaller)
PRT PPC ALL ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedure
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
1
M
When the value increases by "1", the rotational speed increases for approx. 0.127%.
1
128 128 8
M
1
M
1
M
1
128 128 128 128 128 128 128 148 148
M M
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M
When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
4 4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 58 05/06
Code
Classification
501
Image
503
504
505
Image
506 507 508
Image
509 510 512
Image
514
515
532 533 534
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density Photo PPC EUR:118 UC:118 adjustment Fine adjustJPN:128 ment of “man ual density”/ Text/Photo PPC EUR:100 Center value UC:100 JPN:128 Text PPC EUR:113 UC:113 JPN:119 Text/Photo PPC 20 Density adjustment Fine adjustPhoto PPC 20 ment of “man ual density”/ Text PPC 20 Light step value Text/Photo PPC 20 Density adjustment Fine adjustPhoto PPC 20 ment of “man ual density”/ Text PPC 20 Dark step value Photo PPC 128 Density adjustment Fine adjustText/Photo PPC EUR:100 ment of “autoUC:100 matic density” JPN:128 Text PPC EUR:113 UC:113 JPN:119 Range correc- Text/Photo PPC 40 tion/Back ground peak Photo PPC 16 adjustment Text PPC 64
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
Procedure 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
SYS SYS SYS
SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
SYS SYS
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
1 1
SYS SYS
1
1 1
1
When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.
1 1 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 59 05/06
2
Code
Classification
570
Image
571
572
593
Image
594
Image
595
Image
596-0
Image
596-1
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- EUR:12 Range correc- Text/Photo PPC UC:12 tion on origiJPN:22 nal manually Photo PPC 12 Text PPC 22
Gamma data slope adjustment
Gamma balance adjustment (PS/Photo)
596-2 597-0
Image
597-1
Gamma balance adjustment (PS/Text)
597-2 598-0
Image
598-1
Gamma balance adjustment (PCL/Photo)
598-2 599-0 599-1
Image
Gamma balance adjustment (PCL/Text)
599-2
Text/Photo
PPC
Photo
PPC
Text
PPC
Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density
PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5 5 5 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Select the slope of Gamma curve (The larger the value is, the larger the slope becomes.)
SYS
SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP SYS/ RIP
Procedure 1
1
1
1 1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 60
Code
Classification
600
Image
601 602 620
Image
621-0 621-1 622
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Background Text/Photo PPC JPN: 6 adjustment UC: 5 EUR: 6 Text PPC 5 Photo PPC 4 Sharpness Text/Photo PPC 51 adjustment Photo PPC 23 (error dif fusion) PPC 13 Photo (Dither) Text PPC 61
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value decreases, the background becomes darker.
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS SYS SYS
Image
Adjustment of Text/Photo smudged/faint text
PPC
192
SYS
654
Image
Adjustment of PS smudged/faint text
PRT
5
M
PRT
5
M
PCL
663
Image
Dot size adjustment during printing
PRT
255
M
664
Image
Upper limit PS value in tonersaving period PCL
PRT
176 176
M
665
PRT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1
SYS
653
655
Procedure
M
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the more the moire is suppressed. One's place: Fixed value (Leave it at default.) Ten's place: Adjustable from 1 to 9 (The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes.) Adjusts the level of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With decreasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with increasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. The dot size in the primary scanning direction during printing is adjusted. When the value decreases, the dots become smaller. When the value decreases, the density of the printed text becomes lower.
1 4 4 1
1
1
1
1
1 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 61
2
Code
Classification
693
Image
694
695
700
Contents
SYS
Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker. When the value increases, the image of “light” side becomes lighter. When the value increases, the image of “dark” side becomes darker. When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
1
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
1
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
1
SYS
SYS
FAX
120
SYS
701
Light step value
FAX
20
SYS
702
Dark step value
FAX
20
SYS
Photo
FAX
128
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
128
SYS
Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Text/Photo
FAX
20
SYS
Image
714 715
Image
719
720 724
Image
Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text)
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Center value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Dark step value
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure
RAM
Center value
710
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Range correc- Text/Photo PPC EUR:12 UC:12 tion on original set on the JPN:22 RADF Photo PPC 12 Text PPC 22
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 62
Code
Classification
725
Image
729 825
Image
826
827
828
830
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Photo FAX 128 Density adjustment Fine adjustText/Photo FAX 128 ment of “auto matic density” Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 tion on origi Text SCN 12 Photo SCN 12 Gray scale SCN 12 Range correc- Text/Photo tion on original set on the RADF
SCN
831
Text
SCN
832
Photo
SCN
833
Gray scale
SCN
Range correc- Text/Photo tion/Background peak Text adjustment
SCN
835 836
Image
SCN
837
Photo
SCN
838
Gray scale
SCN
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM SYS SYS SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
12 12 12 12
SYS
40 48 16 16
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Contents When the value increases, the image becomes darker. Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Sets whether the value of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One’s place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten’s place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.
Procedure 1 1 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 63
2
Code
Classification
845
Image
846 847 848 850
Image
851 852 853 855
Image
856 857 858 860
Image
861 862 863 865-0
Image
865-1 865-2 866-0
Image
866-1 866-2 867-0
Image
867-1 867-2 868-0 868-1
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Density Text/Photo SCN 128 adjustment Fine adjustText SCN 128 ment of “man ual density”/ Photo SCN 128 Center value Gray scale SCN 128 Text/Photo SCN 20 Fine density adjustment Fine adjustText SCN 20 ment of “man ual density” / Photo SCN 20 Light step value Gray scale SCN 20 Text/Photo SCN 20 Density adjustment Fine adjustText SCN 20 ment of “man ual density”/ Photo SCN 20 Dark step value Gray scale SCN 20 Text/Photo SCN 128 Density adjustment Fine adjustText SCN 128 ment of “auto matic density” Photo SCN 128 Gray scale SCN 128 Sharpness 150-200 SCN 85 adjustment dp (Text/Photo) SCN 51 300-400 dpi 600 dpi SCN 51 Sharpness 150-200 SCN 96 adjustment dpi (Text) SCN 62 300-400 dpi 600 dpi SCN 62 Sharpness 150-200 SCN 23 adjustment dpi (Photo) 300-400 SCN 23 dpi 600 dpi SCN 23 Sharpness 150-200 SCN 41 adjustment dpi (Gray scale) 300-400 SCN 41 dpi
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the image at the center step becomes darker.
SYS
Procedure 1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “light” steps becomes lighter.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” steps becomes darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the more the moire is suppressed. One's place: Fixed value (Leave it at default.) Ten's place: Sharpness intensity (1-9: Filter intensity)
4 4 4 4 4 4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
SYS
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 64
Code
Classification
869
Image
870 871 872 913
Image
914
915
916
Range correc- Custom tion on origiMode 1 nal set on the RADF
PPC
917
Custom Mode 2
PPC
918
Custom Mode 3
PPC
Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3
PPC
919 920 921
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Background Text/Photo SCN 5 adjustment Text SCN 6 Photo SCN 4 Gray scale SCN 3 Range correc- Custom PPC EUR:12 tion on origiMode 1 UC:12 nal manually JPN:22 set on the Custom PPC 22 Mode 2 Custom PPC 12 Mode 3
Image
Range correction Background peak adjustment
PPC PPC
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
EUR:12 UC:12 JPN:22 22 12
40 64 16
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value decreases, the background becomes darker.
SYS
Procedure 1 1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak Set whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. One's place is an adjustment for “automatic density” and ten's place is for “manual density”. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the background density and text density respectively. 1: fixed/fixed 2: varied/fixed 3: fixed/varied 4: varied/varied * Background peak/ Text peak When the value increases, the background becomes more brightened.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 65
2
Code
Classification
922
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Sharpness Custom PPC 51 adjustment Mode 1
923 924-0
924-1
RAM
Contents
SYS
When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the more the moire is suppressed. One's place: Fixed value (Leave it at default.) Ten's place: Adjustable from 1 to 9 (The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes.) Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed. When the value increases, the image of the center step becomes darker.
Custom Mode 2
PPC
61
SYS
Custom Mode 3 (error diffusion) Custom Mode 3 (Dither)
PPC
23
SYS
PPC
13
SYS
928
Image
Adjustment of Custom smudged/faint Mode 1 text
PPC
192
SYS
931
Image
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Center value
Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3
PPC
128 128 128 20 20 20
SYS
Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3
PPC
20 20 20
SYS
Custom Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3
PPC
128 128 128
SYS
932 933 934
Image
935 936 937
Image
938 939 940 941 942
Image
Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Light step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “manual density”/ Dark step value Density adjustment Fine adjustment of “automatic density”
PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC
PPC PPC
PPC PPC
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS SYS SYS SYS
When the value increases, the image of the “light” step density becomes lighter.
SYS
1 4
4
1
1 1
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image of the “dark” step density becomes darker.
SYS
SYS
1
1
SYS
SYS
Procedure
1 1 1
When the value increases, the image becomes darker.
1 1 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 66
Code
Classification
943
Image
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- Gamma data Custom PPC 5 Mode 1 slope adjustment
944
Custom Mode 2
945 946
Image
947 948 976
Maintenance
4563-0
Paper feeding
4563-1 4563-2 4563-3 4564-0
Paper feeding
4564-1 4564-2 4564-3 4565-0
Paper feeding
4565-1 4565-2 4565-3 4566-0 4566-1 4566-2 4566-3
Paper feeding
RAM SYS
Contents Select the slope of Gamma curve (The larger the value is, the larger the slope becomes.)
Procedure 1
2
PPC
5
SYS
1
Custom Mode 3 Background Custom adjustment Mode 1 Custom Mode 2 Custom Mode 3 Equipment number (serial number) entry
PPC
5 5 6 4 -
SYS
1
Leading edge position adjustment correction item on each media type (2nd drawer)
Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film
ALL
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
Leading edge position adjustment correction item on each media type (3rd drawer)
Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
Leading edge position adjustment correction item on each media type (4th drawer)
Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
Leading edge position adjustment correction item on each media type (Tandem LCF)
Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
PPC PPC PPC ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS SYS
When the value decreases, the background becomes darker.
SYS SYS
1 1 1
When this adjustment is performed with this code, the setting code (08-995) is also performed automatically (10 digits).
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 67 06/09
Code 4567-0
Classification Paper feeding
4567-1 4567-2 4567-3 4568-0
Paper feeding
4568-1 4568-2 4568-3 4569-0
Paper feeding
4569-1 4569-2 4569-3 4580-0
Paper feeding
4580-1
4581-0 4581-1
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 20 Leading edge Thick paper 1 position adjustment Thick ALL 20 correction paper 2 item on each Thick ALL 20 media type paper 3 (Bypass feedOHP film ALL 20 ing) ALL 20 Leading edge Thick paper 1 position adjustment Thick ALL 20 correction paper 2 item on each Thick ALL 20 media type paper 3 (ADU) OHP film ALL 20 ALL 20 Leading edge Thick paper 1 position adjustment Thick ALL 20 correction paper 2 item on each Thick ALL 20 media type paper 3 (Option LCF) OHP film ALL 20 ALL 15 Paper aligning Short size 1 amount adjustment at the registraShort size ALL 15 tion section 2 (Option LCF / Plain paper) ALL 15 Paper aligning Short size 1 amount adjustment at the registraALL 15 Short size tion section 2 (Option LCF / Thick paper 1)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedure
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M M
M M
When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 204 mm or shorter
4 4
4 4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 68 06/09
Code 4582-0
Classification Paper feeding
4582-1 4582-2 4582-3 4582-4 4583-0
Paper feeding
4583-1 4583-2 4583-3 4583-4 4584-0
Paper feeding
4584-1 4584-2 4584-3 4584-4 4585-0
Paper feeding
4585-1 4585-2 4585-3 4585-4 4586-0
4586-1
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (1st drawer / 1 Thick paper 2) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (2nd drawer / 1 Thick paper 2) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (3rd drawer / 1 Thick paper 2) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section ALL 18 Short size (4th drawer / 1 Thick paper 2) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 15 Paper aligning Short size 1 amount adjustment at the registration section (Option LCF / Short size ALL 15 Thick paper 2) 2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M M M M M M M M
Contents When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size : 330 mm or longer Middle size : 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 160 mm to 204 mm Post Card : 159 mm tor shorter
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
M
When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 204 mm or shorter
4
4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 69 06/09
2
Code 4587-0
Classification Paper feeding
4587-1 4587-2 4587-3 4587-4 4588-0
Paper feeding
4588-1 4588-2 4588-3 4588-4 4589-0
Paper feeding
4589-1 4589-2 4589-3 4589-4 4590-0
Paper feeding
4590-1 4590-2 4590-3 4590-4 4591-0 4591-1 4591-2 4591-3 4591-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (ADU / Thick 1 paper 2) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (1st drawer / 1 Thick paper 3) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (2nd drawer / 1 Thick paper 3) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section ALL 18 Short size (3rd drawer / 1 Thick paper 3) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (4th drawer / 1 Thick paper 3) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M M M M M M M
Contents When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size : 330 mm or longer Middle size : 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 160 mm to 204 mm Post Card : 159 mm tor shorter
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 70 06/09
Code 4592-0
4592-1
Classification Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 15 Paper aligning Short size 1 amount adjustment at the registration section (Option LCF / Short size ALL 15 Thick paper 3) 2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM M
M
Contents When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 204 mm or shorter
Procedure 4
2 4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 71 06/09
Code 4593-0
Classification Paper feeding
4593-1 4593-2 4593-3 4593-4 4594-0
Paper feeding
4594-1 4594-2 4594-3 4594-4 4595-0
Paper feeding
4595-1 4595-2 4595-3 4595-4 4596-0
Paper feeding
4596-1 4596-2 4596-3 4596-4 4597-0 4597-1 4597-2 4597-3 4597-4
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (ADU / Thick 1 paper 3) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (1st drawer / 1 OHP) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (2nd drawer / 1 OHP) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section ALL 18 Short size (3rd drawer / 1 OHP) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18 ALL 18 Paper aligning Long size amount adjustment at Middle ALL 18 the registrasize tion section Short size ALL 18 (4th drawer / 1 OHP) Short size ALL 18 2 Post card ALL 18
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM M M M M M M M M
Contents When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size : 330 mm or longer Middle size : 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 160 mm to 204 mm Post Card : 159 mm tor shorter
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
M
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 72 06/09
Code 4598-0
Classification Paper feeding
4598-1
4599-0
Paper feeding
Adjustment mode (05) Default Func- ALL 15 Paper aligning Short size 1 amount adjustment at the registration section (Option LCF / Short size ALL 15 OHP) 2
Paper aligning amount adjustment at the registration section (ADU / OHP)
RAM M
M
Long size
ALL
18
M
Middle size
ALL
18
M
4599-2
Short size 1
ALL
18
M
4599-3
Short size 2
ALL
18
M
4599-4
Post card
ALL
18
M
4599-1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 204 mm or shorter When the value increases by ” 1 ”, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8 mm. Long size : 330 mm or longer Middle size : 220 mm to 329 mm Short size 1 : 205 mm to 219 mm Short size 2 : 160 mm to 204 mm Post Card : 159 mm tor shorter
Procedure 4
2 4
4 4 4 4 4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 73 06/09
2.2.5
Setting mode (08)
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08). When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
Procedure 1 [CANCEL] [Digital key] (Code)
[0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed
[START]
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3 [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4 [CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*
[ENTER] or [Digital key] [INTERRUPT] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Stores value Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 74
Procedure 5 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] *[HELP] Sets or changes value
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
2
* Press [HELP] to enter “-”. Procedure 7 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Setting)
[ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 9 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Select icon]
Procedure 10 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (1st setting)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] [ENTER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[Digital key] (2nd setting)
Procedure 11 and 12 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] or [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
*1. Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter “-”, when entering telephone number. *2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 75
Procedure 14 [CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub-code)
[START]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Adjustment value cannot be changed
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 76
Notes: • The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code. • In “RAM”, the NVRAM or FRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. “M” stands for the LGC board, “SYS” and “UTY” stands for the SYS board. Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL
Code
Classification
200
General
Date and time setting
201
General
Destination selection
ALL
202
User interface
Counter installed externally
ALL
203
General
Line adjustment mode
ALL
0
M
204
User interface
Auto-clear timer setting
ALL
3
SYS
205
User interface
Auto power save mode timer setting
ALL
11
SYS
Items
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 2 0
RAM
Contents
-
Year/month/date/day/ hour/minute/second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 “Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from “1” to “6”. 0: EUR 1: UC 2: JPN
M
M
0: No external counter 1: Coin controller 2: Copy key card (This value is valid only when “2” is set to 08-201.) 3: Key copy counter 0: For factory shipment 1: For line * Field: “0” must be selected Timer to return the equipment to the default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec. Timer to automatically switch to the Auto power save mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min.
Procedure 5
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 77 07/05
2
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Auto Shut Off Mode timer ALL 12 setting (Auto Shut Off Mode/Sleep Mode)
RAM
Contents
SYS
Timer to turn OFF the power or to enter the Sleep Mode automatically when the equipment has not been used (Refer to 08-601) 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min. 11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17: 180min. 18: 210min. 19: 240min. 20: Not used 0: Black letter on white background 1: White letter on black background 0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single)
206
User interface
207
User interface
Highlighting display on LCD
ALL
0
SYS
209
User interface
Default setting of filing format when E-mailing
ALL
0
SYS
210
Paper feeding
Paper size (A6-R) feeding/ widthwise direction
PRT
M
211
Paper feeding
Inserter Unit Reversing operation at back cover insertion
PPC
148/105 0
213
User interface Paper feeding
Display of [REVERSE ORDER] button Tab paper printing/ Tab width setting (Drawer)
ALL
Paper feeding
Tab paper printing/ Shift width setting (Drawer)
214
215
PPC
PPC
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 130 130
SYS
SYS SYS
SYS
Procedure 1
1
1
10
This setting is whether only the back cover is reversed or no sheets are reversed at the back cover insertion using the Inserter Unit. 0: No sheets reversed 1: Only back cover reversed 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed The default value of the tab width can be set by increments of 0.1 mm in the Tab Print Mode. The default value of the shift width can be set by increments of 0.1 mm in the Tab Print Mode.
1
1 1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 78 07/04
Code
Classification
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 130 PPC 130
216
Paper feeding
217
Paper feeding
219
User interface
Tab paper print Tab width setting (Bypass feeding) Tab paper print Shift width setting (Bypass feeding) Default setting of filing format when storing files
220
User interface
221
RAM
1
SYS
1
0
SYS
Language displayed at power-ON
ALL
EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5
SYS
User interface
Language selection in UI data at Web power ON
ALL
EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5
SYS
223
Maintenance
Switching of PM timing display/ Output pages or drive counts
ALL
0
M
224
Paper feeding Paper feeding
Paper size for bypass feed
PPC
UNDEF
SYS
Paper size for 1st drawer
ALL
EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4 EUR: A3 UC: LD JPN: A3 EUR: A4-R UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R EUR: A4 UC: LG JPN: B4
M
226
Paper feeding
Paper size for 2nd drawer
ALL
227
Paper feeding
Paper size for 3rd drawer
ALL
228
Paper feeding
Paper size for 4th drawer
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
SYS
SCN
225
Contents
0: TIFF (Multi) 1: PDF (Multi) 2: Not used 3: TIFF (Single) 4: PDF (Single) 5: XPS (Multi) 6: XPS (Single) 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 The PM timing can be displayed in these 2 methods. (Messages will appear on the LCD panel.) 0: PM counter (Number of output pages can be set in 08251) 1: PM time counter (Drive counts can be set in 08-375) Press the button on the LCD to select the size. Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
1
1
1
1
9 9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
M
Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
9
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 79 07/04
2
Code
Classification
229
Paper feeding
230
Paper feeding
231
Paper feeding
232
Paper feeding
233
Paper feeding
234
Paper feeding
235
Paper feeding
236
Paper feeding
237
Paper feeding
238
Paper feeding
239
Paper feeding
240
Paper feeding
241
Paper feeding
242
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Paper size (A3) feeding/ ALL 420/297 widthwise direction Paper size (A4-R) feeding/ ALL 297/210 widthwise direction Paper size (A5-R) feeding/ ALL 210/148 widthwise direction Paper size (B4) feeding/ ALL 364/257 widthwise direction Paper size (B5-R) feeding/ ALL 257/182 widthwise direction Paper size (LT-R) feeding/ ALL 279/216 widthwise direction Paper size (LD) feeding/ ALL 432/279 widthwise direction Paper size (LG) feeding/ ALL 356/216 widthwise direction Paper size (ST-R) feeding/ ALL 216/140 widthwise direction Paper size (COMPUTER) ALL 356/257 feeding/widthwise direction Paper size (FOLIO) feedALL 330/210 ing/widthwise direction Paper size (13” LG) feedALL 330/216 ing/widthwise direction Paper size (8.5”X8.5”) ALL 216/216 feeding/widthwise direction Paper size (Non-standard) ALL 432/279 feeding/widthwise direction
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedure
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
M
10
SYS
10
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 80
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Memory 1 ALL 148/100 Paper size (8K) feeding/ ALL 390/270 widthwise direction Paper size (16K-R) feedALL 270/195 ing/widthwise direction Paper size (A3 wide) ALL 457/305 feeding/widthwise direction ALL 148/100 Memory 2 Paper size (bypass feed ALL 148/100 Memory 3 Paper size (bypass feed feeding/widthwise direction Memory 4 ALL 148/100 Paper size (bypass feed feeding/widthwise direction Service technician teleALL 0 phone number
RAM
Contents
SYS
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 1].
243
Paper feeding
244
Paper feeding
245
Paper feeding
246
Paper feeding
247
Paper feeding
248
Paper feeding
249
Paper feeding
250
Maintenance
251
Maintenance
Setting value of PM counter
ALL
Refer to content
M
252
Maintenance
Current value of PM counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
M
253
Maintenance
Error history display
ALL
-
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 10
M
10
M
10
M
10
SYS
SYS
SYS
SYS
Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 2]. Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 3]. Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into [MEMORY 4]. A telephone number can be entered up to 32 digits. Use the [Monitor/ Pause] button to enter a hyphen (-). e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 450,000 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 500,000 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 575,000 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 600,000 Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. Displaying of the latest 20 errors data
10
10
10
11
1
1 2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 81 07/11
2
Code
Classification
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 0
254
Paper feeding
LT A4/LD A3
256
Paper feeding
Paper size setting /Tandem LCF
ALL
257
Counter
Counter copy
ALL
258
Maintenance
FSMS acceptance
259
Network
260
Network
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
EUR: A4 UC: LT JPN: A4
M
ALL
1
SYS
Storage period trial and private
PRT
14
SYS
Web data retention period
SCN
10
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
1) Electrical counter → Backup counter (LGC board→SYS board) 2) Backup counter → Electrical counter (SYS board→LGC board) (P.2-188 "Fig. 2-3") Sets whether the FSMS connection is accepted or not. 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (USB normal connection) 2: Accepted (USB forcible connection) 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days 31: 1 hour 32: 2 hours 33: 4 hours 34: 8 hours 35: 12 hours When a certain period of time has passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute)
Procedure 1
9 -
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 82 07/04
Code
Classification
261
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Web Box data retention SCN 10 period
Contents
SYS
SYS
When a certain period of time has passed without operation after accessing the Box, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. [Unit: Minute] When a certain period of time has passed without operation after accessing TWAIN and File Downloader, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. [Unit: Minute] The password can be entered in alphabets and figures (A-Z, a-z, 09) within 10 digits. 0: No limits 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days 2 to 30 M bytes
SYS
2 to 30 M bytes
1
SYS
Sets the file retention level when editing the files in the Electronic Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution). 0: Not full retained 1: Fully retained Retains the source file until CutDoc/ SaveDoc command is completed. * The file is not deleted even if the HDD has become full during the execution of command when “1” is set. Sets the data retention period when creating a user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day)
1
262
Network
TWAIN data retention period
SCN
10
SYS
263
User interface
Administrator's password (Maximum 10 digits)
ALL
123456
-
264
Network
File retention period
SCN
SYS
265
Network
30 30 30 1
0
SYS
266 267
270
Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Network Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX ElecFull guarantee of docutronic Fil- ments in Electronic Filing ing when HDD is full
SCN
ElecDefault value for user box tronic Fil- retention period ing
ALL
ALL ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
RAM
1
2
1
11
1 1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 83 06/09
Code
Classification
271
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Warning notification of the ALL 90 File Share and e-Filing partitions are filled
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the percentage of HDD partition filled when warning notification is sent. 0 to 100: 0 to 100% * Related code 08-288 Sets the days left the notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days Sets the default value for the partial size of Email to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divide 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 (Unit: KB) 0: Automatic density 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi 0: Text 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 3: Gray scale 0: Single 1: Book 2: Tablet 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees
272
Scanning Notification setting of Email saving time limit
ALL
3
SYS
273
Scanning Default setting of partial size when transmitting Email
ALL
0
SYS
274
FAX
Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX
FAX
0
SYS
276
User interface
Default setting for density adjustment
SCN
0
SYS
281
User interface
Default setting of resolution
SCN
1
SYS
283
User interface
Default setting of original mode
SCN
0
SYS
284
User interface User interface
Default setting of scanning mode Default setting of rotation angle of original
SCN
0 0
SYS
285
SCN
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
1 1
1 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 84 05/11
Code 286
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of original SCN 0 paper size
RAM SYS
288
General
Searching interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD partitions
ALL
12
SYS
289
User interface
Default setting of background adjustment (Gray scale)
PRT
5
SYS
290
Network
Raw printing job (Duplex)
PRT
SYS
291
Network
Raw printing job (Paper size)
PRT
1 EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6
292
Network
Raw printing job (Paper type)
PRT
0
SYS
293
Network
PRT
Network
295
Network
Raw printing job (receiving tray)
PRT
0 1 0
SYS
294
Raw printing job (Paper direction) Raw printing job (Staple)
PRT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS SYS
Contents 0: Automatic 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13”LG 16: 8.5” x 8.5” 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed 20: 8K 21: 16K 22: 16K-R Sets the search interval of deleting expired files and checking capacity of HDD partitions. (Unit: Hour) * Related code 08-271 1: -4 2: -3 3: -2 4: -1 5: 0 6: +1 7: +2 8: +3 9: +4 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13”LG 13: 8.5” x 8.5” 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film 5: Tab paper 0: Portrait 1: Landscape 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Inner tray 1: Finisher tray 1 2: Finisher tray 2 3: Not used 4: Not used 5: Not used 6: Exit tray
Procedure 1
2
1
1
1 1
1
1 1 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 85 05/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Raw printing job PRT 1200 (Number of form lines)
Code
Classification
296
Network
297
Network
Raw printing job (PCL font pitch)
PRT
1000
SYS
298
Network
Raw printing job (PCL font size)
PRT
1200
SYS
299
Network
PRT
User interface User interface
0 0 EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0
SYS
300
Raw printing job (PCL font number) Maximum number of copy volume (MAX9) Original counter display
0
SYS
302
305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 305-9 305-10 305-11 305-12 305-13 305-14 305-15 305-16
Counter
Number of A3 output pages A4 in copier func- A5 tion A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
PPC ALL
PPC
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128. (A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) Sets the font pitch from 0.44 to 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.) Sets the font size from 4 to 999.75. (A hundredfold of the font size is defined as the setting value.) Sets the PCL font number. 0: 9999 1: 999 2: 99 3: 9 Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed 4: Displayed (Doublesized original is counted as 2.) Counts the output pages in the copier function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
SYS SYS
Procedure 1
1
1
1 1 1
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 86
Code 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 306-10 306-11 306-12 306-13 306-14 306-15 306-16 307-0 307-1 307-2 307-3 307-4 307-5 307-6 307-7 307-8 307-9 307-10 307-11 307-12 307-13 307-14 307-15 307-16
Classification Counter
Counter
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 0
Number of A3 output pages A4 in printer func- A5 tion A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 Number of output pages A4 at list print A5 mode A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
PRT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the output pages in the printer function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
Counts the output pages at the list print mode for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
SYS
2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 87
Code 308-0 308-1 308-2 308-3 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 308-9 308-10 308-11 308-12 308-13 308-14 308-15 308-16 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 312-10 312-11 312-12 312-13 312-14 312-15 312-16
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of output pages in FAX function
Counter
Number of scanning pages in copier function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX 0
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
PPC
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the output pages in the FAX function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353).
4
SYS
Counts the scanning pages in the copier function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 88
Code 313-0 313-1 313-2 313-3 313-4 313-5 313-6 313-7 313-8 313-9 313-10 313-11 313-12 313-13 313-14 313-15 313-16 314-0 314-1 314-2 314-3 314-4 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 314-9 314-10 314-11 314-12 314-13 314-14 314-15 314-16
Classification Counter
Counter
Items Number of scanning pages in scanning function
Number of scanning pages in FAX function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SCN 0
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others
FAX
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the scanning pages in the scanning function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08353).
4
Counts the scanning pages in the FAX function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353).
4
SYS
2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 89
Code 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 315-10 315-11 315-12 315-13 315-14 315-15 315-16 316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 316-10 316-11 316-12 316-13 316-14 316-15 316-16 320-0
320-1
320-2
Classification
Items
Counter
Number of transmitted pages in FAX function
Counter
Number of received pages in FAX function
Counter
Display of number of output pages in copier function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX 0
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353).
4
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13”LG 8.5” x 8.5” 16K 8K Others Large
FAX
0
SYS
Counts the received pages in the FAX function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353).
4
PPC
0
SYS
14
Counter
Small
PPC
0
SYS
Counter
Total
PPC
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
14
14
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 90
Code
Classification
321-0
Counter
Items Large Display of number of output pages in printer function
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PRT 0
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages in the Printer Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages at the List Print Mode Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of output pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
321-1
Counter
Small
PRT
0
SYS
321-2
Counter
Total
PRT
0
SYS
322-0
Counter
Large
PRT
0
SYS
322-1
Counter
Small
PRT
0
SYS
322-2
Counter
Total
PRT
0
SYS
323-0
Counter
Large
PRT
0
SYS
323-1
Counter
Small
PRT
0
SYS
323-2
Counter
Total
PRT
0
SYS
Display of number of output pages at list print mode
Display of number of output pages in FAX function
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 14
2 14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 91
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0
Code
Classification
327-0
Counter
327-1
Counter
Small
PPC
0
SYS
327-2
Counter
Total
PPC
0
SYS
328-0
Counter
Large
FAX
0
SYS
328-1
Counter
Small
FAX
0
SYS
328-2
Counter
Total
FAX
0
SYS
329-0
Counter
Large
SCN
0
SYS
329-1
Counter
Small
SCN
0
SYS
329-2
Counter
Total
SCN
0
SYS
Items Display of number of scanning pages in copier function
Display of number of scanning pages in FAX function
Display of number of scanning pages in scanning function
Large
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of scanning pages in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Counts the number of scanning pages in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
Procedure 14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 92
Code
Classification
330-0
Counter
Items Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX function
Large
Setting mode (08) Default Func- FAX 0
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box 4: Job Status 5: Template Counts the number of received pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of large-sized paper defined at 08353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. Displays the total number of pages in the copier/printer/scanning/ FAX functions.
330-1
Counter
Small
FAX
0
SYS
330-2
Counter
Total
FAX
0
SYS
331
User interface
Default setting of screen
ALL
0
SYS
332-0
Counter
Display of number of received pages in FAX function
Large
FAX
0
SYS
332-1
Counter
Small
FAX
0
SYS
332-2
Counter
Total
FAX
0
SYS
335-0
Counter
Large
ALL
SYS
335-1
Counter
Small
ALL
335-2
Counter
Total
ALL
0 0 0
Display of total number of pages
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS SYS
Procedure 14
2 14
14
1
14
14
14
14 14 14
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 93 07/04
Code
Classification
342
User interface
344
Counter
346
Counter
347
Counter
348
Counter
349
Counter
352
Counter
353
Counter
355
Counter
356
Counter
357
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Displaying number of PPC 0 original pages placed on original glass
Count setting of tab paper (PM) Count setting of large-sized paper (PM) Definition setting of largesized paper (PM) Count setting of thick paper (PM) Count setting of OHP film (PM) Count setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter)
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
1 1 0 1 1 JPN: 0 OTHER: 1
RAM
Contents
SYS
This setting is whether the number of pages of originals placed on the original glass is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter is double counter) 0: A3/LD 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/ FOLIO/COMP/8K
M M M M M M
ALL
0
M
ALL
0
M
Counter for 1st drawer feeding
ALL
0
M
Counter
Counter for 2nd drawer feeding
ALL
0
M
358
Counter
Counter for bypass feeding
ALL
0
M
359
Counter
Counter for Tandem LCF feeding
ALL
0
M
360
Counter
Counter for 3rd drawer feeding
ALL
0
M
370
Counter
Counter for 4th drawer feeding
ALL
0
M
372
Counter
Counter for ADU
ALL
0
M
374
Counter
Counter for RADF
ALL
0
SYS
Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter for Option LCF feeding
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Counts the number of sheets fed from the Option LCF Counts the number of sheets fed from 1st drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from 2nd drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass feed Counts the number of sheets fed from Tandem LCF Counts the number of sheets fed from 3rd drawer Counts the number of sheets fed from 4th drawer Counts the number of output pages of duplex printing. Counts the number of originals fed from RADF
Procedure 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 94
Code 375
Classification Maintenance
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PM time counter setting ALL Refer to value display/ 0 clearing contents
RAM
Contents
M
e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 495,000 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 495,000 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 495,000 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 410,000 The driving period of the drum (when the main motor is ON) is counted in the drive counts. Selects the job to count up for the external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX The number of error is reset at HDD formatting. The number of error is reset at HDD formatting. The number of error is reset at HDD formatting. The number of error is reset at HDD formatting.
376
Maintenance
Current value of PM time counter display
ALL
0
M
381
Counter
Setting for counter installed externally
ALL
1
M
390
Counter
Number of errors in HDD (Copier)
PPC
0
SYS
391
Counter
Number of errors in HDD (FAX)
FAX
0
SYS
392
Counter
Number of errors in HDD (Scanning)
SCN
0
SYS
393
Counter
Number of errors in HDD (Printer)
PRT
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 1
2
1
1
2 2 2 2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 95 07/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0
Code
Classification
400
Fuser
Fuser unit counter
401
Fuser
402
Fuser
403
Fuser
Display of remaining portion of cleaning web Printing operation setting at the end of cleaning web Number of sheets to start reeling cleaning web
404
Fuser
Setting value to display that the cleaning web is almost consumed
ALL
Refer to contents
M
405
Fuser
Setting value to display that the cleaning web is consumed
ALL
Refer to contents
M
Items
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 0 7
RAM
Contents
M
0: No error 1: C411 2: C412 3: C443 4: 5: C445/465 6: C446/466 7: C447/467 8: C468 9: C449 10: C475 11: C471 12: C472 13: C473 14: C481 15: C480 16: C474 17: C490 18: C468 19: C449 20: C468 21: C449 22: C449 23: C449 24: C447/C467 25: C449 26: C468 27: C449 28: C468 29: C449 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed 0: Stop operation 1: Continue operation The equipment starts reeling the cleaning web every time the specified number of sheets have been printed. (= Setting value X 1 sheet) e-STUDIO600: 450,000 e-STUDIO720: 525,000 e-STUDIO850: 550,000 (Setting value X 1 sheet) e-STUDIO600: 500,000 e-STUDIO720: 575,000 e-STUDIO850: 600,000 (Setting value X 1 sheet)
M M M
Procedure 1
1 1 1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 96
Code
Classification
406
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Pre-running period end ALL 8 temperature (Pressure roller) (Low temperature)
RAM M
407
Fuser
Pre-running period end temperature (Pressure roller) (Normal temperature / Option installed)
ALL
0
M
408
Fuser
Fuser unit pre-running period end temperature (Pressure roller) (Normal temperature / Option not installed)
ALL
Refer to contents
M
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: 100°C 1: 110°C 2: 120°C 3: 125°C 4: 130°C 5: 135°C 6: 140°C 7: 145°C 8: 150°C 9: 155°C 10: 160°C 11: 165°C 12: 170°C 13: 175°C 14: 180°C 15: 185°C 16: 190°C 0: 100°C 1: 110°C 2: 120°C 3: 125°C 4: 130°C 5: 135°C 6: 140°C 7: 145°C 8: 150°C 9: 155°C 10: 160°C 11: 165°C 12: 170°C 13: 175°C 14: 180°C 15: 185°C 16: 190°C 0: 100°C 1: 110°C 2: 120°C 3: 125°C 4: 130°C 5: 135°C 6: 140°C 7: 145°C 8: 150°C 9: 155°C 10: 160°C 11: 165°C 12: 170°C 13: 175°C 14: 180°C 15: 185°C 16: 190°C e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 4 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 1 UC, EUR: 4 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 2 UC, EUR: 4 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 2 UC, EUR: 4
Procedure 1
2
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 97 07/11
Code
Classification
409
Fuser
410
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fuser roller temperature at ALL Refer to Energy Saving Mode contents
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Plain paper)
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
12
RAM
Contents
M
0: OFF 1: 50°C 2: 55°C 3: 60°C 4: 65°C 5: 70°C 6: 75°C 7: 80°C 8: 85°C 9: 90°C 10: 95°C 11: 100°C 12: 105°C 13: 110°C 14: 115°C 15: 120°C 16: 125°C 17: 130°C 18: 135°C 19: 140°C 20: 145°C 21: 150°C 22: 155°C 23: 160°C 24: 165°C 25: 170°C 26: 175°C 27: 180°C e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 19 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 19 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 22 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 22 UC, EUR: 25 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C
M
Procedure 1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 98 07/11
Code
Classification
411
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Fuser roller temperature at ALL Refer to ready status contents
RAM M
412
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Thick paper 3)
ALL
12
M
413
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Thick paper 1)
ALL
12
M
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Contents 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 12 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 9 UC, EUR: 12 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 9 UC, EUR: 12 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 12 UC, EUR: 12 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C
Procedure 1
2
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 99 07/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Toner density life correcALL 3 tion switching
RAM
Contents
M
0: Approx. 0.75% lower than current status 1: Approx. 0.50% lower than current status 2: Approx. 0.25% lower than current status 3: Unchanged (Default) 4: Approx. 0.15% higher than current status 5: Approx. 0.25% higher than current status 6: Approx. 0.50% higher than current status 7: Approx. 0.75% higher than current status 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Disabled 1: 500 sheets interval 2: 1,000 sheets interval 3: 1,500 sheets interval 4: 2,000 sheets interval 5: 2,500 sheets interval 6: 3,000 sheets interval The fusing efficiency level goes up during a continuous printing (when Thick 3 is selected). 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C
414
Developer
417
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 3)
ALL
0
M
418
Charger
Wire cleaning operation cycle setting
ALL
4
M
433
Fuser
High fusing mode
ALL
0
M
437
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Thick paper 2)
ALL
12
M
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 100
Code
Classification
439
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Pre-running time for first ALL 0 printing (Thick paper 2)
RAM
Contents
M
0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Invalid 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled The supply amount of new toner to the developer unit (the drive counts of the new toner supply motor) is corrected. Smaller-Toner supply amount-Larger 5 4 3 1 0 2 6 7 8 The supply amount of recycle toner to the developer unit (the drive counts of the hopper motor) is corrected. Smaller-Toner supply amount-Larger 3 1 0 7 6 5 4 8 2
440
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Plain paper)
ALL
0
M
441
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
M
449
Incorrect paper size jam detection switching Toner supply amount correction/ New toner supply motor control
ALL
0 0
M
455
Paper feeding Process
456
Process
Toner supply amount correction/ Hopper motor control
ALL
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0
M
M
Procedure 1
2
1
1
1 1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 101
Code
Classification
457
Process
460
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Recycle toner supply conALL 1 trol switching
Threshold of low temperature environment control
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
7
RAM
Contents
M
This setting is whether the recycle toner is supplied or not when the toner cartridge is empty. 0: Supplied 1: Not supplied The boundary temperature of the low and normal temperature control can be set. 0: 0°C 1: 5°C 2: 9°C 3: 10°C 4: 12°C 5: 14°C 6: 15°C 7: 16°C 8: 17°C 9: 18°C 10: 19°C 11: 20°C
M
Procedure 1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 102
Code
Classification
462
RADF
463-0 463-1
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Setting for switchback ALL 0 operation in mixed-size copying using RADF
Feeding retry number setting (1st drawer)
Plain paper Others
ALL ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
5 5
RAM
Contents
M
This setting is whether the original length is detected or not by transporting without scanning in reverse when A4-R/FOLIO paper or LT-R/LG paper is detected in a mixedsize copying. 0: Disabled AMS: A series - Judges as A4-R without transporting in reverse with no scanning. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by its length without transporting in reverse with no scanning. APS: A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO without transporting in reverse with no scanning. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG without transporting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Enable 1 AMS: A series - Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length. LT series - Judges whether it is LT-R or LG by transporting without scanning in reverse to detect its length. APS: The same as that of APS in 0: Disabled. 2: Enable 2 AMS/APS: The same as that of AMS in 1: Enable 1. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the 1st drawer.
M M
Procedure 1
2
4 4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 103
Code 464-0
Classification Paper feeding
464-1 465-0
Paper feeding
465-1 466-0
Paper feeding
466-1 467-0
Paper feeding
467-1 468-0
Paper feeding
468-1 470
Paper feeding
471
Paper feeding
476
Counter
478
Laser
480
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 paper number setting (2nd Others ALL 5 drawer) Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 number setpaper ting Others ALL 5 (3rd drawer) Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 number setpaper ting Others ALL 5 (4th drawer) Feeding retry Plain ALL 5 number setpaper ting Others ALL 5 (bypass feed) ALL 5 Feeding retry Plain paper number setting Others ALL 5 (Tandem LCF) Paper size (LD wide) ALL 457/305 feeding/widthwise direction Paper size (Postcard) ALL 148/100 feeding/widthwise direction Counter for used toner full ALL 0 status
RAM M M M M M M M M M M
Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the 2nd drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the 3rd drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the 4th drawer. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Sets the number of times of the feeding retry from the Tandem LCF.
Procedure 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
M
10
M
10
M
Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (Normal rotation)
ALL
0
M
Default setting of paper source
PPC
0
M
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Counts the number of times the Toner bag full status is detected. (The error [CD40] is displayed.) * Set this code to "0" when replacing the Toner bag. Displays the error [CA10] when the set number of rotation error has been detected. 0: 10 times 1: 6 times 2: 8 times 3: 12 times 4: 14 times 5: 16 times 6: 20 times 0: A4/LT 1:Tandem LCF 2: 1st drawer 3: 2nd drawer 4: 3rd drawer 5: 4th drawer 6: Option LCF
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 104
Code 481
482
Classification Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Automatic change of paper PPC 1 source
Feeding retry setting
ALL
Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor
ALL
Contents
SYS
Sets whether or not changing the drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4R, LT-R to LT. “1” is applied when the staple/hole-punch is specified.) 0: ON 1: OFF Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Sets the rotational status of polygonal motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-489.) 1: Stopped
483
Paper feeding Laser
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear Mode
ALL
0
SYS
485
Laser
Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby
ALL
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 0
RAM
M SYS
Procedure 1
2
1 1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 105
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Timing of auto-clearing of ALL 0 polygonal motor pre-running rotation
Code
Classification
486
Laser
488
Laser
Setting of polygonal motor type
ALL
2
M
489
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational speed at ready status
ALL
Refer to contents
M
502
Image
Error diffusion and dither setting at photo mode
PPC
1
SYS
503
User interface
Default setting of density adjustment
PPC
0
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
This setting to switch the polygonal motor to the standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the pre-running. In this code, the period of time to switch the motor status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is enabled when "0" or "2" is set in 08-483 and also "0" is set in 08-484. The rotational status in the ready status can be set in 08-485 The type of the polygonal motor is set. 2: 2-clock type 3: 3-clock type * This setting is enabled only for eSTUDIO850. 0: 60,236.22 rpm 1: 44,500 rpm 2: 40,000 rpm 3: 35,000 rpm 4: Unused 5: Unused 0: 36,318.898 rpm 1: Unused 2: Unused 3: Unused 4: Unused 5: Unused e-STUDIO520/523: 1 e-STUDIO600/603: 1 e-STUDIO720/723: 1 e-STUDIO850/853: 0 Sets the image reproduction method at photo mode. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 0: Automatic 1: Manual (Center)
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 106 07/11
Code
Classification
508
Image
Items Custom Mode setting
Setting mode (08) Default Func- PPC 0
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Not used 1: Custom Mode 1 when Text/Photo is set as a base 2: Custom Mode 2 when Text is set as a base 3: Custom Mode 3 when Photo is set as a base Switches the image processing method when Custom Mode 3 is set. 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10 sec. 11: 12 sec. 12: 14 sec. 13: 16 sec. 14: 18 sec. 15: 20 sec. 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 3: Custom Mode 0: Auto Shut Off Mode 1: Sleep Mode 0: OFF 1: ON
509
Image
Error diffusion and dither setting at a photo mode (Custom Mode)
PPC
1
SYS
526
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film)
ALL
5
M
550
Image
Default setting of original mode
PPC
0
SYS
601
User interface User interface
Setting for the Energy Saving Mode Screen setting for Auto power Save Mode and Auto Shut OFF Mode
ALL
SYS
603
User interface
Setting for automatic duplexing mode
PPC
0 EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 1 0
604
User interface
Default setting for APS/ AMS
PPC
0
SYS
605
User interface
PPC
1
SYS
607
User interface
Centering printing of primary/secondary direction at AMS Default setting of RADF mode
PPC
0
SYS
602
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Single-sided to duplex copying 2: Double-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Continuous feeding (by pressing the [START] button) 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray)
Procedure 1
2
1
1
1 1 1
1
1
1 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 107
User interface User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Key touch sound of control ALL 1 panel Book type original priority PPC 0
612
General
Summer time mode
ALL
613
User interface
Paper size selection for [OTHER] button
PPC
614
Network
Local I/F time-out period
PRT
615
General
Size information of main memory and page memory
ALL
-
SYS
617
User interface
Print setting when department code is not entered
ALL
1
SYS
618
User interface
Default setting when mixed size originals are set on RADF
PPC
0
SYS
619
Paper feeding
Time lag before Auto Job Start of bypass feeding
ALL
4
SYS
620
User interface User interface User interface User interface
Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer) Department management setting (Scanner)
PPC
1 1 1 1
SYS
Code 610 611
621 622 623
Classification
FAX PRT SCN
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0 EUR: FOLIO UC: COMP JPN: A5-R 6
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: OFF 1: ON 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
SYS
SYS SYS
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I/ F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. -50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Displays the sizes of the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. 0: Printed forcibly 1: Print impossible 2: Deleted forcibly 0: Scanned as all in same size 1: Scanned as each original size Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5 sec. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Procedure 1 1
1 9
1
2
1 1
1
1 1 1 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 108 05/11
Code 624 625
627
Classification User interface User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Department management PRT 1 setting (List print) Blank copying prevention PPC 0 mode during RADF jam ming
Contents
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: OFF 1: ON (Start printing when the scanning of each page is finished) 0: Not rotating 1: Rotating 0: Automatic 1: Portrait 0: Invalid 1: Valid * When this code is set to “0” (Invalid), the user data department management setting (08-1482) will be set to “0” (Invalid). Press the button on the LCD to select the size.
1
0: Not used 1: Board installed 2: Service call 0: ON 1: OFF
1
0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: +9.5h 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25: -0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h
1
SYS
User interface User interface User interface
Rotation printing at the non-sorting Direction priority of original image Department management setting
630
Paper feeding
Paper size for Option LCF
ALL
633
Scrambler board User interface
Releasing F200 service call
ALL
Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) Time differences
PPC
0
SYS
ALL
EUR: 24 UC: 40 JPN: 6 Other:0
SYS
628 629
636 638
General
ALL PPC ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
RAM
0 0 0
SYS
JPN: A4 UC: LT EUR: A4 0
M
SYS SYS
SYS
1
1 1 1
9
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 109
2
640
User interface
641
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Date display format ALL EUR: 1 UC: 2 JPN: 0 Automatic Sorting Mode PPC 2 setting (RADF)
642
User interface
Default setting of Sorter Mode
PPC
0
SYS
645
User interface
Correction of reproduction ratio in editing copy
PPC
10
SYS
646
User interface
Image position in editing
PPC
2
SYS
648
User interface
Returning finisher tray when printing is finished
ALL
0
SYS
649
User interface
Magazine sort setting
PPC
0
SYS
650
User interface
2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting
PPC
0
SYS
Code
Classification
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY 2: MM.DD.YYYY
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: STAPLE 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT 0: NON-SORT 1: STAPLE 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT Sets the reproduction ratio for the “X in 1” printing (including magazine sort) to the “Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio”. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% Sets the page pasted position for “X in 1” to the upper left corner/ center. 0: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Cornering 1: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Cornering 2: PPC:Cornering/ PRT:Centering 3: PPC:Centering/ PRT:Centering Sets whether or not returning the finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical
1 1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 110 07/04
Code 651
652
Classification User interface
User interface User interface User interface User interface
659
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Printing format setting for PPC 2 Time stamp and Page Number
Contents
SYS
1
SYS
Hyphen (with page number) /Dropout (with date, time and page number) 0: OFF/OFF 1: ON/OFF 2: OFF/ON 3: ON/ON Note: Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 0: OFF 1: ON
SYS
0: OFF
1
SYS
0: Short edge 1: Long edge Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatic feeding) 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid Clears SMS partition. (Performs when the service call [F106] has occurred.) Initializes all the adjustment modes and setting modes. Initializes the Electronic Filing. Initializes the shared folder. The system FRAM storage area is cleared.
Cascade operation setting
PPC
Cascade operation setting
PRT
Direction priority for date and time stamp printing Auto Job Start setting for bypass feed printing
PPC
User interface
Auto Job start setting for bypass feed printing
PPC
1
SYS
660
Network
ALL
Network
ALL
662
General
ALL
0 0 -
SYS
661
Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail Clearing of SMS partition
665
General
M/SYS all clearing
ALL
-
M/ SYS
666
General
/BOX partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
667
General
/SHA partition clearing
ALL
-
SYS
669
General
System all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
653 657 658
PRT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0 0 0 0
Procedure
RAM
SYS
SYS SYS
1: ON
2
1
1 1
1
1 1 3
3 3 3 3
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 111
Code
Classification
670
General
671 672
User interface General
673
General
678
Setting mode (08) Default Func- HDD diagnostic menu disALL play Size indicator
Contents
SYS
Display the HDD information (Ch.5.3.5) 0: Invalid 1: Valid Initializing of the department management information * Key in the code and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, “Enter Department Code” is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. Sets the trial period from 1 to 60 days. This setting is effective only when the default value is “254”. Once the default value is set, this value is only used for a reference. Sets whether or not displaying the banner advertising. The setting contents of 08-679 and 08-680 are displayed at the time display section on the right top of the screen. When both are set, each content is displayed alternately. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character) Maximum 27 letters (one-byte character)
-
0 -
Trial period setting
PRT/ SCN
254
SYS
General
Setting of banner advertising display
ALL
0
SYS
679
General
ALL
-
SYS
680
General
Banner advertising display 1 Banner advertising display 2
ALL
-
SYS
Initialization of department management information
ALL
RAM
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS SYS
Procedure 2 1 3
1
1
11 11
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 112
Code
Classification
681
General
682
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Display of [BANNER MESALL 0 SAGE] button
Offsetting between jobs
ALL
Duplex printing setting when coin controller is used
ALL
Contents
SYS
0: Not displayed 1: Displayed * This button enables the entry of “Banner advertising display 1 (08-679)” and “Banner advertising display 2 (08-680)” on the control panel. 0: Invalid 1: Valid When the duplex printing is short paid with a coin controller, reverse side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) Rebuilds all databases. Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book. Rebuilds all databases related to the log. 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment 2: Normal formatting
683
User interface General
684 685
General General
Rebuilding all databases Rebuilding all databases related to address book
ALL ALL
-
SYS SYS
686
General
ALL
-
SYS
689
FAX
Rebuilding all databases related to log Adaptation of paper source priority selection
FAX
0
SYS
690
General
HDD formatting
ALL
SYS
691
General
HDD type display
ALL
692
Maintenance
Performing panel calibration
ALL
-
SYS
693
General
Initialization of NIC information
ALL
-
SYS
694 695
General General
Performing HDD testing Notifying condition of trial period end
ALL PRT/ SCN
3
SYS SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1 1
RAM
SYS SYS
SYS
0: Not formatted 1: Not used 2: Normal format Performs the calibration of the pressing position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. Returns the value to the factory shipping default value. Checks the bad sector. Sets when the end of trial period is notified. 0: On the day it ends 1 to 59: n days before
Procedure 1
2
1 1
3 3 3 1
7 7 1
3 3 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 113 05/06
Code 696 697
Classification Scrambler board Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Installation of scrambler ALL 0 board (Option)
RAM -
Paper type priority
PPC
1
SYS
698
Scrambler board
Entering the key code for scrambler board
ALL
-
-
699
Scrambler board FAX
HDD data all clearing
ALL
-
-
Destination setting for FAX
FAX
EUR: 5 UC: 4 JPN: 0 Other: 1
SYS
702
Maintenance
Remote-controlled service function
ALL
2
SYS
703
Maintenance
ALL
-
SYS
704-0
User interface
Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Interruption of Copying stapling operation (no staple) Printing / BOX printing
ALL
1
SYS
ALL
1
SYS
701
704-1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Contents
Procedure
0: Not installed 1: Installed
2
Sets the paper type priority during copying. 1: Plain paper 2: Thick paper 1 Start up this code and have the user enter the key code. Once the key code has been set, this code cannot be set again on security grounds. This setting is enabled only when the Scrambler Board is installed. 0: Japan 1: Asia 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong 4: U.S.A./Canada 5: Germany 6: U.K. 7: Italy 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid Maximum 256 Bytes
1
0: Continues printing by switching sort setting 1: Interrupts printing 0: Continues printing by switching sort setting 1: Interrupts printing
5
3 1
1
11 11
4
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 114
Code 707
710
711 715
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- Mainte- Remote-controlled service ALL https:// device.mf nance HTTP initially-registered server p-supURL setting port.com: 443/ device/firstregist.ashx Mainte- Short time interval setting ALL 24 nance of recovery from Emer (Remote) gency Mode Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance
716
Maintenance
717
Maintenance
718
Maintenance
719
Maintenance Maintenance
720
4
2
ALL
60
SYS
Remote-controlled service periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Remote-controlled service Writing data of self-diagnostic code Remote-controlled service response waiting time (Timeout) Remote-controlled service initial registration
ALL
1230
SYS
0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
1
ALL
0
SYS
0: Prohibited 1: Accepted
1
ALL
3
SYS
Unit: Minute
1
ALL
0
SYS
1
Remote-controlled service tentative password Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only) Service center call function
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned 3: Satellite communication starts Maximum 10 letters
ALL
0
SYS
0: Not registered 1: Registered
2
ALL
2
SYS
1
ALL
-
SYS
0: OFF 1: Notifies all service calls 2: Notifies all but paper jams Maximum 256 letters
ALL
1 -
SYS
SYS SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
SYS
Maximum 30 letters
11
723
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
HTTP proxy IP address setting
ALL
728
Maintenance
HTTP proxy port number setting
ALL
729
Maintenance Maintenance
HTTP proxy ID setting
ALL
0 -
HTTP proxy password setting
ALL
-
730
Maximum 256 letters
Procedure
Short time interval setting of Emergency Mode
Maintenance
727
SYS
Contents
Sets the time interval to recover from the Emergency Mode to the Normal Mode. (Unit: Hour) Unit: Minute
721
726
RAM
Service center call HTTP server URL setting HTTP proxy setting
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS
0: Valid 1: Invalid 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000)
1
1
11
11 1 11
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 115 07/04
Code 731 732
733 734 738 739 740 741 742 743 744
Classification Maintenance Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
745
Maintenance (Remote)
746
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
747 748 758 759 760
Setting mode (08) Default Func- HTTP proxy panel display ALL 1 Automatic ordering funcALL 3 tion of supplies Automatic ordering function of supplies FAX number Automatic ordering function of supplies E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name Automatic ordering function of supplies User's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies User's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Service number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's name Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies Supplier's name Automatic ordering function of supplies Supplier's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Notes Information about supplies Part number of toner cartridge Information about supplies Order quantity of toner cartridge Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
SYS
Procedure 1 1
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 100 letters
11
ALL
0
SYS
Maximum 5 digits
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/Pause] button
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 100 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 128 letters
11
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 20 digits
11
ALL
1
SYS
1
ALL
1
SYS
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
11 11
11
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 116 06/09
Code 761 762 763 765
Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
767
Maintenance (Remote)
768
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance
769 770 771 772 773
Maintenance
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Information about supplies ALL Part number of used toner bag ALL 1 Information about supplies Order quantity of used toner bag Information about supplies ALL 1 Condition number of used toner bag Automatic ordering supALL EUR: 2 plies UC: 0 Display JPN: 2 Other: 2 Service Notification setting ALL 0
RAM SYS
Contents Maximum 20 digits
Procedure 11
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
SYS
0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP) 2: Invalid Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent.(08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid (E-mail) 2: Valid (FAX) Maximum 192 letters
1
1
Destination E-mail address
ALL
-
SYS
11
Total counter information transmission setting
ALL
0
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
Total counter transmission date setting
ALL
0
SYS
0 to 31
1
PM counter notification setting
ALL
0
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
Dealer's name
ALL
-
SYS
11
Login name
ALL
-
SYS
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 0 Other: 0 0
SYS
Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration 0: Not displayed 1: displayed
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
11 1
774
Mainte- Display setting of [Service Notification] button nance (Remote)
ALL
775
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
Sending error contents of equipment
ALL
Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Destination E-mail address 2
ALL
-
SYS
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
Destination E-mail address 3
ALL
-
SYS
Maximum 192 letters
11
776 777 778
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 117 07/04
2
Code
Classification
780
Maintenance
781
Maintenance
782
Maintenance
783
Maintenance
784
Maintenance
785
Maintenance
786
Maintenance
787
Maintenance
788
Maintenance
789
Maintenance
790
Maintenance
794
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
795 796 797 798
Maintenance General
799
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Day-1 ALL 0 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Day-2 Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Day-3 Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Day-4 ALL 0 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Sunday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Monday ALL 0 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Tuesday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Wednesday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Thursday ALL 0 Remote-controlled service polling day selection Friday Remote-controlled service ALL 0 polling day selection Saturday Information of supplies set- ALL 0 ting of toner cartridge Information about supplies ALL 0 Setting of used toner bag ALL 0 Remote-controlled service lengthened interval polling (End of month) Firmware download ALL 0 Notifying address of trial PRT/ 3 period end SCN
Forcible end of trial period
PRT/ SCN
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
0: Accepted 1: Prohibited Sets where the end of the trial period is to be notified. 0: OFF 1: User 2: Service center 3: User and service center [CANCEL]: Cancel [EXECUTION]: Forcible end When the “Forcible end of trial period” is performed, “0” is set in the code (08-673) to end up the trial period forcibly.
1
SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS SYS SYS SYS
SYS
1 1 1 1
1 1
1
3
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 118
Code 800
Classification Image quality control
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of times of sensor ALL 0 abnormality/ 0 clearing
RAM
Contents
M
The number of times the image quality closed-loop control error has occurred is displayed. When the equipment has been repaired and the cause of the error has been evaluated after the appearance of a warning message (IQC), reset the counter to switch off this message. The printing interval to perform the image quality closed-loop control is set. Default: 2000 sheets (Setting value X 100 sheets) When the equipment has been left in warming-up for more than the specified period of time, the image quality closed-loop control is performed. This period is set in this code. Default: 4 (Unit: hours) The image quality closed-loop control is performed in a shorter printing interval than the one set in 08-803 only when the equipment has been left inactive for a long time (including power-OFF). Default: 500 sheets (Setting value X 10 sheets) The output value of the transfer bias at the center of the paper is corrected. e-STUDIO520/523: 105 e-STUDIO600/603: 105 e-STUDIO720/723: 105 e-STUDIO850/853: 139
803
Image quality control
Image quality control / Auto-start print volume setting 1
ALL
20
M
804
Image quality control
Condition setting of image quality control auto-start
ALL
4
M
810
Image quality control
Image quality control / Auto-start print volume setting 2
ALL
50
M
830
Transfer
Transfer voltage transformer DC correction (C)
ALL
Refer to contents
M
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 1
2
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 119 07/11
Code
Classification
841
Transfer
844
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Transfer timing correction ALL 1
Switching timing into lowspeed pre-running from start of ready status (Pressure roller)
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
RAM
Contents
M
The timing to turn on the transfer bias is corrected. 0: Approx. 1.4 mm passed from the reference position 1: Turns on at the reference position (default) 2: Approx. 1.4 mm before the reference position 3: Approx. 2.8 mm before the reference position 4: Approx. 7.1 mm before the reference position 0: Approx. 1.6 mm passed from the reference position 1: Turns on at the reference position (default) 2: Approx. 1.6 mm before the reference position 3: Approx. 3.3 mm before the reference position 4: Approx. 8.2 mm before the reference position 0: Switching disabled 1: 5 min. 2: 10 min. 3: 20 min. 4: 30 min. 5: 40 min. 6: 50 min. 7: 60 min. 8: 70 min. 9: 80 min. 10: 90 min. 11: 100 min. 12: 120 min. e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 10 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 10 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 10 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 10 UC, EUR: 10
M
Procedure 1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 120 07/11
Code
Classification
845
Fuser
846
Fuser
847
Fuser
848
Fuser
855
Fuser
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL Refer to Low-speed pre-running contents starting temperature dur ing ready status (Pressure roller) (Option not installed) (When setting 08-844 is enabled)
Low-speed pre-running stopping temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (Option not installed) (When setting 08-844 is enabled) Low-speed pre-running starting temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (Option installed) (When setting 08-844 is enabled)
Low-speed pre-running stopping temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (Option installed) (When setting 08-844 is enabled) Low-speed pre-running setting at recovery from Energy Saving Mode
RAM
Contents
M
0: 50°C 1: 55°C 2: 60°C 3: 65°C 4: 70°C 5: 75°C 6: 80°C 7: 85°C 8: 90°C 9: 95°C 10: 100°C 11: 105°C 12: 110°C 13: 115°C 14: 120°C 15: 125°C 16: 130°C e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 10 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 10 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 10 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 10 UC, EUR: 10 0: +5°C 1: +10°C 2: +15°C 3: +20°C 4: +25°C 5: +30°C 6: +35°C 7: +40°C 8: +45°C 9: +50°C
ALL
5
M
ALL
10
M
ALL
5
M
ALL
Refer to contents
M
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0: 50°C 2: 60°C 4: 70°C 6: 80°C 8: 90°C 10: 100°C 11: 105°C 12: 110°C 13: 115°C 14: 120°C 15: 125°C 16: 130°C 0: +5°C 2: +15°C 4: +25°C 6: +35°C 8: +45°C
Procedure 1
2
1
1: 55°C 3: 65°C 5: 75°C 7: 85°C 9: 95°C
1
1: +10°C 3: +20°C 5: +30°C 7: +40°C 9: +50°C
1
0: Performs pre-running 1: No pre-running e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 0 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 1 UC, EUR: 0 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 1 UC, EUR: 0 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 0
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 121
Code
Classification
858
Fuser
859 860 861
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Switching Plain ALL 0 printing speed paper Thick ALL 0 paper 1 Thick ALL 0 paper 2 Thick ALL 0 paper 3 Transfer transformer DC ALL 128 correction (H)
RAM
Contents
M
0: Disabled 1: Enabled only for 5 minutes after warming-up 2: Always enabled
M M M
868
Transfer
869
Transfer
Transfer transformer DC correction (L)
ALL
128
M
890
Fuser
Low-speed pre-running starting temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (Option not installed)
ALL
Refer to contents
M
891
Fuser
Low-speed pre-running stopping temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (Option not installed)
ALL
Refer to contents
M
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
Procedure 1 1 1 1
The output value of the transfer bias at the leading edge of paper is corrected. The output value of the transfer bias at the trailing edge of paper is corrected. 0: 50°C 1: 55°C 2: 60°C 3: 65°C 4: 70°C 5: 75°C 6: 80°C 7: 85°C 8: 90°C 9: 95°C 10: 100°C 11: 105°C 12: 110°C 13: 115°C 14: 120°C 15: 125°C 16: 130°C e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 16 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 16 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 6 UC, EUR: 16 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 10 UC, EUR: 16 0: 5°C 1: 10°C 2: 15°C 3: 20°C 4: 25°C 5: 30°C 6: 35°C 7: 40°C 8: 45°C 9: 50°C e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 2 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 2 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 2 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 2 UC, EUR: 2
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 122 07/11
Code
Classification
897
Fuser
898
Fuser
900
Version
903 904
Version Version
905 906
Version Version
907 908 909
Version Version Version
915 920
Version Version
921 922
Version Version
923
Version
924
Version
925
Version
926
Version
927
Version
928
Version
929
Version
930
Version
931
Version
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Low-speed pre-running ALL 16 starting temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (When options are installed)
Low-speed pre-running stopping temperature during ready status (Pressure roller) (When options are installed)) System firmware ROM version Engine ROM version Laser ROM version Scanner ROM version PFC ROM version RADF ROM version Finisher ROM version Inserter ROM version Fax board ROM version FROM basic section software version FROM internal program UI data fixed section version UI data common section version Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version of UI data language 5 in HDD Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version of UI data in FROM displayed at powerON Version of UI data language 7 in HDD
RAM M
Contents 0: 50°C 2: 60°C 4: 70°C 6: 80°C 8: 90°C 10: 100°C 11: 105°C 12: 110°C 13: 115°C 14: 120°C 15: 125°C 16: 130°C 0: 5°C 2: 15°C 4: 25°C 6: 35°C 8: 45°C
Procedure
1: 55°C 3: 65°C 5: 75°C 7: 85°C 9: 95°C
1
1: 10°C 3: 20°C 5: 30°C 7: 40°C 9: 50°C
1
2
ALL
2
M
ALL
-
-
T390SYXXXXX
2
ALL ALL
-
-
390M-XXX 390L-XXX
2 2
ALL ALL
-
-
390S-XXX 390F-XXX
2 2
ALL ALL ALL
-
-
DF-XXXX SDL-XX FIN-XX INS-XX
2 2 2
FAX ALL
-
-
F562-XXX VX.XX/X.XX
2 2
ALL ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X
2 2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
ALL
-
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 123 06/09
Code
Classification
933 934
Version Version
935
Version
936
Version
937
Version
938
Version
939
Version
944 945
Version Network
947
General
949
General
950
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Web data whole version ALL Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 1 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 2 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 3 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 4 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 5 Web UI data in HDD ALL Version: Language 6 HDD version ALL Two-way setting of ALL 2 RawPort 9100 Initialization after software ALL version upgrade
2 2
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
-
VXXX.XXX X
2
T390HDXXXXX 1: Valid 2: Invalid Perform this code when the software in this equipment has been upgraded. Sets the number of pages to interrupt the printing automatically. 0-100: 0 to 100 pages Sets the start-up method of the Electronic Filing. 0: Standard 1: Forced start-up (Not recovered) 2: Forced start-up (Recovered) 0: Renewed automatically 1: Enter every time 0: Immediately after the completion of scanning 1: Cleared by Auto Clear 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON
2 12
Sets the PCL line feed code. 0: Automatic setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF 2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF 3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it is short paid using a coin controller. 0: Pause the job 1: Stop the job
1
UTY -
SYS
ElecStart-up method of Electronic Fil- tronic Filing ing
ALL
0
SYS
953
User interface
Access code entry for Electronic Filing printing
ALL
0
SYS
954
User interface
Clearing timing for files and Electronic Filing Agent
ALL
1
SYS
969
User interface User interface
Error sound
ALL
SYS
Sound setting when switching to Energy Saving Mode PCL line feed code setting
ALL
1 JPN: 0 Other: 1 0
Network
975
General
Job handling when printing is short paid with coin controller
PRT
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
Procedure
VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X
0
973
Contents
-
ALL
970
Automatic interruption page setting during black printing
RAM
SYS SYS
SYS
3
1
1
1 1
1 1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 124
Code 976
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- ElecEquipment name setting to ALL 0 tronic Fil- a folder when saving files ing
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets whether or not adding the equipment name to the folder when saving files. 0: Not add 1: Add the equipment name 2: Add the user name 0: AUTO 1: 1st drawer 2: 2nd drawer 3: 3rd drawer 4: 4th drawer 5: Tandem LCF 6: Option LCF 0: Roman-8 1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 4: PC-8,Code Page 437 5: PC-8 D/N, Danish/ Norwegian 6: PC-850,Multilingual 7: PC-852, Latin2 8: PC-8 Turkish 9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 12: DeskTop 13: PS Text 14: Ventura International 15: Ventura US 16: Microsoft Publishing 17: Math-8 18: PS Math 19: Ventura Math 20: Pi Font 21: Legal 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom 23: ISO 6: ASCII 24: ISO 11 25: ISO 15: Italian 26: ISO 17 27: ISO 21: German 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29: ISO 69: French 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31: MC Text 32: PC Cyrillic 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35: PC-775 36: PC-1004 37: Symbol 38: Windows Baltic 39: Wingdings
978
Network
Raw printing job (Paper feeding drawer)
PRT
0
SYS
979
Network
Raw printing job (PCL symbol set)
PRT
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 1
2
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 125 06/09
Code 983 985
Setting mode (08) Default ClassifiFunc- User JOB STATUS initial screen ALL 0 interface setting ElecPrint mode setting of mixed ALL 0 tronic Fil- input source of Electronic ing Filing
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: Print 1: Private 0: Image quality priority mode 1: Function priority mode Sets the copy function to be invalid. 0: Valid 1: Invalid 0: Not switched 1: LG → 13”LG 2: FOLIO → 13”LG This code can be also keyed in from the adjustment mode (05976). 10 digits Refers to values of total counter 1: Not printed out when the equipment is restarted 2: Printed out when the equipment is restarted 1: Auto 2: 10MBPS Half Duplex 3: 10MBPS Full Duplex 4: 100MBPS Half Duplex 5: 100MBPS Full Duplex 1: Unchanging 2: Automatic addressing (DHCP) 3: No IP address applied to automatic addressing (DHCP) Maximum 96 letters
SYS
986
General
Copy function setting
PPC
0
SYS
988
Paper feeding
Setting of paper size switching to 13” LG
ALL
0
SYS
995
Version
Equipment number (serial number) display
ALL
SYS
999
FSMS total counter
ALL
Selection of NIC status information
ALL
0 1
SYS
1002
Maintenance Network
1003
Network
Communication speed and settings of Ethernet
ALL
1
NIC
1006
Network
Method of IP addressing
ALL
2
NIC
1007
Network
Domain name
ALL
-
NIC
1008
Network
IP address
ALL
-
NIC
1009
Network
Subnet mask
ALL
-
NIC
1010
Network
Gateway
ALL
-
NIC
1011
Network
Availability of IPX
ALL
1
NIC
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
NIC
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available
Procedure 1 1
1
1 11
1 12
12
12
12 12
12
12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 126 05/11
Code
Classification
1012
Network
Items Network frame type
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 1
1013
Network
Availability of NCP Burst
ALL
1014
Network
Availability of AppleTalk
ALL
1015
Network
Zone setting of AppleTalk
ALL
1016
Network
Availability of LDAP
ALL
1017
Network
Availability of DNS
ALL
1018
Network
IP address to DNS server (Primary)
1019
Network
1020
1 1 *
RAM
Contents
NIC
1: Automatic 2: IEEE802.3 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3SNAP 5: IEEE802.2 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 32 letters *: Wildcard character 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS 0: Not edited 1: Account name of From Address +Device name Maximum 15 letters The network - related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 127 letters Maximum 47 letters 1: Available 2: Not available
NIC NIC NIC NIC
ALL
1 1 -
IP address to DNS server (Secondary)
ALL
-
NIC
Network
DDNS Desired level
ALL
1
NIC
1022
Network
From Name Creation setting in SMTP authentication
ALL
0
SYS
1023
Network
NetBios name
ALL
MFP_seri al
UTY
1024
Network
Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary)
ALL
-
UTY
1025
Network
Name of WINS server or IP address (Secondary)
ALL
-
UTY
1026
Network
Availability of Bindery
ALL
NIC
1027
Network
Availability of NDS
ALL
1028 1029 1030
Network Network Network
Directory service context Directory service tree Availability of HTTP server
ALL ALL ALL
1031
Network
Port number to NIC HTTP server
ALL
1 1 1 80
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
NIC NIC
NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC
Procedure 12
2 12 12 12 12 12 12
12
12
1
12
12
12
12 12 12 12 12 12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 127 05/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Port number to system ALL 8080 HTTP server Availability of SMTP client ALL 1 FQDN or IP address to ALL SMTP server TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 client Availability of SMTP server ALL 1 TCP port number of SMTP ALL 25 server E-mail box name to SMTP ALL server Availability of Offramp ALL 2 Offramp security ALL 1 Printing at Offramp ALL 1 Availability of POP3 clients ALL 1 FQDN or IP address to ALL POP3 server Types of POP3 server ALL 1
Code
Classification
1032
Network
1037
Network
1038
Network
1039
Network
1040
Network
1041
Network
1042
Network
1043
Network
1044
Network
1045
Network
1046
Network
1047
Network
1048
Network
1049
Network
1050 1051
Network Network
1052
Network
1055
Network
TCP port number of FTP client
ALL
1057 1058
Network Network
ALL ALL
1059
Network
Login name to FTP server Login password to FTP server Availability of FTP server
1060
Network
TCP port number of FTP server
ALL
1061 1062
Network Network
ALL ALL
1063
Network
Login name to FTP client Login password to FTP client MIB function
ALL
1065
Network
Setting of read Community
ALL
Login name to POP3 server Login password to POP3 E-mail reception interval (Unit: Minute) TCP port number of POP3 client
RAM NIC NIC NIC
UTY
12 1: Available 2: Not available
12 12 12
UTY
1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available 1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes
12
UTY UTY NIC NIC NIC
5 110 21 -
NIC NIC
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
12
Maximum 192 letters
ALL ALL
1 public
12
UTY
NIC
1 21 -
1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 128 Bytes
UTY
-
ALL
Procedure 1
NIC
ALL
ALL
Contents
1: Automatic 2: POP3 3: APOP Maximum 96 letters Maximum 96 letters
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
NIC
12
UTY
12
SYS SYS
Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
11 11
NIC
1: Available 2: Not available
12
UTY
12
SYS SYS
Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
11 11
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 31 letters
12
NIC
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 128 05/11
Code
Classification
1066
Network
1069
Network
1070
Network
1073
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Setting of read/Write ComALL private munity TRAP destination IP ALL address
RAM
Procedure
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
UTY
000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
public
NIC
Network
Community setting of TRAP (via IP) Availability of Raw/TCP
ALL
NIC
1074
Network
TCP port number of Raw
ALL
1075
Network
Availability of LPD client
ALL
1076
Network
TCP port number of LPD
ALL
1077 1078
Network Network
LPD queue name Availability of IPP
ALL ALL
1079
Network
ALL
1080
Network
Availability of IPP port number “80” TCP port number of IPP
1081
Network
IPP printer name
ALL
1 9100 1 515 1 1 631 MFP_seri al
1082 1083 1084
Network Network Network
ALL ALL ALL
-
1085
Network
ALL
1086
Network
1087
Network
1088
Network
1089
Network
IPP printer location IPP printer information IPP printer information (more) Installer of IPP printer driver IPP printer “Make and Model” IPP printer information (more) MFGR IPP message from operator Availability of FTP print
1090 1091
Network Network
ALL ALL
1092
Network
Printer user name of FTP Printer user password of FTP TCP port number to FTP print server
ALL
Contents
1: Valid 2: Invalid
NIC NIC
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid
12 12
Maximum 31 letters 1: Valid 2: Invalid 1: Valid 2: Invalid
NIC
12 12 12 12 12
NIC NIC NIC
Maximum 127 letters The network - related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters
12 12 12
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 127 letters
12
ALL
1 print -
NIC
1: Available 2: Not available Maximum 31 letters Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
21
NIC
12 12
NIC NIC NIC
12
NIC NIC NIC
12 12 12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 129 06/09
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Login name to Novell print ALL MFP_seri server al
Code
Classification
1093
Network
1094
Network
1095
Network
1096
Network
1097
Network
1098
Network
1099
Network
1100
Network
Method of SMTP server authentication
ALL
1
NIC
1101
Network
ALL
-
1102
Network
ALL
1103
Network
Login name for SMTP server authentication Login password for SMTP server authentication Rendezvous setting
ALL
1104
Network
Link local host name
ALL
Login password to Novell print server Name of SearchRoot server Scan rate setting of print queue Page number limitation for printing text of received Email MDN return mail setting when receiving E-mail Trap destination of IPX
RAM
Procedure 12
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 47 letters The network - related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" Maximum 31 letters
ALL
-
NIC
Maximum 31 letters
12
ALL
5 5
NIC
Unit: Second
12
ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 -
NIC
Contents
UTY UTY
12
12
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid 24 letters (Valid from 0 to 9 and from A to F) 1: Disable 2: Plain 3: Login 4: Cram-MD5 5: Digest MD5 6: Kerberos 7: NTLM 10: Auto Maximum 64 letters
12
-
NIC
Maximum 64 letters
12
1 MFP_seri al
NIC
1: Valid 2: Invalid Maximum 127 letters The network - related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial"
12
UTY
NIC
12 12 12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 130 05/11
Code
Classification
1105
Network
Items Service name setting
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL Refer to content
1111
Network
POP Before SMTP setting
ALL
1112
Network
Host name
ALL
1113
Network
1114
Network
Windows domain No.1 of user authentication Sending mail text of InternetFAX
1117
Network
1118 1119
RAM NIC
2 MFP_seri al
NIC
ALL
-
UTY
ALL
1
SYS
SMB time-out period
ALL
SYS
General Network
Clearing of TAT partition Initialization of NIC information
ALL ALL
300 -
SYS -
1121
Network
ALL
-
1122
Network
ALL
1123
Network
PDC (Primary Domain Controller) name No.1 of authentication BDC (Backup Domain Controller) name No.1 of authentication Windows domain of device authentication
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
NIC
Contents Maximum 63 letters The network - related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" e-STUDIO520: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO520_serial e-STUDIO523: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO523_serial e-STUDIO600: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO600_serial e-STUDIO603: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO603_serial e-STUDIO720: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO720_serial e-STUDIO723: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO723_serial e-STUDIO850: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO850_serial e-STUDIO853: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO853_serial 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Maximum 63 letters The network - related serial number of the equipment appears at "serial" Maximum 128 letters 0: Invalid (Not sending the mail text) 1: Valid (Sending the mail text) Unit: Second
Procedure 12
2
12 12
12 1
1 3 3
UTY
Initializes only the information of the Network setting items. Maximum 128 letters
12
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
4
UTY
3: ON (Domain selected) 4: OFF (Work group selected)
12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 131 07/11
Code
Classification
1124
Network
1125
General
1126
Counter
1128
Network
1129
Network
1130
User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Workgroup name ALL workgroup Data writing of address ALL 0 book data import (overwrit ing method) Validity of interrupt copyALL 0 ing when external counters are installed Netware User Auth Tree ALL Name1 Netware User Auth ConALL text Name1 Job Build Function ALL 1
1131
User interface
Maximum number of time job build performed
ALL
2000
SYS
1132
General
Default screen selection of the User Function menu
ALL
1
SYS
1134
Network
ALL
-
UTY
1135
Paper feeding
Netware User Auth Tree Name2 Default setting of drawers (Printer/BOX)
PRT
6
SYS
1138
Network
Setting of LDAP searching method
ALL
0
SYS
1139
Network
LDAP authentication setting
ALL
0
SYS
1140
User interface
Restriction on template function by administrator privilege
ALL
0
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedure
UTY
Maximum 15 letters
12
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
SYS
0: Invalid 1: Valid
1
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 127 letters
12
SYS
Sets the Job Build Function. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets the maximum number of time a job build has been performed. 5-2000: 5 to 2000 times Selects the default screen when entering the User Function menu by pressing the [USER FUNCTIONS] button. 0: ADDRESS 1: COUNTER Maximum 47 letters
1
1: Tandem LCF 2: 1st drawer 3: 2nd drawer 4: 3rd drawer 5: 4th drawer 6: Option LCF The method of LDAP searching is set. 0: Partial match 1: Prefix match 2: Backward match 3: Exact match 0: Authentication not performed 1: Authentication performed The use of templates can be restricted to the administrator. 0: No restriction 1: Permitted only under administrator's privilege
1
1
12 1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 132
Code
Classification
1141
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Display of MAC address ALL -
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
12
2
Netware User Auth Context Name2 Netware User Auth Tree Name3 Counter notification Remote FAX setting
ALL
-
UTY
(**:**:**:**:**:**) The address is displayed as above (6-byte data is divided by a colon at every 2 bytes). Maximum 127 letters
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 47 letters
12
ALL
-
SYS
11
ALL
-
UTY
General
Netware User Auth Context Name3 Enhanced bold for PCL6
Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [MONITOR/PAUSE] button. Maximum 127 letters
ALL
SYS
1345
Image quality control
Counter for photoconductive drum at drum surface potential sensor control
ALL
0 0
1371
Image quality control
Counter for accumulated number of sheets after image quality control
ALL
0
M
1372
Counter
Heater and energizing time accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0
M
1376
Counter
Counter for toner cartridge rotation
ALL
0
M
1143
Network
1144
Network
1145
Maintenance (Remote)
1148
Network
1149
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
M
2
12 1
The drive counts of the photoconductive drum at the drum surface potential sensor control is displayed. The total number of output pages from the last image quality closedloop control (excluding the one at "Image quality control enforcement (05-290)") is displayed. The total period of time the heater control has been performed (when the power is ON) is counted but it is not counted in the Sleep mode. When the counter value of the fuser unit is reset on the main unit screen in the PM Support mode, this counter value is also reset in sync. The number of the toner cartridge rotation is counted.
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 133
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Counter for period of time ALL 0 fuser unit is at ready temperature
Code
Classification
1378
Counter
1380
Counter
Counter for period of time fuser unit is at printing temperature
ALL
0
M
1382
Counter
Counter for period of time fuser unit is at energy saving temperature/Counter reset
ALL
0
M
1385
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 1)
ALL
0
M
1386
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 2)
ALL
0
M
1387
Image processing
Number of output pages (Thick paper 3)
ALL
0
M
1388
Image processing
Number of output pages (OHP film)
ALL
0
M
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
The total period of time the heater control has been performed (when the power is in the ready status) is counted. When the counter value of the fuser unit is reset on the main unit screen in the PM Support mode, this counter value is also reset in sync. The total period of time the heater control has been performed (during printing) is counted. When the counter value of the fuser unit is reset on the main unit screen in the PM Support mode, this counter value is also reset in sync. The total period of time the heater control has been performed (when the equipment is in the Energy Saving mode) is counted. When the counter value of the fuser unit is reset on the main unit screen in the PM Support mode, this counter value is also reset in sync. The counter starts counting up when the registration sensor is turned ON in the Thick Paper 1 mode. The counter starts counting up when the registration sensor is turned ON in the Thick Paper 2 mode. The counter starts counting up when the registration sensor is turned ON in the Thick Paper 3 mode. The counter starts counting up when the registration sensor is turned ON in the OHP mode.
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 134 05/11
1390
Paper feeding
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Feeding retry counter (1st ALL 0 drawer)
1391
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (2nd drawer)
ALL
0
M
1392
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (3rd drawer)
ALL
0
M
1393
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (4th drawer)
ALL
0
M
1394
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (bypass feed)
ALL
0
M
1395
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter (Tandem LCF)
ALL
0
M
1396
Paper feeding
ALL
0
M
1397
Paper feeding
ALL
0
M
1398
Paper feeding
ALL
0
M
1399
Paper feeding
ALL
0
M
1400
Paper feeding
ALL
0
M
1
1401
Paper feeding
ALL
0
M
1
1402
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter upper limit value (1st drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (2nd drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (3rd drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (4th drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (Bypass feed) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (Tandem LCF) Feeding retry counter (Option LCF)
ALL
0
M
1403
Paper feeding
Feeding retry counter upper limit value (Option LCF)
ALL
0
M
Code
Classification
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
M
Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the 1st drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the 2nd drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the 3rd drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the 4th drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the Tandem LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1390 to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.
Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the Option LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1402) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case "0" is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value.
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
1
1 1 1 1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 135 06/09
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Counter for period of toner ALL 0 cartridge rotation time
Code
Classification
1410
Counter
1412
Counter
Counter for tab paper
ALL
0
M
1415
Process
Detection and control of empty status of toner cartridge
ALL
JPN: 0 Others: 1
M
1422
Data overwrite kit
HDD data overwriting type setting
ALL
0
SYS
1424
Data overwrite kit
HDD data clearing type setting (forcible clearing)
ALL
0
SYS
1426
Data overwrite kit
Forcible HDD data clearing
ALL
-
-
1427
Data overwrite kit Data overwrite kit User interface
Forcible FRAM data all clearing
ALL
-
-
3
Forcible SRAM backup data all clearing
ALL
-
-
3
Margin width (Top/Bottom, Left/Right)
ALL
SYS
User interface
Margin width (Bookbinding margin)
ALL
Front: 7/ Back: 7 14
1428 1429
1430
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
M
The period of rotation time of the toner cartridge is counted. (1 count = 12 ms) The counter starts counting up when the registration sensor is turned ON in the Tab Paper mode. The detection and control of the empty status of the toner cartridge is switched ON or OFF. 0: OFF 1: ON Select the type of the overwriting level; LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH for deleting HDD data. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.) 0: LOW 1: MEDIUM 2: HIGH Select the type of the overwriting level; LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH for deleting HDD data. (This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.) 0: LOW 1: MEDIUM 2: HIGH HDD data is cleared in the procedure set in 081424. * This setting is enabled only when the GP-1060 is installed.
SYS
This setting is not reflected in "Right", even if the value less than 2 is set for "Back".
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
3
10
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 136 05/11
Code
Classification
1431
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ACC ALL 1 (AT_CASETTE_CHANGE) for Printer/Box printing
Contents
SYS
0: ACC prohibited 1: Only in the same paper direction 2: In both same direction and different directions 0: Normal mode 1: Mode for Private Print 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted) 0: Function OFF (no restriction on data saving or other operations) 1: Function ON (Data saving or other operations are restricted 0: No hole punch 1: Hole punch 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid Data obtaining interval (Unit: Hour) SNTP server IP Address (Primary) SNTP server IP Address (Secondary)
12
1432
Network
Mode only for Private Print
ALL
0
SYS
1435
Network
"Disable private and proof print save" function
ALL
0
SYS
1436
Network
"Disable fax save" function
ALL
0
SYS
1437
Paper feeding Paper feeding
Hole punch on tab paper
ALL
SYS
ALL
0 1
ALL
1
SYS
ALL
1
-
1438
1439
Paper feeding
1440
Network
Automatic feed setting of tab paper and insertion sheet (Remote) Automatic feed setting of tab paper and insertion sheet (Local) IP Confilct Detect
1441
Network
SNTP Enable
ALL
2
-
1442
Network
SNTP Polling rate
ALL
-
1444
Network
Primary SNTP Address
ALL
24 -
-
1445
Network
Secondary SNTP Address
ALL
-
-
1446
Network
Port number to SNTP
ALL
-
1447
Network
IPP administrator name
ALL
123 -
-
1448
Network
IPP administrator password
ALL
-
-
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
RAM
SYS
2 1 1
1
1 1
12 12 12 12 12
This should be an account which can control all IPP jobs. This should be the password of an account which can control all IPP jobs.
12 12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 137 06/09
Setting mode (08) Default Func- IPP authentication method ALL 1
Code
Classification
1449
Network
1450
Network
User name for IPP authentication
ALL
-
-
1451
Network
Password for IPP authentication
ALL
-
-
1464
Network
Samba server ON/OFF setting
ALL
1
NIC
1470
General
ALL
General
0 0
SYS
1471
Device authentication function setting User authentication method
1472
General
1473
General
1474
General
1476
Network
1477
1478
ALL
RAM
Contents
-
1: Disabled 2: Basic 3: Digest 4: Basic Digest This should be the account at the time IPP authentication was performed. This should be the password of the account at the time IPP authentication was performed. 1: Samba enabled 2: Samba disabled 3: Print Share disabled 4: File Share disabled 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Local 1: NTLM (NT Domain) 2: LDAP 3: Kerberos (Active Directory) 4: Netware 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
SYS
User data management automatic registration function setting User data management limitation setting User data management limitation Setting by number of printouts Restriction on Address book operation by administrator
ALL
0
SYS
ALL
0 0
SYS
ALL
0
SYS
Network
Restriction on "To" ("cc") address
ALL
0
SYS
User interface
Display of paper size setting by installation operation of drawers
ALL
JPN: 0 UC: 1
SYS
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
Procedure 12
12
12
12
1 1
1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0-9,999,999: 0-9,999,999 sheets
1
Some restrictions can be given on the administrator for operating the Address book. 0: No restriction 1: Can be operated only under the administrator's authorization 0: No restriction 1: Can be set from both of the Address book and LDAP server 2: Can be set only from the Address book 3: Can be set only from the LDAP server 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 138 05/11
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Default setting of sharpALL 5 ness
Contents
SYS
1: -4 2: -3 3: -2 4: -1 5: 0 6: +1 7: +2 8: +3 9: +4 All the user data in the database and backup files can be deleted. 0: Invalid 1: Valid * When this code is set to “1” (Valid), the department management setting (08-629) should be “1” (Valid). The data in the database is overwritten with the data in the backup file. 0: Disable 1: SMTP authentication 2: LDAP authentication 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted
1
0: "User name" + @ + "Domain name" 1: LDAP search 2: Use the address registered in "From" field of E-mail setting 0: Not permitted 1: Permitted 96+2 (delimiter) character ASCII sequence only 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
1479
User interface
1481
General
User data management clearing
ALL
-
-
1482
General
User data department management
ALL
0
SYS
1483
General
User data recovery
ALL
-
-
1484
Network
Authentication method of "Scan to Email"
ALL
0
SYS
1485
Network
ALL
0
SYS
1487
Network
Setting whether use of Internet FAX is permitted or not when it is given an authentication "From" address assignment method when it is given an authentication
ALL
0
SYS
1489
Network
ALL
0
SYS
1491
Network
Setting for "From" address edit at "Scan to Email" E-mail domain name
1492
Paper feeding
ALL
0
SYS
1493
Network
Detection method of 13" LG for single-size document Role Base Access Function
ALL
0
SYS
1494
General
Limitation check method
ALL
0
SYS
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
RAM
SYS
0: Function off (No restriction on data saving and other operations) 1: Function on (Data saving and other operations have some restrictions) 0: Checked at every page printed 1: Checked at every job printed
3 1
3
1 1
1 11 1 1
2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 139 06/09
2
Code
Classification
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 6
RAM
Contents
-
0: No checking period specified (= Calls service technician immediately) 0: 10 minutes 1: 30 minutes 3: 1 hour 4: 6 hours 5: 12 hours 6: 24 hours 7: 48 hours 8: 7 days 9: 1 month 10: 1 year 11: 5 years 12: Not limited (= Calls service technician if such error has occurred in the past even once or more) 0: Disables operation setting for User authentication/registration 1: Enables operation setting for User authentication/registration 0: Mode 1 1: Mode 2 2: Mode 3 0: OFF (Function disabled) 1: ON (Function enabled) The period of rotation time of the toner transport motor is counted. (1 count = 12 ms) 0: 0 1: 100 2: 200 3: 500 4: 1000 5: 1500 6: 2000 7: No limit i99999999) [Unit: Sheets]
1495
Maintenance
Service call checking period setting
1496
General
Operation setting for User authentication/registration
ALL
1
SYS
1497
Network
e-Filing Access Mode (for Client)
ALL
0
SYS
1498
FAX
Inbound FAX function (Forwarding by TSI)
FAX
1
SYS
1519
Counter
Counter for drive counts of toner transport motors
ALL
0
SYS
1520
User interface
Number of pages which can be printed when cover is opened during toner cartridge replacement
ALL
3
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure 12
1
1 1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 140 06/09
Code
Classification
1530-0
Counter
1530-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of 1-UP / PPC 0 output pages Duplex printing PPC 0 2-UP / Duplex printing
1530-2 1530-3 1530-4 1530-7 1533-0
Counter
1533-1
Number of output pages of the printer or BOX
1533-2 1533-3 1533-4 1533-5 1533-6 1533-7 1535-0 1535-7
Counter
Number of output pages of the FAX printing (1-UP / Duplex printing)
RAM
Contents
Procedure
SYS
Counts the number of output pages.
4
SYS
Counts the number of output pages using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets using [4IN1].
4
4
2-UP / Simplex printing 4-UP / Duplex printing 4-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Duplex printing 2-UP / Duplex printing
PPC
0
SYS
PPC
0
SYS
PPC
0
SYS
PPC
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages.
4
PRT
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages.
4
PRT
0
SYS
4
2-UP / Simplex printing 4-UP / Duplex printing 4-UP / Simplex printing N-UP / Duplex printing N-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Duplex printing 1-UP / Simplex printing
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. * When printing is performed using a Windows driver, the 1-UP image will be output. Counts the number of sheets using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets using [4IN1].
PRT
0
SYS
4
PRT
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets using [N IN1].
PRT
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages.
4
FAX
0
SYS
Counts the number of sheets in the default settings.
4
FAX
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
4 4
4 4 4
4
4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 141 06/09
2
Code 1660 1661 1662 1663
1664 1665 1666 1667
1668 1669 1670 1671 1672 1673 1674 1675 1676 1677 1678 1679
Classification
Items
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 1 ALL -
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Radio ON/OFF setting Wireless LAN driver SSID Wireless LAN driver Network type Wireless LAN driver Security
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Encryption system Wireless LAN driver Transmission output power
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Transmission rate Wireless LAN driver Transmission rate value
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN driver Operation channel Wireless LAN driver Operation channel value Wireless LAN driver WEP bit number Wireless LAN driver WEP key entry system Wireless LAN driver WEP key value Wireless LAN driver WPA-PSK passphrase Wireless LAN driver Sleep mode setting Wireless LAN driver Slot-time limitation Wireless LAN driver Number of times of software retry Wireless LAN driver Preamble Wireless LAN driver Operation mode Wireless LAN supplicant Wireless LAN setting
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL
ALL
1 4 1 1 1 1
RAM
Contents
-
1: OFF
-
Maximum 32 letters
12
-
1: Infrastructure 2: Ad-Hoc 1: 802.1x 2: WPA-PSK 3: WEP 4: NONE 5: WPA 6: WPA2 7: WPA2PSK 1: TKIP 2: AES 3: Dynamic WEP 1: 100% 2: 50% 3: 25% 4: 12.5% 5: min 1: Auto 2: Manual
12
-
-
12
12
12 12 12
2: 2 4: 11 6: 9 8: 18
12
2: Manual
12
ALL
1 1 1 2 -
ALL
-
-
Maximum 64 letters
12
ALL
1 1 5
-
1: Off 2: Max 3: Normal 1: Long 2: Short
12
ALL ALL ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1 1 1
-
1: 1 3: 5.5 5: 6 7: 12 9: 24 10: 36 11: 48 12: 54 1: Auto
2: ON
Procedure
-
12
-
1:64 3: 152 1: Hex
2: ASCII
12
-
Maximum 32 letters
12
-
2: 128
12
-
12
-
1: Long
-
1: All 2: 11b 3: 11g This setting is whether the wireless LAN connection is enabled or disabled. 1: Unset 2: Enabled 3: Disabled
-
12
2: Longshort
12 12 12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 142 07/11
Code 1681
Classification Wireless LAN
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Wireless LAN supplicant ALL Path name for client certificate
RAM
Contents
-
This should be the path name in full where the client certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the path name in full where the client certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the path name in full where the CA self-certificate is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the user name when the EAPTLS is used. This should be the user name when the PEAP is used. This should be the timeout interval between EAP responses. 30: 30 seconds The EAP authentication will start after having been waited in this period when an EAP failure was received. 60: 60 seconds When an EAPOL-Start packet has been sent and the request ID cannot be received, this EAPOL-Start packet will be re-sent for the number of times set in this code. 3: 3 times This setting is whether the pre-master key should be updated or not upon a TLS renegotiation. 1: Session is resumed 2: Session is not resumed This is a MAC frame size used in the wireless LAN connection. The data is fragmented into this size. 1398: 1398 bytes
1682
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for secret key of client certificate
ALL
-
-
1684
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for CA self-certificate
ALL
-
-
1685
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAP user name
ALL
-
-
1686
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAP user name
ALL
-
-
1689
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Authentication interval
ALL
30
-
1690
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Holding interval
ALL
60
M
1691
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAPOL-Start Number of times of packet retry
ALL
3
M
1692
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Session resume
ALL
2
-
1693
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant MAC Frame size
ALL
1398
-
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 12
2 12
12
12 12 12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 143 06/09
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Wireless LAN supplicant ALL /dev/ urandom Device file setting for obtaining random number
RAM
Contents
-
This should be the device file name which can obtain a seed to initialize the WEP PRNG for xsupplicant. (Maximum 255 letters) This should be the path name of the directory in full where the CRL file is located. (Maximum 255 letters) This setting is for the EAP authentication type which xsupplicant can authenticate. 1: EAP-TLS 2: PEAP 3: EAP-TLS and PEAP This should be an authentication server name (basically a domain name in full). (Maximum 255 letters) 1: NO 2: YES
1696
Wireless LAN
1697
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant CRL directory designation
ALL
-
-
1699
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant EAP authentication type
ALL
1
-
1700
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant CN name
ALL
-
-
1701
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant CN name check Wireless LAN supplicant Update interval of PTK (Pairwise Transient Key)
ALL
1 0
-
1705
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Strict packet check
ALL
1
-
1706
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Priority change at 4-way handshake
ALL
1
-
1707
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN supplicant Security level
ALL
1
-
1704
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
-
The update interval of a secret key across AP (Access Point) and STA (Station) can be set. This interval is for updating the secret key from STA. 0: Not updated 1-720: 1-720 minutes of interval The Ack bit and request bit of EAPOL-Key is checked. 1: Not checked 2: Checked A higher priority is given to the xsupplicant task when a 4-way handshake is started. 1: Priority not changed 2: Priority changed The encryption capability output in TLS clientHello message can be selected. 1: LOW 2: MIDDLE 3: HIGH
Procedure 12
12
12
12
12 12
12
12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 144
Code 1708
1709
Classification User interface
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Selectable security level ALL 1 (EAP-TLS)
Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth
Bluetooth Installation status of option Bluetooth ON/OFF setting Bluetooth Device name Bluetooth Discovery Bluetooth Security
1714
Bluetooth
Bluetooth PIN
1715
Bluetooth
1716
Bluetooth
1717
Bluetooth
1719
Bluetooth
1720
1721
1710 1711 1712 1713
ALL ALL ALL ALL
0 1 MFP
Procedure
RAM
Contents
-
These are the security level which can be selected from the user interface. This setting is not applied in case of PEAP. ("LOW" and "MIDDLE" is mandatory for PEAP) 1: LOW + MIDDLE + HIGH 2: MIDDLE + HIGH 3: HIGH 0: Not installed 1: Installed 0: OFF 1: ON Maximum 32 letters
12
1
SYS SYS SYS
2
1 1 11
1 1
SYS
ALL
0000
SYS
Bluetooth Data encryption
ALL
1 >
SYS
Bluetooth HCRP reception time-out period Bluetooth HCRP transmission timeout period Bluetooth BIP Paper type
ALL
6
SYS
0: Not allowed 1: Allowed 0: Security function OFF 1: Security function ON Maximum 8 digits (8-digit sequence) This setting is valid only when the bluetooth security function is ON. 0: Not encrypted 1: Encrypted This setting is valid only when the bluetooth security function is ON. Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
ALL
6
SYS
Setting value ~ 0.5 sec.
1
ALL
0
SYS
1
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 1)
ALL
-
-
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 1)
ALL
-
-
0: Fit page 1: 1/2 size 2: 1/4 size 3: 1/8 size IP filter minimum area 1 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 1 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
1
11
1
1
12
12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 145 06/09
Setting mode (08) Default Func- IP address range for IP filALL ter I (Minimum area 2)
Code
Classification
1722
Network
1723
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 2)
ALL
-
-
1724
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 3)
ALL
-
-
1725
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 3)
ALL
-
-
1726
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 4)
ALL
-
-
1727
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 4)
ALL
-
-
1728
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 5)
ALL
-
-
1729
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 5)
ALL
-
-
1730
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 6)
ALL
-
-
1731
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 6)
ALL
-
-
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
-
IP filter minimum area 2 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 2 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 3 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 3 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 4 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 4 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 5 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 5 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 6 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 6 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)
Procedure 12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 146 06/09
Code
Classification
1732
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- IP address range for IP filALL ter (Minimum area 7)
RAM
Contents
-
IP filter minimum area 7 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 7 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 8 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 8 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 9 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 9 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter minimum area 10 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) IP filter maximum area 10 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled
Procedure 12
2
1733
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 7)
ALL
-
-
1734
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 8)
ALL
-
-
1735
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 8)
ALL
-
-
1736
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 9)
ALL
-
-
1737
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 9)
ALL
-
-
1738
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 10)
ALL
-
-
1739
Network
IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 10)
ALL
-
-
1740
Network
ALL
2
-
1741
Network
SSL setting HTTP server OFF/ON setting SSL setting HTTP server port number
ALL
-
SSL HTTP server port number
12
1742
Network
-
Network
1: Enabled 2: Disabled SSL IPP server port number
12
1743
10443 2 443
SSL setting IPP server OFF/ON setting SSL setting IPP server port number
ALL ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
-
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 147 06/09
Setting mode (08) Default Func- SSL setting ALL 2 SSL ftp server OFF/ON
Code
Classification
1744
Network
1745
Network
SSL setting SSL ftp server Port
ALL
1746
Network
SSL setting SSL LDAP Client OFF/ON
ALL
1747
Network
SSL setting SSL LDAP Client Port
ALL
1748
Network
SSL setting SSL POP3 Client OFF/ON
ALL
1749
Network
SSL setting SSL POP3 Client Port
ALL
1750
Network
SSL setting SSL SMTP Client OFF/ON
ALL
1751
Network
SSL setting SSL SMTP Client Port
ALL
1755
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
1756
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
990 2
636 2
RAM -
-
995 2
-
465 2
-
2
-
-
-
Contents
Procedure
OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid Port number to FTP Server
12
OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid 3: Use imported certificate Port number to LDAP Server
12
OFF/ON 1: Valid 2: Invalid 3: Use imported certificate Port number to POP3 Server
12
2: Invalid 3: Accept all certificates of SMTP with TLS (STARTTLS) server 4: Accept all certificates of SMTPS (SMTP OverSSL) server 5: Use imported certificates of SMTP with TLS (STARTTLS) server 6: Use imported certificates of SMTPS (SMTP OverSSL) server Port number to SMTP Server
12
Domain Name Server option (6) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server option (44) = Primary and Secondary Wins NAME 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled.
12
12
12
12
12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 148 06/09
Code
Classification
1757
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Enabling server's IP ALL 1 address acquired by DHCP
Procedure
RAM
Contents
-
12
12
1759
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
-
1760
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
-
1762
Network
Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
ALL
2
-
1764
Wireless LAN
ALL
-
-
1765
Wireless LAN
ALL
-
-
Maximum 63 letters
12
1766
Wireless LAN
ALL
-
-
Maximum 63 letters
12
1767
Network
Wireless LAN supplicant Control sequence setting of "Cipher Suite" Wireless LAN supplicant Path name for user certificate Wireless LAN supplicant Path name entered for CA self-certificate Enabling server's IP address acquired by DHCP
The Host Name Vendor Extension option (12) 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. SMTP Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. SNTP Server Option (42) NTP Server Address 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. Maximum 255 letters
ALL
2
SYS
12
1768
Network
Previous IP address
ALL
-
-
DNS domain name Option (15) DNS domain name of the client 1: Enabled 2: Disabled * This value is used only when DHCP is enabled. 000.000.000.000255.255.255.255 (Default value: 000.000.000.000)
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2
12
12
12
12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 149 07/04
Code
Classification
1772
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Card reading device setALL 0 ting
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
To enable the e-Bridge ID Gate, a card reading device should be set in the order of "ABYYZZZZ". (Enter the corresponding values to "A", "B", "YY" and "ZZZZ".) - AB:Special setting - A :Debugging NIC 0: Not used 1: Used - B :Interface 0: USB connection 1: N/A - YY: Authentication 00: No authentication using a noncontact IC card 02: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2003) 03: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2005) 04: Authentication using a noncontact IC card (KP-2004) - ZZZZ: Sub-code 0000: No authentication using a noncontact IC card 0001: Use CSN (Card Serial Number) of a noncontact IC card 0002: Use the Data Area Address Information of a noncontact IC card
Procedure 5
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 150 07/04
Code
Classification
1773
General
1774
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Card reader format inforALL mation -1
Card reader format information -2
ALL
-
RAM
Contents
SYS
To access the data in the noncontact IC card, the Key Information "LLLL" and the Sector Number "MMMM" should be set. The "LLLL" should be set first, and then "MMMM". KP-2003: LLLL: System code (hexadecimal number) MMMM: Service code (hexadecimal number)
SYS
KP-2005: LLLL : Key information MMMM: Sector number (hexadecimal number) The data of the block number in the noncontact IC is set. KP-2003: PP:1st block Q: 1st block beginning byte R: 1st block endingbyte SS:2nd block T: 2nd block beginning byte U: 2nd block ending byte
Procedure 5
2
5
KP-2005: RR:00 (Fixed) B: 1st area block number S: 1st area beginning byte offset E: 1st area ending byte offset b: 2nd area block number s: 2nd area beginning byte offset e: 2nd area ending byte offset * If the 2nd block/area is not used, set the SSTU to "FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the bse to"FFF" (hexadecimal number).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 151 07/04
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Card reader format inforALL mation -3
Code
Classification
1775
General
1776
General
Card authentication LDAP server
ALL
0
SYS
1777
General
Card authentication LDAP search index
ALL
-
SYS
1778
General
Hang-up period of control panel at the 3rd misentry of administrator's password
ALL
1
SYS
1779
Network
Default data saving directory of "Scan to File"
ALL
0
SYS
1781-0
Network
Notification of scan job
ALL
SYS
1781-1
Network
0 0
1782
Network
When job completed On error
File name format of "Save as file" and Email transmission
ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
0
RAM
Contents
SYS
Security key “KKKKKKKKKKKK” (12 digits) in the [Key Information] of the [Sector Number] set in the code 08-1773 should be entered. LDAP server number for the card authentication when a noncontact IC card is used should be set. LDAP search index when a noncontact IC card is used is set. 0: No hang-up 1: 0.5 minutes (= 30 seconds) 2: 1 minute 3: 3 minutes 4: 5 minutes 5: 10 minutes 6: 15 minutes 7: 30 minutes 0: Local directory 1: REMOTE 1 2: REMOTE 2 Sets the notification method of scan job completion. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Sets the naming method of the file of "Save as file" and Email transmission. 0: [FileName]-[Data][Page] 1: [FileName]-[Page][Data] 2: [Data]-[FileName][Page] 3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName] 4: [Page]-[FileName][Data] 5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName] 6: [HostName]_[Data][Page]
SYS SYS
Procedure 5
1
11 1
1 4 4 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 152 06/09
Code
Classification
1783
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Date display format of the ALL 0 file name of "Save as file" and Email transmission
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets the data display format of the file of "Save as file" and Email transmission. 0: [YYYY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS] 1: [YY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS] 2: [YYYY][MM][DD] 3: [YY][MM][DD] 4: [HH][mm][SS] 5: [YYYY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS][mm0] The order of [YY], [MM] and [DD] varies depending on the setting of the code 08-640 (Data display format). Sets the directory where the file of "Save as file" is saved. 0: Save it under a subfolder 1: Save it without creating a subfolder Sets the digit of a page number attached on the file. 4-6: 4-6 digits Sets the extension digits of the file to be saved. 3: Auto 4: 4 digits 5: 5 digits 6: 6 digits 0: 140°C 1: 145°C 2: 150°C 3: 155°C 4: 160°C 5: 165°C 6: 170°C 7: 175°C 8: 180°C 9: 185°C 10: 190°C 11: 195°C 12: 200°C 13: 205°C 14: 210°C Unit: Second
1
2
1
1784
Network
Single page data saving directory at "Save as file"
ALL
0
SYS
1785
Network
ALL
4
SYS
1786
Network
Page number display format of the file of "Save as file" and Email transmission Extension (suffix) format of the file of "Save as file"
ALL
3
SYS
1804
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (OHP film)
ALL
12
M
1808
Image quality control
ALL
10
M
1809
Image quality control Image quality control
Developer unit prerunning period before image quality closed-loop control Image quality closed-loop control (Contrast voltage) Image quality closed-loop control (Laser power)
ALL
0
M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
ALL
0
M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
1810
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 153 06/09
Code 1811 1812
1813 1814
Classification Image quality control Image quality control Image quality control Image quality control
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Image quality open-loop ALL 0 control
RAM M
Contents 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Procedure 1
Drum surface potential sensor Counter for number of control abnormality Drum surface potential sensor Control setting Maximum number of times of image quality closedloop control correction (Contrast voltage)
ALL
0
M
ALL
0
M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
ALL
5
M
The maximum number of correction which the image quality closedloop control (contrast voltage) can be performed is set. The maximum number of correction which the image quality closedloop control (laser power) can be performed is set. The upper limit of the developer contrast voltage control is set. [Unit: V] The lower limit of the developer contrast voltage control is set. [Unit: V] The upper limit of the laser power control is set. [Unit: µW] e-STUDIO520/523: 1020 e-STUDIO600/603: 1020 e-STUDIO720/723: 1020 e-STUDIO850/853: 610 The lower limit of the laser power control is set. [Unit: µW] e-STUDIO520/523: 600 e-STUDIO600/603: 600 e-STUDIO720/723: 600 e-STUDIO850/853: 270 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
1815
Image quality control
Maximum number of times of image quality closedloop control correction (Laser power)
ALL
4
M
1820
Image quality control
Contrast voltage upper limiter
ALL
535
M
1821
Image quality control
Contrast voltage lower limiter
ALL
190
M
1824
Image quality control
Exposure amount (laser power) upper limiter setting
ALL
Refer to contents
M
1825
Image quality control
Exposure amount (laser power) lower limiter setting
ALL
Refer to contents
M
1826
Image quality control
Image quality control autostart setting (When power is turned ON first in a day)
ALL
0
M
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 154 07/11
Code 1827
Classification Image quality control
1828
Image quality control
1829
Image quality control
1830
Image quality control
1831
Image quality control
1833
Image quality control
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0 Image quality control auto start setting (Specified number of sheets for auto-start have been printed from the start of previous image quality control) Image quality control autoALL 0 start setting (Specified period of time for auto-start has passed) Image quality control autoALL 0 start setting (When recovered from toner-empty status) ALL 0 Image quality control auto start setting (Specified number of sheets have been printed from first image quality control start in a day or warming-up recovery) Condition setting of image ALL 6 quality control auto-start (Fuser unit temperature at power-ON)
Contrast voltage offset correction setting
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Refer to contents
RAM M
Contents 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
Procedure 1
2 M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
M
0: Enabled 1: Disabled
1
M
0: 30°C 1: 35°C 2: 40°C 3: 45°C 4: 50°C 5: 55°C 6: 60°C 7: 65°C 8: 70°C 9: 75°C 10: 80°C 11: 85°C 12: 90°C 13: 95°C 14: 100°C 15: 105°C 16: 110°C 17: 115°C 18: 120°C 19: 125°C 20: 130°C 0: -100 1: -80 2: -60 3: -40 4: -20 5: ±0 6: +20 7: +40 8: +60 9: +80 10: +100 [Unit: V] e-STUDIO520/523 UC, EUR: 6 e-STUDIO600/603 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 6 e-STUDIO720/723 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 6 e-STUDIO850/853 JPN: 5 UC, EUR: 6
1
M
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 155 07/11
Code
Classification
1834
Image quality control
1835
Image quality control
1836 1837 1900-0
RAM M
Contents 0: -50 1: -40 2: -30 3: -20 4: -10 5:±0 6: +10 7: +20 8: +30 9: +40 10: +50 0: -150 1: -120 2: -90 3: -60 4: -30 5: ±0 6: +30 7: +60 8: +90 9: +120 10: +150 e-STUDIO520/523: 5 e-STUDIO600/603: 5 e-STUDIO720/723: 5 e-STUDIO850/853: 5 (6 for NAD only) 0: Disabled 1-255: 1-255 sec. 0: Control OFF 1: Table 1 applied 2: Table 2 applied
Procedure 1
1
Laser power offset correction setting
ALL
Refer to contents
M
Process
Drum pre-running period
ALL
M
Image quality control Paper feeding
Transfer output correction control switching against surface potential Feeding retry Plain counter paper (Option LCF) Others
ALL
0 0 5 5 0 0 0 0
M
4
M
4
1900-1 1901
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Background potential offset ALL 5 correction setting
1907
Paper feeding General
1908
General
1909
Paper feeding
Reversing speed switching for thick paper IH error data at occurrence of errors Function for Taiwan's Green Mark Program Paper feeding timing correction setting
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
M
M
0: Accelerated 1: Low speed
M M M
1 1
1 1
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Setting value X 10msec
1 1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 156 07/11
Code 1910
Classification Image quality control
Items Toner supply opening upward control
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0
RAM
Contents
M
0: Always ON 1: Performs the toner supply opening upward control only when the available number of outputs using the remaining toner is between 2,000 and 5,000 sheets. (However, if the value "0" (OFF) is set at 08-1415, the operation will be the same as when the value "2" (Always OFF) is set in this setting.) 2: Always OFF * When in the toner empty status, the toner supply opening upward control is always performed regardless of this setting.
Procedure 1
2
Page number addition on multipage file names of "File/Email" Maximum number of decimals in extension fields
ALL
0
SYS
ALL
2
SYS
Network
Filing size for Network scanning function
ALL
0
SYS
1916
General
ALL
Network
ALL
0 -
SYS
1920
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
1921
Network
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
1922
Network
ALL
-
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
1923
Network
ALL
1925
Network
1: Windows Server 2: Not Windows Server Sets a user attribute name. 0: Forcible execution 1: Execution impossible (pooled in the invalid queue) 2: Forcible deletion
12
Network
1 -
NIC
1924
Default saving/attachment files of "File/Email" Device domain name of device authentication Windows domain No. 2 of user authentication Windows domain No. 3 of user authentication LDAP authentication Server type LDAP authentication User attribute Execution of user authentication when the user ID is not entered
1913
General
1914
General
1915
ALL ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2
NIC SYS
1 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 0:
0 digit 1 digit 2 digits 3 digits 4 digits 5 digits 6 digits Eliminates 2 mm from circumference (Void: 2 mm) 1: No space eliminated (Void: 0 mm)
1
1
1
12 1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 157 07/04
Code
Classification
1926
FAX
1927
Network
1928
Network
1929
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Tab/cover sheet printing at ALL 0 FAX reception Printing stop function
RAM
Contents
SYS
Sets on or off of the printing function of special sheets such as tab or cover sheet of FAX, Email or list print. 0: Function off 1: Function on Up to 32 letters
LDAP server attribute name setting for card authentication Role Based Access LDAP search index
ALL
eBMUser Card
SYS
ALL
SYS
User interface
Key arrangement for language 1
ALL
0 0
1930
User interface
Key arrangement for language 2
ALL
1
SYS
1931
User interface
Key arrangement for language 3
ALL
SYS
1932
User interface
Key arrangement for language 4
ALL
EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 0
1933
User interface
Key arrangement for language 5
ALL
0
SYS
1934
User interface
Key arrangement for language 6
ALL
0
SYS
1935
User interface
Key arrangement for language 7
ALL
0
SYS
1936
Network
AppleTalk Device Name
ALL
MFP_seri al
UTY
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SYS
SYS
Procedure 1
11 5
0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout 0: QWERTY layout (for EUR) 1: QWERTZ layout 2: AZERTY layout Maximum 32 letters The Network-related serial number of the equipment appears at "Serial".
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 158 07/04
Code
Classification
1937
Network
Setting mode (08) Default Func- User name and password ALL 0 at user authentication or "Save as file"
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: User name and password of the device 1: User name and password at the user authentication (Template registration information comes first when a template is retrieved.) 2: User name and password at the user authentication (User information of the authentication comes first when a template is retrieved.) Use this setting to reformat the specific partition whose file system has been changed in Ver.2, at the version up/ downgrade of the SYS ROM. No reformatting process shall be used in any cases other than this version change. 0: Waiting (No reformatting) 1: dosFs to catFs (Version upgrade from Ver.1 to Ver.2 or later) 2: catFs to dosFs (Version downgrade from Ver.2 or later to Ver.1) Port number used for the remote scanning is set. 0: Ledger 1: Legal 2: Letter 3: Computer 4: Statement 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: Folio 12: Legal13" 13: LetterSquare 1: Auto 2: Valid 3: Invalid 1: Auto 2: Valid 3: Invalid Maximum 128 letters
1938
General
Reformatting process due to a version change of SYS ROM
ALL
2
-
1940
General
STAGE port number
SCN
SYS
1941
Bluetooth
Bluetooth BIP Paper size
ALL
20080 EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6
1950
Network
SMB signature for SMB server
ALL
1
UTY
1951
Network
SMB signature for SMB client
ALL
1
UTY
1952
Network
Device name for device authentication
ALL
-
UTY
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
Procedure 1
2
7
1 1
12 12 12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 159 06/09
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Password for the device ALL name used for device authentication PDC2 of user authenticaALL tion BDC2 of user authenticaALL tion PDC3 of user authenticaALL tion BDC3 of user authenticaALL tion PDC of device authenticaALL tion BDC of device authenticaALL tion KS Filter operation mode ALL 0 KS/KSSM setting all clearALL ing
Code
Classification
1953
Network
1954
Network
1955
Network
1956
Network
1957
Network
1958
Network
1959
Network
1960
General
1961
General
1963
General
KS Filter Emulation Mode
ALL
0
SYS
1964
General
KS Filter Paper Size
ALL
1
SYS
1965
General
KS Filter Orientation
ALL
SYS
1966
General
KS Filter Copies
ALL
1967
General
KS Paper Source
ALL
1968
General
KS Duplex Mode
ALL
1970
General
KS CPI (English CPI/ Hangle CPI)
ALL
0 1 0 0 1
1971
General
KS LPI
ALL
60
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
Procedure
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
UTY
Maximum 128 letters
12
SYS
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Does not reset the value of the code 081960 but resets those of the codes 08-1963 to 1994. 0: Auto 1: KS 2: KSSM 0: A3 1: A4 2: B4 3: B5 4: Letter 5: Legal 0: Portrait 1: Landscape
1
-
3
1 1
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
1
SYS
0: (5/10) 1: (6/12) 2: (6.7/13.3) 3: (6.9/13.8) 4: (7.5/15) 5: (8.3/16.7) 6: (9/18) 7: (10/10) 8: (10/20) 9: (12/24) 10: (15/30) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "45" for a font size 4.5.)
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 160 06/09
Code
Classification
1972
General
Items KS Type Face
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: MYUNGJO 1: GOTHIC 2: GUNGSEO 3: GULLIM 4: GRAPH 5: SAMMUL Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "100" for a font size 10.0.)
1973
General
KS Font Size
ALL
96
SYS
1974
General
KS Zoom
ALL
SYS
1975
General
KS CR/LF Mode
ALL
100 2
1976
General
KS Top Margin
ALL
0
SYS
1977
General
KS Left Margin
ALL
0
SYS
1978
General
KS Auto Wrap
ALL
SYS
1979
General
KS Han Mode
ALL
1980
General
KS Han Code
ALL
1984
General
KSSM CPI (English CPI/ Hangle CPI)
ALL
0 1 0 1
1985
General
KSSM LPI
ALL
60
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedure 1
2 1
1 0: CR->CR, LF->LF 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Wansung 1: Johap 0: (5/10) 1: (6/12) 2: (6.7/13.3) 3: (6.9/13.8) 4: (7.5/15) 5: (8.3/16.7) 6: (9/18) 7: (10/10) 8: (10/20) 9: (12/24) 10: (15/30) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "45" for a font size 4.5.)
1
1
1
1 1 1 1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 161 07/04
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0
Code
Classification
1986
General
KSSM Type Face
1987
General
KSSM Font Size
ALL
96
SYS
1988
General
KSSM Zoom
ALL
SYS
1989
General
KSSM CR/LF Mode
ALL
100 2
1990
General
KSSM Top Margin
ALL
0
SYS
1991
General
KSSM Left Margin
ALL
0
SYS
1992
General
KSSM Auto Wrap
ALL
SYS
1993
General
KSSM Han Mode
ALL
1994
General
KSSM Han Code
ALL
3506
General
"Attribute 1" indicated in the LDAP search result
ALL
0 1 0 company
3507
General
"Attribute 2" indicated in the LDAP search result
ALL
department
SYS
3722
Network
ALL
60
NIC
3723
Network
ALL
30
NIC
Applied to the user authentication
12
3724
Network
ALL
1
NIC
1: Auto 2: Kerberos 3: NTLMv2
12
3725
Network
Device authentication PDC/BDC time-out period (Unit: Seconds) User authentication PDC/ BDC time-out period (Unit: Seconds) Windows domain authentication of device/user authentication IPP max connection
ALL
16
NIC
Items
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
0: MYUNGJO 1: GOTHIC 2: GUNGSEO 3: GULLIM 4: GRAPH 5: SAMMUL Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "100" for a font size 10.0.)
SYS
SYS SYS SYS
Procedure 1
1
1 0: CR->CR, LF->LF 1: CR->CR+LF, LF->LF 2: CR->CR, LF->CR+LF 3: CR->CR+LF, LF->CR+LF Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) Key in the value 10 times as the desired font size. (e.g.: Key in "40" for a font size 4.0.) 0: OFF 1: ON 0: OFF 1: ON 0: Wansung 1: Johap Attribute name for "Attribute 1" indicated in the LDAP search result list Attribute name for "attribute 2" indicated in the LDAP search result list Applied to the device authentication
1
1
1
1 1 1 11
11
12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 162 07/04
Setting mode (08) Default Func- IPP active connection ALL 10 LPD max connection ALL 10 LPD active connection ALL 10 ATalk PS max Connection ALL 10 ATalk PS active ConnecALL 10 tion Raw TCP max connection ALL 10 Raw TCP active connecALL 10 tion DNS Client Time Out ALL 60
Code
Classification
3726
Network
3727
Network
3728
Network
3729
Network
3730
Network
3731
Network
3732
Network
3736
Network
3737
Network
DDNS Client Time Out
ALL
60
NIC
3738
Network
HTTP Client Time Out
ALL
60
NIC
3739
Network
FTP Client Time Out (SCAN)
ALL
30
NIC
3740
Network
SNTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC
3741
Network
SMTP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC
3742
Network
POP3 Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC
3743
Network
LDAP Client Time Out
ALL
30
NIC
3744
Network
POP3 Authentication method
ALL
1
NIC
3745
General
ALL
General
NIC
3746
Secure DDNS Primary Login Name Secure DDNS Primary Login Password
3747
General
Secure DDNS Secondary Login Name
ALL
NIC
3748
General
Secure DDNS Secondary Login Password
ALL
NIC
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM
Contents
Procedure
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
12
NIC
NIC
Use when a timeout occurred at DNS client connection Use when a timeout occurred at DDNS client connection Use when a timeout occurred at HTTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at FTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at SNTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at SMTP client connection Use when a timeout occurred at POP3 client connection Use when a timeout occurred at LDAP client connection POP3 authentication method setting 1: Disable (Default) 2: NTLM 3: Kerberos Login name for login with the Primary DDNS Login password for login with the Primary DDNS Login name for login with the Secondary DDNS Login password for login with the Secondary DDNS
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
12 12 12 12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 163 07/04
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL -
Code
Classification
3749
General
DPWS Friendly Name
3750
General
DPWS Printer Name
ALL
-
NIC
3751
General
DPWS Scanner Name
ALL
-
NIC
3752
General
DPWS Printer Information
ALL
-
NIC
3753
General
DPWS Scanner Information
ALL
-
NIC
3754
Network
Switching DPWS Printer setting
ALL
1
NIC
3755
Network
Switching DPWS Scanner setting
ALL
1
NIC
3756
Network
Switching DPWS Security setting
ALL
1
NIC
3757
Network
DPWS Discovery Port Number
ALL
NIC
3758
Network
DPWS Metadata Exchange Port Number
ALL
3759
Network
DPWS Print Port Number
ALL
3760
Network
DPWS Scan Port Number
ALL
3761
Network
DPWS Security Discovery Port Number
ALL
3702 5081 5082 5083 3702
Items
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
NIC
MFP name indicated in DPWS search result TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx [NIC serial number] Printer name used for installing the printer with DPWS TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Printer[NIC serial number] Scanner name used for installing the printer with DPWS TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx Scanner[NIC serial number] Information regarding DPWS printer NULL Information regarding DPWS scanner NULL DPWS printer /DPWS secure printer function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled 3: Security enabled DPWS scanner function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled DPWS security function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Port number used for DPWS Discovery
NIC NIC
Port number used for DPWS Metadata Exchange Port number used for DPWS Print
Procedure 12
12
12
12 12 12
12
12
12 12 12
NIC
Port number used for DPWS Scan
12
NIC
Port number used for DPWS Security Discovery
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 164 07/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- DPWS Security Metadata ALL 5084 Exchange Port Number DPWS Security Print Port ALL 5085 Number DPWS Security Scan Port ALL 5086 Number DPWS Print Max numbers ALL 10 of connection
Code
Classification
3762
Network
3763
Network
3764
Network
3765
Network
3766
Network
DPWS Print Max numbers of reception
ALL
10
NIC
3767
Network
Switching IPv6 setting
ALL
2
NIC
3768
Network
Switching IP(IPv6) Address Acquisition
ALL
2
NIC
3769
Network
Link Local Address
ALL
NIC
3770
Network
IPv6 Address
ALL
0
NIC
3771
Network
Prefix display setting
ALL
NIC
3772
Network
Default Gateway setting
ALL
0 0
3773
Network
ALL
3774
Network
Displaying previous DHCPv6 Address DHCPv6 Option setting
3775
Network
Stateless Address Auto Configuration
ALL
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
RAM NIC NIC
Contents Port number used for DPWS Security Metadata Exchange Port number used for DPWS Security Print
Procedure 12 12
NIC
Port number used for DPWS Security Scan
12
NIC
Maximum numbers received from more than one connection request in the DPWS print Maximum numbers of data received from more than one clients in the DPWS print IPv6 function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled IP(IPv6) Address Acquisition setting is switched. 1: Manual 2: Auto configuration Link Local Address is displayed. Unique IP address (128 bits) is set using Mac address. DHCPv6 Address in Manual/Auto configuration is displayed. The range of Prefix display is set. Default Gateway of DHCPv6 Address in Manual/Auto configuration is set. The previous DHCPv6 Address is displayed. DHCPv6 Option is switched when the Manual is set. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Stateless Address Auto Configuration is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled
12
NIC
0 2
NIC
1
NIC
NIC
12
12
12
12
12 12 12
12 12
12
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 165 07/04
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Stateless Address setting ALL 2 continuation
Code
Classification
3776
Network
3777
Network
Stateless Address setting
ALL
2
NIC
3778
Network
Acquiring DHCPv6 Option
ALL
2
NIC
3779
Network
State full Address setting
ALL
2
NIC
3780
Network
State full Option setting
ALL
2
NIC
3781
Network
ALL
Network
0 0
NIC
3782
Primary DNS Server Address Registration Secondary DNS Server Address Registration
3783
Network
Selecting SAMBA Protocol
ALL
2
NIC
3784
Network
DSN Server resolve type
ALL
4
NIC
3785
Network
DPWS IPv4 or IPv4 with IPv6
ALL
2
NIC
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
NIC
When Prefix sent from router is changed, Stateless Address is continued to be set. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled IP Address is acquired by both Stateless and State full Address. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled When Stateless Address is selected, an option is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled IP Address is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled An option is acquired from DHCPv6 server. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Registration of Primary DNS Server Address Registration of Secondary DNS Server Address Either IPv6 or IPv4 is selected to use SAMBA. 2: IPv6 3: IPv4 Either "ip6.arpa" or "ip6.int" is selected for the name resolution in DNS. 1: "ip6.arpa" only 2: "ip6.int" only 3: In case of error with "ip6.int", "ip6.arpa" is requested. 4: In case of error with “ip6.arpa”, “ip6.int” is requested. Either IPv4 only or IPv6 together with it is selected to operate Print, Scan and Security related with DPWS. 1: Multi (IPv4 and IPv6) 2: IPv4
NIC
Procedure 12
12
12
12
12
12 12 12
12
12
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 166 07/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Switching LLTD setting ALL 1
Code
Classification
3793
Network
3794
Network
Switching LLMNR setting
ALL
2
NIC
3804
Scanner
List Analysis Logic of Scan to File (FTP)
ALL
0
SYS
3805
Scanner
Department Management setting by Remote Scan
ALL
0
SYS
3810
Network
Direct SMTP communication setting
ALL
0
SYS
RAM
Contents
NIC
LLTD function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled LLMNR function is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled Acquisition of Contents in Host side is switched by Scan to File (FTP). 0: NLST 1: LIST Department Management is set when Remote Scan is performed. 0: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI OFF 1: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI OFF 2: w/o GUI OFF, w/ GUI ON 3: w/o GUI ON, w/ GUI ON When an Internet Fax is sent, Direct SMTP communication is set. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Procedure 12
12
1
1
1
When "0: Disabled" is set, an Internet Fax is sent using an SMTP server.
3811
Network
Image encrypting at the Direct SMTP communication
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
0
SYS
When "1: Enabled" is set, direct SMTP communication is enabled and an Internet Fax is sent to MFPs on the intranet without using an SMTP server. Since no SMTP server is used, the SSL encryption and SMTP-AUTH function cannot be used for internet Fax transmission. If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in 08-3812 as well. When Direct SMTP communication is performed, an attached image is encrypted. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 167 07/11
2
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Dummy full mode at the ALL 0 Internet Fax transmission
Code
Classification
3812
Scanner
3815
Scanner
XPS file thumbnail addition
ALL
1
SYS
3816
Scanner
XPS file paper size setting
ALL
1
SYS
3817
Scanner
PDF file version setting
ALL
0
SYS
3818
Scanner
DPWS Scan operation mode
ALL
1
SYS
3819
General
Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (STD)
ALL
2
SYS
3820
General
Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (FINE)
ALL
0
SYS
3821
General
Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE)
ALL
0
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
When an Internet Fax is sent, the resolution ratio and the paper size of an attached image are set to the full mode. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled If "1: Enabled" is set in 08-3810, set "1: Enabled" in 08-3812 as well. Thumbnail is added to the XPS file produced by the Scan function. 0: Not added 1: Only the top page added The paper size of the XPS file produced by the Scan function is set. 0: Scanned image size 1: Standard size The version of PDF file produced by the Scan function is set. 0: PDF V1.3 1: PDF V1.4 The operation mode in the DPWS Scan function is switched. 0: Batch type 1: Serial type The processing mode of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality The processing mode of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality The processing mode of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 168 07/04
Code
Classification
3822
General
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Network Fax/Internet Fax ALL 0 processing mode (U-FINE)
RAM
Contents
SYS
The processing mode of the network Fax/ Internet Fax is switched. 0: High speed/Low image quality 1: Standard 2: Low speed/High image quality Image quality adjustment when "Standard" is set for the Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (STD) Image quality adjustment when "Standard" is set for the Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (FINE) Image quality adjustment when "Standard" is set for the Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE) Image quality adjustment when "Standard" is set for the Network Fax/Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE) Image quality adjustment when "Low speed/ High image quality" is set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (STD) Image quality adjustment when "Low speed/ High image quality" is set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (FINE) Image quality adjustment when "Low speed/ High image quality" is set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (S-FINE) Image quality adjustment when "Low speed/ High image quality" is set for the Network Fax/ Internet Fax processing mode (U-FINE) 0: Require eBMUserRole attribute 1: User available LDAP attribute
3823
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (STD) [Standard]
ALL
254
SYS
3824
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (FINE) [Standard]
ALL
254
SYS
3825
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (S-FINE) [Standard]
ALL
180
SYS
3826
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (U-FINE) [Standard]
ALL
180
SYS
3827
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (STD) [Low speed/ High image quality]
ALL
200
SYS
3828
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (FINE) [Low speed/High image quality]
ALL
204
SYS
3829
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (S-FINE) [Low speed/High image quality]
ALL
206
SYS
3830
General
Processing mode threshold for network Fax/Internet Fax (U-FINE) [Low speed/High image quality]
ALL
161
SYS
3831
Network
Mode switching for Role Based Access Control function
ALL
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 169 07/04
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Home directory function ALL 0
Code
Classification
3833
General
3834
General
Backup file encryption
ALL
0
SYS
3837
General
Display switching for the machine name/computer name shown in the notification
ALL
0
SYS
3840
General
Electronic License Key Registration
ALL
-
-
3841
General
Electronic License Key Deletion
ALL
-
-
3842
General
Electronic License Key Display
ALL
-
-
3845
Network
SNMP Trap Enterprise OID mode setting
ALL
0
SYS
3847
FAX
FAX mistransmission prevention
FAX
0
SYS
3848
FAX
Restriction on Address Book destination setting
FAX
0
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Function to store a file in the user's home directory 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When the backup file is created from TopAccess, it is encrypted. 0: Enabled (Encryption) 1: Disabled (No encryption) The display method of the machine name/ computer name shown in the event-related notification is switched. 0: IP address 1: NetBIOS name/ FGDN Licenses for Electronic License Key are registered. Registered licenses for Electronic License Key are deleted. All licenses stored in the ELK jig are displayed. Trap Enterprise OID is enabled for existing models. 0: Normal (Not enabling for existing models) 1: Enabled for existing models FAX mistransmission prevention function is switched. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) Availability of destination selection from the Address Book is switched as one of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX destinations. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled)
Procedure 1
1
1
3 3 3 1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 170 07/11
Code
Classification
3849
FAX
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Restriction on destination 0 FAX direct entry
RAM
Contents
SYS
Availability of direct entry is switched as one of FAX mistransmission prevention functions when setting FAX destinations. 0: OFF (Disabled) 1: ON (Enabled) User authentication on Remote Scan driver is switched according to the availability of GUI. 0: OFF (No GUI) / OFF (GUI installed) 1: ON (No GUI) / OFF (GUI installed) 2: OFF (No GUI) / ON (GUI installed) 3: ON (No GUI) / ON (GUI installed) The order of displaying templates on the LCD screen is switched. 0: Order of IDs 1: Alphabetical order Automatic summer time change on the day previously set is switched. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Summer time is started as follows when 083852 is enabled. 0: +2:00 1: +1:30 2: +1:00 3: +0:30 4: -0:30 5: -1:00 6: -1:30 7: -2:00 The month in which summer time is started is set. 1: January 2: February 3: March 4: April 5: May 6: June 7: July 8: August 9: September 10: October 11: November 12: December
3850
General
Remote Scan User authentication
ALL
0
SYS
3851
User interface
Template display
ALL
0
SYS
3852
General
Automatic summer time change
ALL
0
SYS
3853
General
Summer time mode Offset value
ALL
0
SYS
3854
General
Summer time mode Starting month
ALL
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 1
2
1
1
1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 171 07/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 1
Code
Classification
3855
General
Summer time mode Starting week
3856
General
Summer time mode Starting day
ALL
0
SYS
3857
General
Summer time mode Starting time
ALL
0
SYS
3858
General
Summer time mode Starting minute
ALL
0
SYS
3859
General
Summer time mode Ending month
ALL
1
SYS
3860
General
Summer time mode Ending week
ALL
1
SYS
3861
General
Summer time mode Ending day
ALL
0
SYS
Items
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
The week in which summer time is started is set. 1: 1st 2: 2nd 3: 3rd 4: 4th 5: Last The day on which summer time is started is set. 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday The time at which summer time is started is set. 00-23 The minute at which summer time is started is set. 00-59 The month in which summer time is ended is set. 1: January 2: February 3: March 4: April 5: May 6: June 7: July 8: August 9: September 10: October 11: November 12: December The week in which summer time is ended is set. 1: 1st 2: 2nd 3: 3rd 4: 4th 5: Last The day on which summer time is ended is set. 0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday
Procedure 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 172 07/11
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0
Code
Classification
3862
General
Summer time mode Ending time
3863
General
Summer time mode Ending minute
ALL
0
SYS
3864
Network
Disclosing Telnet Server function
ALL
0
SYS
3865
Network
Availability of Telnet Server
ALL
2
NIC
3866
Network
Telnet Server TCP port number
ALL
NIC
3867
Network
Telnet Server Server administrator's user name
ALL
3868
Network
Telnet Server Server administrator's password
ALL
6810-0
Counter
Number of output pages in black mode / Large size
PRT
23 Admin System 0
6810-1
6810-2 6810-3 6810-4 6810-7
Items
1-UP / Duplex printing 2-UP / Duplex printing 2-UP / Simplex printing 4-UP / Duplex printing 4-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Simplex printing
RAM
Contents
SYS
The time at which summer time is ended is set. 00-23 The minute at which summer time is ended is set. 00-59 Disclosure of Telnet Server function is switched. 0: Not disclosed 1: Disclosed Availability of Telnet Server is switched. 1: Enabled 2: Disabled A port number for Telnet Server is set.
1
1
1
12
12
NIC
A user name for the Telnet Server administrator is confirmed.
12
NIC
A password for the Telnet Server administrator is set.
12
SYS
Counts the number of output pages.
4
Counts the number of output pages using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets using [4IN1].
4
Counts the number of output pages.
4
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
4 4 4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 173 07/11
2
Code
Classification
6813-0
Counter
6813-1
Setting mode (08) Default Func- 1-UP / PRT 0 Number of output pages Duplex printing of the printer or BOX / PRT 0 2-UP / Large Duplex printing
SYS
Counts the number of output pages.
4
SYS
Counts the number of output pages using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of sheets using [2IN1] or [MAGAZINE SORT]. Counts the number of output pages using [4IN1]. Counts the number of sheets using [4IN1].
4
Counts the number of output pages using [N IN1]. Counts the number of sheets using [N IN1].
4
4
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
PRT
0
SYS
Counts the number of sheets output pages.
4
FAX
0
SYS
Counts the number of output pages in the default settings.
4
FAX
0
SYS
Raw printing job (Blank page will not be printed) Printing resume after jam releasing Single-page option for storing File and sending Email
PRT
0
SYS
0: OFF 1: ON
1
ALL
0 0
SYS
0: 1: 0: 1:
1
eBMUser R 0
SYS
6813-4 6813-5 6813-6 6813-7
6815-7
Procedure
0
6813-3
Counter
Contents
PRT
6813-2
6815-0
RAM
Number of output pages of the FAX printing / Large
2-UP / Simplex printing 4-UP / Duplex printing 4-UP / Simplex printing N-UP / Duplex printing N-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Simplex printing 1-UP / Duplex printing
9117
Network
9359 9394
User interface Network
9629
Network
Attribute name for LDAP Role Based Access
ALL
9739
Maintenance
Remote service Toner-end notification
ALL
9819
General
STAGE SSL
ALL
ALL
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
1
SYS
SYS
SYS
4 4
4
4
Auto resume Resume by users Sets 1 page as 1 file Makes a file based on the original
1 11
0: RDMS toner empty notified immediately 1: RDMS toner empty notified once a day 2: RDMS toner empty not notified When remote scanning is performed, the SSL communication is carried out. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (SSL communication)
1
1
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 174
Setting mode (08) Default Func- STAGE SSL port number ALL 20443
Code
Classification
9822
General
9828
General
Remote scanning mode
ALL
9829
General
Department management limitation setting
ALL
9847
Finisher
Hole punching setting
ALL
9880
Total counter transmission date setting(2) Day of total counter data transmission
ALL
9881
Maintenance General
9882
General
Display mode of the used capacity on the e-Filing administrator page
9885
General
9886
0 0
Procedure
RAM
Contents
SYS
When remote scanning is performed using SSL communication, the SSL port number is set. 0: Batch 1: Sequential Decide the default limitation setting when the new department code is created. 0: No limit 1: Limited 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 to 31
1
1 byte 00000000(0)01111111(127) From the 2nd bit Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday 0: All files search mode 1: Performance priority mode 0: Old FROM 1: New FROM -1: Error 0: Comma 1: Period
1
SYS SYS
1 1
0 0 0
SYS
ALL
1
SYS
New/Old FROM identification
ALL
-
Scanner
Decimal point indication for Enhanced Scan Template
SCN
SYS
9888
Scanner
SCN
SYS
0: Prohibited 1: Accepted
1
9889
General
Permission setting for changing the scan parameter when recalling an extension Acceptance of data cloning using USB storage device
EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 1 0
ALL
1
SYS
2
9891
User interface
ALL
1
SYS
9946
General
Warning message on the touch panel when PM (Periodic Maintenance) time has come E-mail transmission retry number
Acceptance of the usage of the USB data cloning tool 0: Accepted 1: Not accepted 0: No warning notification 1: Warning notification
ALL
3
SYS
1
9947
General
E-mail transmission retry interval
ALL
1
SYS
The number of times of E-mail communication retry for Scan to E-mail and Internet Fax is set. When E-mail transmission retry for Scan to Email and Internet Fax is performed, the interval is set. 0 min - 15 min
ALL
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SYS -
1 1
1
2 1
1
1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 175 07/11
2
Code 9960
Classification Maintenance
Items Displaying equipment information
Setting mode (08) Default Func- ALL 0
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
RAM
Contents
SYS
Equipment information stored in NVRAM is displayed. 0: Unset 1: e-STUDIO520/600/ 720/850 2: e-STUDIO523/603/ 723/853
Procedure 2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 176 07/11
(Ch.2.2.6)
Code 1500
Classification Pixel counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Standard paper size setting ALL EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 0
Contents
SYS
Selects the standard paper size to convert it into the pixel count (%). 0: A4 1: LT Clears all information related to the pixel counter. Clears all information related to the service technician reference pixel counter. Clears all information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. Selects whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed Selects the reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference 1: Toner cartridge reference Selects the counter to determine toner empty. 0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter Sets the number of output pages to determine toner empty. This setting is valid when “0” is set at 08-1506. Sets the pixel count to determine the toner empty status. This setting is valid when "1" is set at 08-1506. Becomes “1” when 081502 is performed.
1
Displays the date on which 08-1502 was performed. Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed.
2
1501
Pixel counter
Pixel counter all clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1502
Pixel counter
Service technician reference counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1503
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge reference counter clearing
ALL
-
SYS
1504
Pixel counter
Pixel counter display setting
ALL
1
SYS
1505
Pixel counter
Displayed reference setting
ALL
0
SYS
1506
Pixel counter
Toner empty determination counter setting
ALL
0
SYS
1507
Pixel counter
Threshold setting for toner empty determination (Output pages)
ALL
400
SYS
1508
Pixel counter
Threshold setting for toner empty determination (Pixel count)
ALL
17550
SYS
1509
Pixel counter
ALL
0
SYS
1510
Pixel counter
Pixel counter clear flag/ Service technician reference Service technician reference cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1514
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge reference cleared date
ALL
-
SYS
1518
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge reference count started date
ALL
-
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure
RAM
2 3 3
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
2 2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 177
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Number of output pages PPC (Service technician reference)
RAM
Contents
SYS
Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Counts the number of time of the toner cartridge replacement. Displays the average pixel count in the copy function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
1548
Pixel counter
1550
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Service technician reference)
PRT
SYS
1551
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Service technician reference)
FAX
SYS
1553
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
SYS
1555
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
SYS
1556
Pixel counter
Number of output pages (Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
SYS
1566
Pixel counter
Toner cartridge replacement counter
ALL
SYS
1592
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Service technician reference)
PPC
0
SYS
1593
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Service technician reference)
PRT
0
SYS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Procedure 2
2
2
2
2
2
2 2
2
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 178 05/06
Code 1594
Classification Pixel counter
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Average pixel count FAX 0
RAM
Contents
SYS
Displays the average pixel count in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy/ printer/FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the printer function, and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the copy/ printer/FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the average pixel count in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the FAX function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Displays the latest pixel count in the copy function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
1595
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Service technician reference)
PPC/ PRT/ FAX
0
SYS
1606
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)
PPC
0
SYS
1607
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)
PRT
0
SYS
1608
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Service technician reference)
FAX
0
SYS
1613
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0
SYS
1619
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT
0
SYS
1624
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC/ PRT/ FAX
0
SYS
1625
Pixel counter
Average pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
0
SYS
1634
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
FAX
0
SYS
1639
Pixel counter
Latest pixel count (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC
0
SYS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Procedure 2
2 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 179 05/06
Code
Classification
Setting mode (08) Default Func- Latest pixel count PRT 0 (Toner cartridge reference)
1640
Pixel counter
1649-0 1649-1 1649-2 1649-3 1649-4 1649-5 1649-6 1649-7 1649-8 1649-9
Pixel counter
Pixel count distribution
1650-0 1650-1 1650-2 1650-3 1650-4 1650-5 1650-6 1650-7 1650-8 1650-9
Pixel counter
Pixel count distribution
1651-0 1651-1 1651-2 1651-3 1651-4 1651-5 1651-6 1651-7 1651-8 1651-9
Pixel counter
Pixel count distribution
0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1100%
RAM
Contents
SYS
Displays the latest pixel count in the printer function and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the copy function are displayed. [Unit: page]
Procedure 2
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT PRT
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the printer function are displayed. [Unit: page]
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX
SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX function are displayed. [Unit: page]
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 180 05/06
• The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. 0: Present number of output pages - Means the present number of output pages. 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement - Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement. 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement - Means the number of output pages at the last replacement. 3: Present driving counts - Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds). 4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced - Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds). 5: Driving counts at the last replacement - Means the drive counts at the last replacement. 6: Present output pages for control - Means the present number of output pages for controlling. 7: Present driving counts for control - Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds). * For the cleaning web, this means the total feeding amount for controlling the cleaning web. (1 count = 1 mm). 8: Number of times replaced - Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen. Notes: • Barring the exceptions, sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. • Barring the exceptions, when the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. • When “0” is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to “0”. (Exceptions: 08-1228, 08-1252)
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 181 05/06
2
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits 1150-0 to 8
Date of previous replacement 1151
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
Drum cleaning brush
1166-0 to 8
1167
Drum separation finger
1172-0 to 8
1173
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
Main charger wire cleaning pad
1190-0 to 8
1191
Items Photoconductive drum
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 182 07/11
Items Ozone filter
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
1198-0 to 8
1199
Developer material
1200-0 to 8
1201
Toner filter
1208-0 to 8
1209
1212-0 to 5, 8
1213
1228-0 to 8
1229
Transfer belt cleaning blade
1232-0 to 5, 8
1233
Transfer belt cleaning brush
1234-0 to 5, 8
1235
Used toner bag
Transfer belt
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 400,000/400,000/ 400,000/330,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 400,000/400,000/ 400,000/330,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 900,000/1,000,000/ 1,150,000/1,200,000 Sub-code 4: 990,000/990,000/ 990,000/820,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 495,000/495,000/ 495,000/410,000
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 183 07/11
2
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Fuser roller
1246-0 to 8
1247
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
Cleaning web
1252-0 to 8
1253
Cleaning web roller
1254-0 to 8
1255
Fuser roller separation finger
1268-0 to 8
1269
Pickup belt (RADF)
1282-0,1,2,8
1283
Feed roller (RADF)
1284-0,1,2,8
1285
Separation roller (RADF)
1286-0,1,2,8
1287
Items
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/ 470,000/390,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/ 470,000/390,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/ 470,000/390,000 Sub-code 7: 1/1/1/1 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/ 470,000/390,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/ 470,000/390,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 50,000/50,000/50,000/ 50,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 120,000/120,000/ 120,000/120,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 50,000/50,000/50,000/ 50,000
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 184 07/11
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Pickup roller (Tandem LCF)
1288-0,1,2,8
1289
Pickup roller (1st drawer)
1290-0,1,2,8
1291
Pickup roller (2nd drawer)
1292-0,1,2,8
1293
Pickup roller (Option LCF)
1294-0,1,2,8
1295
Feed roller (Tandem LCF)
1296-0,1,2,8
1297
Feed roller (1st drawer)
1298-0,1,2,8
1299
Feed roller (2nd drawer)
1300-0,1,2,8
1301
Feed roller (Option LCF)
1302-0,1,2,8
1303
Separation roller (Tandem LCF)
1304-0,1,2,8
1305
Items
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 400,000/400,000/ 400,000/400,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 500,000/500,000/ 500,000/500,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 400,000/400,000/ 400,000/400,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 500,000/500,000/ 500,000/500,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 400,000/400,000/ 400,000/400,000
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 185 07/11
2
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Separation roller (1st drawer)
1306-0,1,2,8
1307
Separation roller (2nd drawer)
1308-0,1,2,8
1309
Separation roller (Option LCF)
1310-0,1,2,8
1311
Separation roller (3rd drawer)
1312-0,1,2,8
1313
Separation roller (4th drawer)
1314-0,1,2,8
1315
Separation roller (Bypass feed)
1316-0,1,2,8
1317
Feed roller (3rd drawer)
1320-0,1,2,8
1321
Feed roller (4th drawer)
1322-0,1,2,8
1323
Feed roller (Bypass feed)
1324-0,1,2,8
1325
Items
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 500,000/500,000/ 500,000/500,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 100,000/100,000/ 100,000/100,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 100,000/100,000/ 100,000/100,000
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 186 07/11
PM management setting *Indicated in 8 digits
Date of previous replacement
Pickup roller (3rd drawer)
1328-0,1,2,8
1329
Pickup roller (4th drawer)
1330-0,1,2,8
1331
Pickup roller (Bypass feed)
1332-0,1,2,8
1333
Web roller one-way clutch
1338-0 to 8
1339
Items
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 200,000/200,000/ 200,000/200,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 100,000/100,000/ 100,000/100,000 Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0/0/0 Sub-code 1: 450,000/500,000/ 575,000/600,000 Sub-code 4: 470,000/470,000/ 470,000/390,000
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 187 07/11
2
(1) (2)
Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. Key in the code “257” with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is displayed). Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
Fig. 2-3
(3)
Key in the value “1” or “2” with the digital key and press the [START] button. The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed. Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] button.) •
Key in “1” to copy the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B).
(A)
(B)
Fig. 2-4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 188 06/09
•
Key in “2” to copy the value of the backup counter (SYS board) (B) onto the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A).
(A)
(B)
2
Fig. 2-5
(4)
Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the [CANCEL] button is pressed.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 189 06/09
2.2.6
Pixel counter
1) Outline Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This “Print ratio (%) per standard paper size” is called Pixel count (%). This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge).
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 190
2) Factors affecting toner consumption Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal temperature and humidity. However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user. The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows: - Original/Data coverage - Original/Data density - Original/Print mode - Density setting Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Original density
Toner consumption
Original coverage
TEXT /PHOTO
TEXT
Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual density density density density density density +5 +1 Center -1 -5
PHOTO
Original mode
Density setting Fig. 2-6 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 191 06/09
2
3) Details of pixel counter - Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference. Toner cartridge reference This is a system that accumulates data between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next installation. The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold. The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503). Service technician reference This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter. Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (081502). -
Print count (number of output pages) The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper sizes to the standard paper size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by paper area ratio. The standard paper size is set in the setting mode (08-1500). The examples of conversion are as follows: Ex.) “1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size. “2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%) “1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%) “1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 192 06/09
-
Pixel count (%) Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper. The examples of pixel count are as follows: Note: In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4 margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
2 Ex.) Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) → Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5 Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) → Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5 Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) → Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4 Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission → Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4 Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) → Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4 Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission → Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4 -
Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%) There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%). Average pixel count (%) The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and displayed. Latest pixel count (%) The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 193 06/09
-
Type of calculated data Since this is multifunctional, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function. The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08). See after-mentioned “5)-Display in the setting mode (08)” for details. : With data : Without data Toner cartridge reference
Service technician reference
Copier function Printer function FAX function Total
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data -
Setting related with the pixel counter function Standard paper size setting The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500). Pixel counter display setting Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504). Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505). Determination counter of toner empty This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is detected. After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted. Pixel counter clearing There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows: 08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared. 08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared. 08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 194 06/09
4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption The user’s printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density setting may cause it as well. In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service. The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:
2
Number of output pages per cartridge (page)
Standard number of output pages X
X/2
X/10 60%
6% 12%
Pixel count (%) Fig. 2-7 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 195 06/09
5) Pixel counter confirmation - Display on LCD screen Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505). The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual, turned ON. The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting mode (08-1505).
Fig. 2-8 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting mode (08-1505).
Fig. 2-9 Information screen of service technician reference
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 196
-
Data list printing The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S). 9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed. 9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST
2
2004.7.11 09:55 TONERCARTRIDGE No DATE 0 20040711 1 20040711 2 20040711
Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%]
PPC 12345 12345 12345
PRN 23456 23456 23456
FAX 12345 12345 12345
TOTAL 45678 45678 45678
FAX 12345 12345 12345
TOTAL 45678 45678 45678
Fig. 2-10 Data list of toner cartridge reference
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2004.7.11 09:55 SERVICEMAN No DATE 0 20040711 1 20040711 2 20040711
Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%]
PPC 12345 12345 12345
PRN 23456 23456 23456
Fig. 2-11 Data list of service technician reference
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 197
-
Display in the setting mode (08) Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08). For details, see P.2-74 "2.2.5 Setting mode (08)". Print count, pixel count
Copier function
Printer function
FAX function
Total
Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%)
Toner cartridge reference 1553
Service technician reference 1548
1613
1592
1639
1606
1555
1550
1619
1593
1640
1607
1556
1551
1625
1594
1634
1608
1624
1595
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table Pixel count distribution Copier function Printer function FAX function
Pixel count distribution (page) 1649 1650 1651
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table
Note: By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows. 0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25% 5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 198
Other information Toner cartridge replacement counter The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566) Toner cartridge reference count started date The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. (08-1518) Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date is displayed.(08-1510) The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored. Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed. The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 199
2
2.2.7
Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)
Classification User interface
Scanner
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08) [AMS] 605 [X in 1] 650 [Indicator] 671 [Edit copying] 645, 646 [Sound] 610, 969, 970 [Counter] 202 [Cascade] 652, 653 [Screen] 207, 602 [Administrator] 263 [Feeding setting] 658, 659 [Original counter] 302 [Original direction] 628 [Book duplexing] 611 [Language] 220 [Copy volume] 300 [Energy saving] 601 [Default setting] 276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 503, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642, 1479 [Offsetting between jobs] 682 [Security level] 1708 [Sorting] 627, 641, 649 [Timer] 204, 205, 206 [Template] 1140, 3851 [Image shift] 636, 1429, 1430 [Tray reset] 648 [Blank copying prevention] 625 [Date] 640 [Annotation] 651, 657 [Display] 213, 342, 613, 1478 [Job Build] 1130, 1131 [File] 209, 219 [Department management] 617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 629 [Box printing] 953, 954 [JOB STATUS] 983 [Keyboard layout] 1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1933, 1934, 1935 [Jam releasing] 9359 [PM] 9891 [E-mail] 272, 273 [Enhanced template] 9886, 9888
[Position] 305, 306 [Carriage position] 359 [Shading position] 310, 311 [Distortion] 308 [Reproduction ratio] 340
FAX
[Function] 1498, 1926, 3847, 3848, 3849 [Destination] 701 [Default setting] 274, 275 [Priority drawer] 689
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 200 07/11
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Image
[Binarization] 700, 701, 702 [Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 848, 850, 851, 852, 853, 855, 856, 857, 858, 860, 861, 862, 863, 931, 932, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939, 940, 941, 942 [Pixel size] 663 [Gamma balance] 596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2, 599-0 to 2 [Gamma adjustment] 593, 594, 595, 943, 944, 945 [Background processing] 600, 601, 602, 869, 870, 871, 872, 946, 947, 948 [Sharpness] 620, 621-0 to 1, 622, 865-0 to 2, 866-0 to 2, 867-0 to 2, 868-0 to 1, 922, 923, 924-0 to 1 [Smudged/Faint text] 653, 654, 655, 928 [Toner saving] 664, 665 [Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 434-0 to 1, 435, 436, 437, 438 [Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694, 695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832, 833, 835, 836, 837, 838, 913, 914, 915, 916, 917, 918, 919, 920, 921 [Image quality control] 241, 242, 244, 247, 248, 249, 260, 261, 262, 263-0 to 1, 264-0 to 1, 265-0 to 1, 268, 269, 270, 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 299
Image control
Drive system
Setting Mode (08) [Custom Mode] 508, 509 [Error diffusion / Dither] 502 [Default setting] 550
2
[Image quality control autostart] 1826, 1827, 1828, 1829, 1830, 1831 [Image quality open-loop control] 1811 [Image quality closed-loop control] 1809, 1810, 1814, 1815 [Contrast voltage] 1820, 1821, 1833 [Developer unit prerunning period] 1808 [Condition setting] 804 [Counter for accumulated number] 1371 [0 clearing] 800 [Transfer output correction] 1837 [Toner control] 1910 [Drum surface potential sensor] 1812, 1813, 1345 [Background potential offset correction] 1834 [Auto-start print volume setting] 803, 810 [Laser power offset correction] 1835 [Exposure amount (laser power)] 1824, 1825
[Motor speed] 409, 412, 421, 422, 424, 425, 426, 427, 439, 446-0 to 1, 447-0 to 1, 451-0 to 1, 453-0 to 1, 454-0 to 1, 456-0 to 1, 464-0 to 3, 475-0 to 3, 478-0 to 3, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 486, 487, 488, 489, 490, 493
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 201
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Feeding system
[Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 4 [Aligning amount] 448-0 to 4, 449-0 to 4, 450-0 to 4, 452-0 to 4, 455-0 to 4, 457, 458-0 to 4, 460-0 to 4, 461-0 to 4, 462-0 to 4, 463-0 to 4, 469-0 to 4, 470-0 to 4, 471-0 to 4, 472-0 to 4, 473-0 to 3, 474-0 to 4, 480, 4563-0 to 3, 4564-0 to 3, 4565-0 to 3, 4566-0 to 3, 4567-0 to 3, 4568-0 to 3, 4569-0 to 3, 4580-0 to 1, 4581-0 to 1, 4582-0 to 4, 4583-0 to 4, 4584-0 to 4, 4585-0 to 4, 4586-0 to 1, 4587-0 to 4, 4588-0 to 4, 4589-0 to 4, 4590-0 to 4, 4591-0 to 4, 4592-0 to 1, 4593-0 to 4, 4594-0 to 4, 4595-0 to 4, 4596-0 to 4, 4597-0 to 4, 4598-0 to 1, 4599-0 to 4, [Paper remained] 476-0 to 5, 477-0 to 5
Laser
[Write start] 408, 410, 411, 428, 429, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 498-0 to 1 [Polygonal motor] 401, 405 [Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 6 [Laser power] 286-0 to 1 [Grid] 210, 251-0 to 1 [Auto-toner] 200, 201 [Developer bias] 205, 253-0 to 1 [Transfer transformer] 221
[Reversing speed (Thick paper)]1901 [Inserter] 211 [Feeding] 254, 619 [Paper feeding timing] 1909 [Paper source] 480, 481, 1135, 1431 [Detection] 449, 1492 [Setting] 988 [Tab paper] 214, 215, 216, 217, 1437, 1438, 1439 [Paper size] 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 243, 247, 248, 249, 256, 630 [Paper type] 697 [Paper dimension] 210, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 244, 245, 246, 470, 471 [Paper retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1, 468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401, 1402, 1403, 1900-0 to 1 [Polygonal motor] 478, 483, 484, 485, 486, 488, 489
Main charger Developer Transfer Fuser
Image processing
RADF
Finisher
[Aligning amount] 354, 355 [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366 [Sensor/EEPROM] 352, 356, 367, 368 [Binding/Folding position] 468-0 to 2
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
[Cleaning] 418 [Auto-toner] 414 [Transfer timing] 841 [Transformer DC] 830, 868, 869 [Temperature] 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 411, 412, 413, 437, 890, 891, 897, 898, 1804 [Cleaning web] 401, 402, 403, 404, 405 [High fusing mode] 433 [Threshold] 460 [Status counter] 400 [Printing speed] 858, 859, 860, 861 [Pre-running] 417, 439, 440, 441, 526, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 855 [Detection and control] 1415 [Drum pre-running period] 1836 [Toner supply amount correction] 455, 456, 457 [Counter] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388 [Switchback] 462
[Stapling] 704-0 to 1 [Hole punching] 9847
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 202
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[AppleTalk] 1014, 1015, 1936, 3729, 3730 [BDC] 1122 [Bindery] 1026 [Community] 1065, 1066 [DDNS] 1020, 3737, 3745, 3746, 3747, 3748 [DHCP] 1755, 1756, 1757, 1759, 1760, 1762, 3772, 3773, 3774, 3778, 3779, 3780 [Directory] 1028, 1029 [DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019, 3736, 3781, 3782, 3784 [DPWS] 3749, 3750, 3751, 3752, 3753, 3754, 3755, 3756, 3757, 3758, 3759, 3760, 3761, 3762, 3763, 3764, 3765, 3766, 3785 [E-mail] 265, 1097, 1098, 1476, 1477, 1489, 1491, 3837, 9946, 9947 [File] 1779, 1782, 1783, 1784, 1785, 1786, 9394 [FTP] 1055, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092, 3739 [HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 3738 [IP Conflict] 1440 [IP Filter] 1720, 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725, 1726, 1727, 1728, 1729, 1730, 1731, 1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1739 [IP address] 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010, 1767, 1768, 3769 [IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1447, 1448, 1449, 1450, 1451, 3725, 3726 [IPv6] 3767, 3768, 3770, 3775, 3776, 3777 [IPX] 1011, 1099 [LDAP] 1016, 1138, 1139, 1923, 1924, 3506, 3507, 3727, 3728, 3743, 9629 [LLTD] 3793 [LLMNR] 3794 [LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077 [MAC address] 1141 [MIB] 1063 [NCP] 1013 [NDS] 1027 [NetBios] 1023 [Netware] 1128, 1129, 1134, 1143, 1144, 1148 [NIC] 1002 [Novell] 1093, 1094 [PCL setting] 973 [PDC] 1121 [POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052, 3742, 3744 [Raw/TCP] 1073, 1074, 3731, 3732 [RawPort] 945 [Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299, 978, 979, 9117 [Rendezvous] 1103, 1104, 1105 [Role Base Access] 1493, 1928, 3831 [Samba] 1464, 3783, 3833 [SearchRoot] 1095 [SMB] 1117, 1950, 1951 [SMTP] 1022, 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042, 1100, 1101, 1102, 1111, 3741 [SNTP] 1441, 1442, 1444, 1445, 1446, 3740, 3845 [Telnet] 3864, 3865, 3866, 3867, 3868
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 203 07/11
2
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Network
[SSL] 1740, 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745, 1746, 1747, 1748, 1749, 1750, 1751, 9819, 9822 [TRAP] 1069, 1070 [WINS] 1024, 1025 [InternetFAX] 266, 1114, 3812, 3819, 3820, 3821, 3822, 3823, 3824, 3825, 3826, 3827, 3828, 3829, 3830 [Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045 [Function] 1432, 1435, 1436 [Automatic transferring] 660, 661 [Initialization] 1119 [Scan job] 1781-0 to 1, 1915, 1940, 3804, 3815, 3816, 3817, 3818 [Speed setting] 1003 [Direct SMTP] 3810, 3811 [Data retention period] 259, 260, 261, 262, 264 [Domain] 1113, 1123 [Authentication] 1484, 1485, 1487, 1920, 1921, 1922, 1925, 1937, 1952, 1953, 1954, 1955, 1956, 1957, 1958, 1959, 3722, 3723, 3724 [e-Filing Access Mode] 1497 [Print queue] 1096 [Prefix] 3771 [Frame type] 1012 [Host name] 1112 [Local I/F] 614 [Workgroup name] 1124 [Supplicant] 1679, 1681, 1682, 1684, 1685, 1686, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1696, 1697, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1704, 1705, 1706, 1707, 1764, 1765, 1766 [Driver] 1660, 1661, 1662, 1663, 1664, 1665, 1666, 1667, 1668, 1669, 1670, 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674, 1675, 1676, 1677, 1678 [Data encryption] 1715 [Installation status] 1709 [Setting] 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714 [Time-out] 1716, 1717 [BIP] 1719, 1941
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 204
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
Counter
[HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393 [n-UP printing] 1530-0 to 7, 1533-0 to 7, 1535-0 to 7, 6810-0 to 7, 6813-0 to 7, 6815-0 to 7, [Counter copy] 257 [External counter] 381, 1126 [Paper source] 355, 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374 [Paper size] 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16, 308-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16 [Tab paper] 1412 [Double count] 344, 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353 [Counter for period of time fuser unit] 1378, 1380, 1382 [Heater and energizing time accumulating] 1372 [Toner cartridge rotation] 1376, 1410 [Toner transport motors] 1519 [Used toner full status] 476 [Large/Small size] 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2, 328-0 to 2, 329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2 [HDD] 944 [ROM] 900, 903, 904, 905, 906, 907, 908, 909, 915 [System] 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939 [FSMS] 258, 999 [HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 [PM counter] 251, 252, 375, 376 [Error history] 253 [Equipment number] 995 [Emergency Mode] 710, 711 [Service notification] 702, 703, 707, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 723, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 794, 795, 796, 1145, 1495, 9739, 9880, 9881 [Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 765 [Downloading] 797 [Telephone] 250 [Panel calibration] 692 [PM timing display/Output pages] 223 [Equipment information] 9960 [HDD]699 [Key code] 698 [Installation] 696 [Setting] 267, 270, 950, 976, 985
Version
Maintenance
[Equipment number] 976
Scrambler board Electronic Filing Data overwrite kit
[FRAM] 1427 [HDD] 1422, 1424, 1426 [SRAM] 1428 [Releasing F200] 633
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
2 - 205 07/11
2
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08)
General
[HDD] 271, 670, 690, 691, 694 [NIC] 693 [PCL] 1149 [SYS ROM] 1938 [TAT partition] 1118 [Address book] 1125 [Data encryption] 3834 [Card authentification] 1776, 1777, 1927 [Card reader] 1772, 1773, 1774, 1775 [Administrator’s password] 1778 [IH error data] 1907 [Clearing] 665, 669 [Summer time] 3852, 3853, 3854, 3855, 3856, 3857, 3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863 [Destination] 201 [Trial period] 673, 695, 798, 799 [Setting] 949, 975, 986, 1132, 1470, 1471, 1494, 9829 [Software version upgrade] 947 [Taiwan's Green Mark Program] 1908 [Data cloning] 9889 [Databases] 684, 685, 686 [Electronic key] 3840, 3841, 3842 [Partition] 662, 666, 667 [Banner] 678, 679, 680 [Date/Time] 200, 638 [File] 288 [Department management] 672 [BANNER MESSAGE button] 681 [Memory] 615 [User data management] 1472, 1473, 1474, 1481, 1482, 1483, 1496 [Line] 203 [Duplex printing] 683 [File/Email] 1913, 1916 [Extension fields] 1914 [KS/KSSM setting] 1961 [KS] 1960, 1963, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1970, 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980 [KSSM] 1984, 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994 [Remote scanning] 3850, 9828 [Filing box] 9882 [FROM] 9885
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
2 - 206 07/11
3.
ADJUSTMENT
When the power should be turned OFF, be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button for a few seconds.
3.1
Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure. Note: Check if the cleaning blade is pressed against the drum before performing this adjustment. (Adjustment Mode (05-200))
3
(1)
Install the into the equipment.
(2)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be displayed.
[0][5] [POWER]
A3
A
100% TEST MODE
Fig. 3-1
(3)
Key in code [200] and press the [START] button. The display changes as follows. B
230% [200]
[START]
200
A3
TEST MODE
128
128 C
A Fig. 3-2
Notes: • A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output. • B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case). The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation. • C indicates the latest adjustment value.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3-1 05/05
(4)
After about two minutes and 30 seconds, the value B automatically starts changing.
230%
A3
200
TEST MODE
WAIT
128
128 Fig. 3-3
(5)
After a short time, the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows. B
240%
A3
200
ADJUSTMENT MODE
150
128
A Fig. 3-4
(6)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed. The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
A
100%
A3
TEST MODE
Fig. 3-5
(7)
Standard of adjustment value range
Humidity(%)
Adjustment reference voltages(V)
0 to 29.9
2.46
30.0 to 44.9
2.48
45.0 to 59.9
2.50
60.0 to 74.9
2.64
75.0 to 100
2.78
(8)
Key in code [290] and press the [START] button. When the message "WAIT" goes off, turn the power OFF by shutdown.
(9)
Install the toner cartridge.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-2 05/05
3.2 3.2.1
Image Dimensional Adjustment General description
There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed. Item to be adjusted 1
Paper alignment at the registration roller
2
Printer related adjustment
3
Scanner related adjustment
Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 480
(a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed)
401
(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position
411
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed)
488
(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
408, 428, 429, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445
(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing
498
(a) Image distortion
–
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
405
(c) Image location of primary scanning direction
306
(d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction
340
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction
305
(f) Top margin
430
(g) Right margin
432
(h) Bottom margin
433
[Procedure to key in adjustment values] In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button, immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3-3
3
A
100% 0
A3
TEST MODE
5
POWER 1 Code No.
Digital keys : Enter codes.
XXX
100% START
A3
TEST MODE Digital keys : Enter adjustment values. ( CLEAR Use to make corrections) ENTER Value ZZZ is stored
replacing values YYY. or INTERRUPT FAX
Test copy
YYY
ZZZ
Adjustment value newly entered (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
Current adjustment value 100%
A
A3
A
A3
A
A3
TEST MODE
100% Wait Warming Up
If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values, return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment procedure.
100% COPYING
Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.
Fig. 3-6
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-4
3.2.2
Paper alignment at the registration roller
• Adjustment with touch panel Paper alignment at the registration roller can be adjusted in the following procedure by performing the code 05-480. (1)
Select the drawer.
3
Fig. 3-7
(2)
Select the paper size.
Fig. 3-8
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3-5
(3)
Select the media type.
Fig. 3-9
(4)
Key in the adjustment value.
Fig. 3-10
(5)
Press the [ENTER] button to finish the adjustment. * Press the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button to return to the previous menu.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-6
• Adjustment by direct code entry As for the codes shown in the table below, the paper alignment at the registration roller can be adjusted by a direct entry with the digital keys. (For codes not shown in this table, perform the adjustment with the touch panel.) Paper type
Weight
1st drawer
2nd drawer
3rd drawer
4th drawer
Tandem LCF
Duplexing (ADU)
Option LCF
Bypass feed(SFB)
Plain paper
64-80 g/m2 17-20 lb.
450 (*1)
452 (*1)
448 (*1)
449 (*1)
457
455 (*1)
-
458 (*1)
Thick paper 1
81-105g/m2 21-28 lb.
469 (*1)
470 (*1)
471 (*1)
472 (*1)
473-0
474 (*1)
-
460 (*1)
Thick paper 2
106-163g/m2 29-43 lb.
-
-
-
-
473-1
-
-
461 (*1)
Thick paper 3
164-209g/m2 44-55 lb.
-
-
-
-
473-2
-
-
462 (*1)
OHP
-
-
-
-
-
473-3
-
-
463 (*2)
Sub-code (*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size1 3:Short size 4:Post card (*2) 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size1 of OHP film 3: Short size 2 of OHT film 4:Post card size of OHP film Notes: 1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer) Middle size: 220-239 mm (8.7-12.9 inches) Short size1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches) Short size2: 160-204 mm (6.3-8.0 inches) Post card: 159 mm or shorter (6.2 inches or shorter) 2. The adjustment of “Post card” is for Japan only.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3-7
3
(1)
Perform the test print according to the following procedure. (Not necessary for LCF)
[0][5] [Power]
(Code)
[START]
(Sub-code)
[START]
[SET] or [INTERRUPT] Stores in memory
[Drawer selection]
Enter new value
Current value displayed
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
(*3) +[FAX]
(Test print)
(*3)1: Single-sided grid pattern 3: Double-sided grid pattern 9: Gamma adjustment correction pattern (Dither) 10: Gamma adjustment correction pattern (Error diffusion) (2)
Check if any transfer void is occurring. If there is a transfer problem, try the values in descending order as “31” “30” “29”··· until the transfer void disappears. At the same time, confirm if any paper jam occurs. Also, when the aligning amount has been increased, this may increase the scraping noise caused by the paper and the Mylar sheet as it is transported by the registration roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to decrease the value.
Transfer void
mm
00
mm
-1
50 Fig. 3-11
(3) Perform the same procedure for all paper sources. Note: When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount. However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while confirming the leading edge position is not shifted. * As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increasing the aligning amount.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3-8
3.2.3
Printer related adjustment
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern. 1
21
A 6
D
B, E
26
C
Feeding direction
6
3
Fig. 3-12 Grid pattern
A
Adjustment Tolerance 200 ± 0.5mm
B C
52 ± 0.5mm 200 ± 0.5mm
D E
52 ± 0.5mm 52 ± 0.5mm
Detail of adjustment Refer to “[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer))” Refer to “[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer)” Refer to “[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))” Refer to “[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position” Refer to “[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing”
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3-9 05/11
[A]
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer)) (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [1] drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(4)
Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [401]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) “100% A” is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes. (e-STUDIO 520/523/600/603/720/723: 0.3 mm/step, e-STUDIO 850/853: 0.1 mm/step) [B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer) (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [1] drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4)
Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) “100% A” is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/ step). (6)
After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the code 410.
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [410]) [START] (Key in the same value in the step 5 above) Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 10 07/11
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transfer belt motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer)) (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment mode)
(2)
Press [1] drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 6th line at the leading edge of the paper to the 26th line of the grid pattern. * Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(4)
Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
3
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [488]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) “100% A” is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step). [D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. (If there is no paper source, skip this step.) The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values. *
Image location of all paper sources can be adjusted in the Adjustment mode (05-408)
For 4 drawers Order for adjustment
Paper source
Code
Paper size
Acceptable value
1
1st drawer
440
A4/LT
0 to 40
2
2nd drawer
441
A3/LT
0 to 40
3
3rd drawer
444
A4/LT
0 to 40
4
4th drawer
428
A4/LD
0 to 40
5
LCF
443
A4/LT
0 to 40
6
Bypass feed
442
A3/LD
0 to 40
7
Duplexing
445
A3/LD
0 to 40
-
All
408
-
0 to 80
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks
Paper fed from the 2nd/4th drawer
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 11
For tandem LCF Order for adjustment
Paper source
Code
Paper size
Acceptable value
1
1st drawer
440
A4
0 to 40
2
2nd drawer
441
A3
0 to 40
3
Tandem LCF
429
A4
0 to 40
4
LCF
443
A4
0 to 40
5
Bypass feed
442
A3
0 to 40
6
Duplexing
445
A3
0 to 40
-
All
408
-
0 to 80
Remarks
Paper fed from the 2nd/4th drawer
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. * Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed. * At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(4)
Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code shown above) [START] (Key in an acceptable value shown above) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) “100% A” is displayed Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.4 mm/step).
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 12
[E]
Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
[E-1] Adjustment for long-sized paper (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [3] drawer.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4)
Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
[FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD in the 2nd/4th
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [498]) [START] [0] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) “100% A” is displayed. Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (0.05 mm/step). [E-2] Adjustment for short-sized paper (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT in the 1st drawer/tandem LCF.
(3)
Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4)
Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [1] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). “100% A” is displayed Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (0.05 mm/step).
[0] [5] [Power ON] [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplex) A: 05-401 (2nd/4th drawer, A3/LD)
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
[FAX] 200±0.5 mm (e-STUDIO 520/523/600/603/720/723: 0.3 mm/step, e-STUDIO 850/853: 0.1 mm/step) e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 13 07/11
3
B:
05-411 (2nd/4th drawer, A3/LD)
C: D:
05-488 (2nd/4th drawer, A3/LD) 05-440 (1st drawer, A4/LT), 441 (2nd drawer, A3/LT), 444 (3rd drawer, A3/LT), 428 (4th drawer, A4/LD), 443 (LCF, A4/LT), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD) 05-498-0 (2nd/4th drawer, A3/LD), 498-1 (1st drawer/Tandem LCF, A4/LT)
E:
3.2.4
52±0.5 mm (0.05 mm/step) Key in the same value for 05-410. 200±0.5 mm (0.2 mm/step) 52±0.5 mm (0.4 mm/step)
52±0.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)
Scanner related adjustment
Make a copy, compare the result with the original and make an adjustment if the image is distorted. [A]
Image distortion
A
Feeding direction
B
Step 1
C
Feeding direction
D
Step 2
Fig. 3-13
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 14
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3
(2)
Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper.
(3)
Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position.
(4)
Remove the original glass.
(5)
Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2. • Step 1 - In case of A: Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW). - In case of B: Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CCW). • Step 2 - In case of C: Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW). - In case of D: Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW).
Carriage-2
Fig. 3-14
Adjustment screw for the mirror-1
Carriage-1
Fig. 3-15
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 15
3
[B] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 210 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5)
Check if the distance A is within the range of 200±0.5 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above. (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance A become. (e-STUDIO 520/523/600/603/720/723: 0.3 mm/step, e-STUDIO 850/853: 0.1 mm/step)
200
250
(1)
A
50
100
150
Copied image of the ruler
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-16
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 16 07/11
[C] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side along the original scale on the left.
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 100 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5)
Check if the distance B is within the range of 100±1.0 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
3
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [306]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The smaller the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance B becomes narrower (0.169 mm/step).
B
50
100
150
200
Copied image of the ruler
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-17
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 17
[D] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the left.
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance C from 10 mm to 210 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5)
Check if the distance C is within the range of 200±0.5 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps (3) to (5) above. (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [340]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The smaller the adjustment value is, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes (0.46 mm/ step). Copied image of the ruler
50
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
C
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-18
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 18
[E] Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the left.
(3)
Press [COPY] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5)
Check if the distance D is within the range of 10±2.0 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above.
3
(Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [305]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (0.143 mm/step). Copied image of the ruler
10
20
30
40
D
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-19
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 19
[F] Top margin (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Open the RADF.
(3)
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5)
Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 ± 0.5 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above. (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [430]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/ step).
Feeding direction
E Fig. 3-20
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 20
[G] Right margin (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Open the RADF.
(3)
Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5)
Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above. (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [432]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
F
Fig. 3-21
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 21
3
[H] Bottom margin (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(Adjustment Mode)
(2)
Open the RADF.
(3)
Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and the 2nd/4th drawer.
(4)
Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5)
Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.
(6)
If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps (3) to (5) above. (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [433]) [START] (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). (“100% A” is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
G Fig. 3-22
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 22
3.3
Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)
3.3.1
Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as follows. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
503 (931)
501 (933)
504 (932)
Manual density mode center value
The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
505 (934)
506 (936)
507 (935)
Manual density mode light step value
The larger the value is, the lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
508 (937)
509 (939)
510 (938)
Manual density mode dark step value
The larger the value is, the darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
514 (940)
512 (942)
515 (941)
Automatic density mode
The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
* The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. (1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3)
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. the ready state.
(5)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the copying job.
(6)
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
The equipment goes back to
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 23
3
3.3.2
Gamma slope adjustment
Gamma slope is adjustable with the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode
*
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
593 (943)
594 (945)
595 (944)
Item to be adjusted Gamma slope adjustment
Remarks 1 to 9: Select the gamma slope angle. (The larger the value is, the larger the angle becomes.)
The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Procedure is same as that of
3.3.3
P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
Background adjustment
Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo
Photo
Text
600 (946)
602 (947)
601 (948)
3.3.4
Item to be adjusted Background adjustment
Remarks 1 to 9: The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter.
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Item to be adjusted
Photo Text/Photo
Error diffusion process
Dither process
Text
620 (922)
621-0 (924-0)
621-1 (924-1)
622 (923)
Sharpness adjustment
Remarks
Key in the following values depending on the original mode. One’s place 1: Text/Photo 3: Photo 2: Text Ten’s place 1 to 9: Change intensity (The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes.) • Example of value entry in case the mode is “Text/Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/ Photo mode Key in a value 1 to 9
* The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Procedure is same as that of
P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 24
3.3.5
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to “varied” or “fixed” in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of the text peak affect that of the text density. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
570 (913)
571 (915)
572 (914)
Range correction for original manually set on the original glass
693 (916)
694 (918)
695 (917)
Range correction for original set on the RADF
Remarks The following are the default values set for each original mode. Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22 Each digit stands for: One’s place: Automatic density mode Ten’s place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied
* The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Procedure is same as that of
3.3.6
P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo
Photo
Text
532 (919)
533 (921)
534 (920)
Item to be adjusted Background peak for range correction
Remarks When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the image is not output. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16, Text: 64)
* The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Procedure is same as that of
P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 25
3
3.3.7
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo 653 (928)
Item to be adjusted Adjustment of smudged/faint spotted text
Remarks When the value increases, the faint text is improved. When the value decreases, the smudged text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192) Note: Note: Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value.
* The values in “( )” are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode. Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Procedure is same as that of
P.3-23 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 26
3.4
Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)
3.4.1
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
The smudged/faint text can be set at the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Language PS
PCL
654
655
Remarks When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value decreases, the faint text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
3
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3)
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(5)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the printing job.
(6)
If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3.4.2
Gamma balance adjustment
The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Language and screen Item to be adjusted
Smooth (PS)
Detail (PS)
Smooth (PCL)
Detail (PCL)
596-0
597-0
598-0
599-0
Low density
596-1
597-1
598-1
599-1
Medium density
596-2
597-2
598-2
599-2
High density
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 27
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button.
(3)
Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the [START] button. 0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H)
(4)
Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.)
(5)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. ¨ The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6)
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7)
Let the equipment restart and perform printing job.
(8)
If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
3.4.3
Image density adjustment
Adjust the image density level when normal printing (Toner save: Disable) and (Toner save: Enable). < Adjustment Mode (05) > Normal
Toner Saving mode
PS/PCL
PS
PCL
663
664
665
Item to be adjusted Image density adjustment
Procedure is same as that of
Remarks The image density level in the Printer function can be set. The smaller the value is, the lighter the density of image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
P.3-27 "3.4.1 Adjustment of smudged/faint text".
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 28
3.5
Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)
3.5.1
Density adjustment
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment button. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
845
847
846
848
Manual density mode center value
The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
850
852
851
853
Manual density mode light step value
The larger the value is, the lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
855
857
856
858
Manual density mode dark step value
The larger the value is, the darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
860
862
861
863
Automatic density mode
The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3)
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(5)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the scanning job.
(6)
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 29
3
3.5.2
Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
Item to be adjusted
865-0
867-0
866-0
868-0
150 to 200 dpi
865-1
867-1
866-1
868-1
300 to 400 dpi
865-2
867-2
866-2
–
600 dpi
Remarks Key in the following values depending on the original mode. One’s place Leave the value in one’s place at the fixed value. Ten’s place 1 to 9: Change intensity • The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes.) • Example of value entry in case the mode is “Text/ Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/ Photo mode Key in a value 1 to 9
(1)
While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2)
Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3)
Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
(4)
Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5)
Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state.
(6)
For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7)
Shut down (turn the power OFF), back ON, and then perform the scanning job.
(8)
If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 30
3.5.3
Setting range correction
The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction can be switched to “varied” or “fixed” in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affect the reproduction of the background density and the values of the text peak affect that of the text density. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
825
827
826
828
830
832
831
Procedure is same as that of
3.5.4
Item to be adjusted Range correction for original manually set on the original glass
833
Range correction for original set on the RADF
Remarks The following are the default values set for each original mode. Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 12, Gray Scale:12 Each digit stands for: One’s place: Automatic density mode Ten’s place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied
P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak)
The levels of the background peak for the range correction can be set at the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
835
837
836
838
Procedure is same as that of
Item to be adjusted Background peak for range correction
Remarks When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the image is not output. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: text/photo: 40, photo: 16, text: 48, Gray Scale:16)
P.3-29 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 31
3
3.5.5
Background adjustment
Background of the gamma data can be adjusted with the following codes. < Adjustment Mode (05) > Original mode Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Gray Scale
869
871
870
872
Item to be adjusted Background adjustment
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
Remarks 1 to 9: The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 32
3.6
Measurement at Replacement of High-Voltage Transformer
The high-voltage transformer does not need to be adjusted, however, when you check each value of the main charger bias and the developer bias, it needs to be measured. Note: When carrying out the operation, be careful not to touch the electronic section because it is high voltage.
3.6.1
Measurement
[ 1 ] Preparation Items to check Process Unit
Digital Tester
Main Charger Take off from the equipment
Function switch
Remove the connector of the auto toner sensor, and release the developer unit from the drum. DC
Full-scale (range) Remarks
Developer Bias
1000 V Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 MΩ (RMS value) or higher.
How to turn ON the power
Attach the door switch jig and start with the adjustment mode [05] while the front cover opened.
[ 2 ] Installing Jig (1)
Put in the door switch jig and slide it down.
(2)
Rotate the jig counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Door switch jig
Fig. 3-23
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 33 05/04
3
[ 3 ] Connection (1)
Connection for main charger measurement (+): Rail for the main charger
(-): Ground to the machine frame
Fig. 3-24
(2)
Connection for developer bias measurement (+): Shaft of the upper developer sleeve
(-): Ground to the machine frame
Fig. 3-25
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 34
[ 4 ] Operation Connect the digital testers as described in “[3] Connection”, and follow the procedure on the next page to measure the output from the main charger and developer bias charger.
A
A3
XXX
A3
100%
[0][5] [POWER]
TEST MODE
1
[Digital keys] : Enter the code.
100%
Code No.
3
TEST MODE
[START]
YYY Current set value Check that the measured value satisfies the following table. Code Default value Output value
Developer bias 205 113 (bit) -394±22V
Main charger 210 102 (bit) -500±22V
[CANCEL]
100%
A3
A
TEST MODE Return to 1 to enter the other adjustment code. [POWER] : OFF Disconnect the digital testers and return the equipment to its original state. [0][5] [POWER] [Digital keys] : 290 [START] [POWER] : After the message "WAIT" has disappeared, turn the power OFF and then back ON. Fig. 3-26
Note: If the output value does not reach a specified level, replace the high-voltage transformer. Remark: Transfer bias ON timing adjustment(Not essential) Depending on the environmental condition or the paper type, transfer ability for the paper leading edge may decrease slightly and the poor image transfer may occur. In this case, the image quality can be improved by adjusting the leading edge void width wider. Also, it can be improved by changing the transfer bias ON timing using the setting code 08-841. © 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 35 06/09
*
When using the setting code 08-841 to improve the image quality, increase the value by one and check the result. If the result is not sufficient, repeat the same procedure. (The transfer ability for the paper leading edge shows a tendency as shown in the table below.)
*
The transfer ability for the paper leading edge and the paper separation ability from the photo-conductive drum are inversely related as shown in the table below. Therefore, if the value is increased too much, this may cause the slight decrease of the paper separation ability from the photo-conductive drum. So, when adjusting the value, be sure to check the paper feeding as well as the image quality.
[Setting code 08-841: Transfer timing correction] Content
Transfer ability for paper leading edge
Value
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/ 720/723
e-STUDIO850/853
0
Approx. 1.4 mm slower than the standard ON timing
Approx. 1.6 mm slower than the standard ON timing
1
Same as the standard ON timing. (Default value)
Same as the standard ON timing. (Default value)
2
Approx. 1.4 mm faster than the standard ON timing
Approx. 1.6 mm faster than the standard ON timing.
3
Approx. 2.8 mm faster than the standard ON timing.
Approx. 3.3 mm faster than the standard ON timing.
| | | | | | | | | | |
4
Approx. 7.1 mm faster than the standard ON timing.
Approx. 8.2 mm faster than the standard ON timing.
Transfer ability improves
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
Paper separation ability from the photo-conductive drum Separation ability improves | | | | | | | | | | |
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 36 07/11
3.7
Adjustment of the Scanner Section
3.7.1
Carriages
[A] Installing carriage wires When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below: [Front side] Carriage-2 Carriage wire
3
Bracket for carriage-1
Idler pulley
Wire pulley
Hook Tension spring
Fig. 3-27
[Rear side] Carriage-2 Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1 Hook
Tension spring
Wire pulley
Fig. 3-28
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs. Note: Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 37
[B] Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions (1)
Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side.
(2)
Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up. Carriage-2
Pulley bracket [Front]
[Rear]
Exit side frame
B
A Fig. 3-29
(3)
Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw up the front/rear sides of the bracket to fix it. Note: Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame. Carriage-1 [Front]
[Rear]
Exit side frame Bracket
Bracket
D
C Fig. 3-30
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 38
[C] Assembling carriage wires (Winding the wire around the wire pulley) (1)
Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2)
Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be wound are as follows: • 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss • 5 turns toward the boss side
Note: Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys: - Do not twist the wire. - Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys. - Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space between them. 5 turns
5 turns 2 turns
2 turns
Ball terminal Ball terminal No space between turns
Hook
Hook
Color: Silver
[Rear]
Color: Black
[Front] Fig. 3-31
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 39
3
(3)
After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires.
Notes: • When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened. • The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed through between the arm and the jig.
Arm
Wire holder jig
Fig. 3-32
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 40
3.7.2
Lens unit
[A] Replacing the lens unit • The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole unit. • When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 10 screws indicated with the arrows.
3
Fig. 3-33
•
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-34
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 41
[B]
Adjustment of the magnification ratio of the lens Notes: • Perform this adjustment only when the lens unit is taken off or replaced. • Make sure that the primary scanning reproduction ratio (printer section) is correct before this adjustment.
(1)
Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LTsized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
(2)
Compare the copied ruler with the actual ruler.
Feeding Direction
Copied ruler
Actual ruler
Fig. 3-35
(3)
If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
(1)
Take off the original glass and lens cover.
(2)
Loosen 4 screws fixing the lens unit.
Screw Screw
Lens unit
Fig. 3-36
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 42
(3)
Slide the lens unit to the right or left direction using the marks on the lens base as a guide. (Slide right when the copied ruler is magnified and slide left when the copied ruler is demagnified.) The following table shows how the reproduction ratio difference between the copied ruler and actual ruler corresponds to the movement amount of the lens unit. Reproduction-ratio error
Movement amount of unit
0.1%
0.5 mm
0.2%
0.9 mm
0.3%
1.4 mm
0.4%
1.8 mm
0.5%
2.3 mm
0.6%
2.7 mm
0.7%
3.2 mm
0.8%
3.6 mm
0.9%
4.1 mm
1.0%
4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig. 3-37
Note: Fine adjustment can be made in the “Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer)”. on the copied ruler and actual ruler match. (4)
Tighten 4 screws fixing the lens unit.
(5)
Attach the lens cover and original glass. Make a copy to confirm the reproduction ratio.
(6)
Repeat the procedure 1 to 5 until the marks on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 43
3
3.7.3
Scan motor
When the scan motor has been installed again, adjust the belt tension in the following procedure. (1)
Install the belt tension jig (spring).
(2)
Loosen 2 screws. Then tighten these screws when the belt is tensed enough. Screw
Belt tension jig
Scan motor
Screw
Fig. 3-38
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 44
3.8
Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System
3.8.1
Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding
The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. -> Move the guide to the front side when feeding paper from the bypass tray or the drawer. Move the front cover to the rear side when feeding paper from the Tandem LCF. (Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure).
The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. -> Move the guide to the rear side when feeding paper from the bypass tray or the drawer. Move the front cover to the front side when feeding paper from the Tandem LCF. (Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear]
[Rear]
Feeding direction
Feeding direction Center
Center
[Front]
[Front]
Fig. 3-39
Fig. 3-40
Bypass feeding 1) Loosen the screen. 2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side. 3) Tighten the screw.
Drawer feeding 1) Loosen 2 screws. 2) Move the entire guide to the front or rear side. 3) Tighten the screws.
(A)
(B)
(B) (A)
Fig. 3-41
Fig. 3-42
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 45 05/04
3
Tandem LCF (1)
Remove the screw 1 on the left side of the Tandem LCF and the screw 2 on the right side, and then temporarily fix it to the oblong hole. rescrew it to the oblong hole.
(2)
Loosen the screw 2 on the left side of the Tandem LCF and the screw 1 on the right side.
(3)
Remove screw 3, and then temporarily fix to the oblong hole.
(4)
Move the front cover of the Tandem LCF to the front or rear side, and then tighten screw 1 and 2.
(5)
Align the surface of the covers of the 2nd drawer and Tandem LCF. If they do not align, adjust the angle of the Tandem LCF front cover.
(6)
Tighten screw 6.
1
1 (A)
2
2 (B) 3
3
Fig. 3-43
Note: When the sideways deviation has been adjusted for the Tandem LCF feeding, adjust its protruding point. If the Tandem LCF drawer cannot be closed securely, decrease the protruding amount. (When the value decreases in increments of "1", the protruding amount decreases by 1 mm.) (1) Move 2 screws of the bracket on the rear side in the same increments as the digit of the scale at right on the front side. (In case of No. 5, 6 and 7, place the bracket upside down to install it.) Bracket
Protruded distance Max 7 Min 1
Screw
Fig. 3-44
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 46
3.8.2
Separation roller pressure force adjustment
In some cases the life of the separation roller may be shortened or paper jams and multiple feeding (EB50) may occur regardless of the operation frequency of the equipment. This comes from the weight or edge status of paper used and the amount of paper dust. Generally paper jams and multiple feeding often occur as the life end of the roller approaches. However, if they often occur even though its life has not yet reached its replacement timing, or if the life end comes much earlier than the scheduled replacement timing, the jams and multiple feeding can be suppressed by adjusting the pressure force of the separation roller. In this method, however, when the roller life becomes longer, jams and multiple feeding may occur frequently, and when the jams and multiple feeding are suppressed, the roller life may become shorter. Therefore, perform this adjustment while checking the status carefully, and if necessary, give a sufficient explanation to users.
3
(1) (2)
Take off the paper feed unit. (Refer to the Service Manual Chapter 9.) Remove 1 screw, and then screw it temporarily to an oblong hole located next to it. Note: Make a mark for the installation position of the bracket in advance.
Fig. 3-45
(3)
Move the bracket. Move to the direction A: The roller life will become longer (but multiple feeding may occur frequently). Move to the direction B: Multiple feeding will be suppressed (but the roller life may become shorter). Note: The recommended moving distance of the bracket is within 2 scale marks.
B
A
Fig. 3-46
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 47 06/09
(4) Tighten the screw that temporarily screwed. Note: In this step check the Mylar attached before the separation roller because the roller life may become shorter if this Mylar is scraped and worn. Reference value of distance C (from the edge of the plate to that of the Mylar): 7.9±0.2 mm * If the distance C is 7.0 mm or shorter, the Mylar must be replaced.
C
Fig. 3-47
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 48 06/09
3.9
Adjustment of Developer Unit
None of the doctor-sleeve gap, drum sleeve gap and developer sleeve pole position needs to be adjusted.
3
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
3 - 49
3.10 Adjustment of Fuser Unit 3.10.1
Adjustment of fuser roller pressure
Normally, the heat roller pressure need not be adjusted. However, it must be carried out when wrinkles frequently appear on copies made on plain paper. (1)
Open the RADF and make a copy with A3/LD size (solid copy).
(2)
Turn the power OFF after copying is finished.
(3)
Open the front cover quickly, and pull out the transfer/transport unit.
(4)
Insert the copy made in (1) into the fuser entrance guide with the image side facing down while turning the jam release lever CCW until the center of the copy paper isnipped by the heat roller.
(5)
Leave the copy paper for about 20 seconds, and then take it out by quickly turning the jam release lever CCW again.
(6)
Measure the width of the area nipped by the heat and pressure rollers at the front and the rear. Rear
R
Copy paper(solid black)
F
Nipped part Front Fig. 3-48
(7)
Remove 2 screws and take off the cleaning web unit.
(8)
If |F-R| >= 0.5mm, lift up the upper separation finger unit and loosen the fixing screw of the pressure spring on the side with the wider nip width. One half turn corresponds to narrowing the nipped section by about 0.5mm.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 ADJUSTMENT
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
3 - 50
(9)
If |F-R| [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER
Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
FAX NUMBER
FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-MAIL
E-mail address of supplier (*3)
CUSTOMER
Customer information
NAME TEL NUMBER E-MAIL ADDRESS SUPPLIER
Supplier information
NAME ADDRESS SERVICE TECHNICIAN
Service technician information
NUMBER NAME TEL NUMBER E-MAIL
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet. *2 Even when “FAX” is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number. *3 Even when “MAIL” is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
8
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8-3
-
Detailed setting for the order [ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING
***** TONER ORDER
Order information (TONER/USED TONER CONTAINER)
PART NUMBER
Part number to be ordered
CONDITION
The number of conditions (*1)
QUANTITY
The quantity to be ordered
AUTO ORDER
ON/OFF setting of order for each part
*1 The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the CONDITION. -
E-mail information of this equipment (common information) [ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS
E-mail address of this equipment (*1)
FROM NAME
E-mail username of this equipment
*1 When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is not sent. -
FAX number of this equipment (common information) [ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME
ID name of this equipment
FAX NUMBER
FAX number of this equipment
3) Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the setting list. [USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8-4
8.1.3
Setting procedure
(1)
Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to “0”.
(2)
Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
(3)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
(4)
Press the [ADMIN] button. • When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-1
(5)
Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button. * Confirm the password to the administrator.
8
Fig. 8-2
(6)
Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8-5
(7)
The SERVICE screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-3
(8)
Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
Fig. 8-4
(9)
Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8-6
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item. [FAX]/[MAIL]/[OFF] --Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order. (HTTP has not been supported yet.) [OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function. [FAX NUMBER] --- Input the FAX number of supplier. (To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the number.) [E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of supplier. (To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the address.) (12) Press the [NEXT] button. (Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen. Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.) (13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
8
Fig. 8-6
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8-7
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item. CUSTOMER [NAME] --- Input the name of customer. [TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of customer. [E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of customer. [ADDRESS] --- Input the address of customer. SUPPLIER [NAME] --- Input the name of supplier. [ADDRESS] --- Input the address of supplier. (15) Press the [NEXT] button. (16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-7
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required item. SERVICE TECHNICIAN [NUMBER] --- Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [NAME] --- Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [E-MAIL] --- Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [DESCRIPTION] --- Input the remarks if you want to register. RESULT PRINTING [OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]--- Whichever you press, the result list is printed. (18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8-8
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.
Fig. 8-8
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
Fig. 8-9
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button.
8
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8-9
(22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-10
(23) Press the [TONER] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)
Fig. 8-11
(24) Input the order information of TONER. [PART NUMBER] --- Toner number [CONDITION] --The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number specified for the CONDITION. [QUANTITY] --- Quantity to be ordered AUTO ORDER [ON]/[OFF]--- Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not. (25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 10
(26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
Fig. 8-12
(27) Press the [USER TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information of USED TONER CONTAINER in the same way of TONER.
Fig. 8-13
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information. (29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING.
8
(30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 11
Note: Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08). Items
08 code
Contents
The transmitting way of order [FAX] / [MAIL] / [OFF]
732
0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF
SUPPLIER [FAX NUMBER]
733
Maximum 32 digits
SUPPLIER [E-MAIL]
734
Maximum 192 letters
CUSTOMER [NAME]
738
Maximum 50 letters
CUSTOMER [TEL NUMBER]
739
Maximum 32 letters
CUSTOMER [E-MAIL]
740
Maximum 192 letters
CUSTOMER [ADDRESS]
741
Maximum 100 letters
SUPPLIER [NAME]
746
Maximum 50 letters
SUPPLIER [ADDRESS]
747
Maximum 100 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN [NUMBER]
742
Maximum 5 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN [NAME]
743
Maximum 50 letters
SERVICE TECHNICIAN [TEL NUMBER]
744
Maximum 32 digits
SERVICE TECHNICIAN [E-MAIL]
745
Maximum 192 letters
Remarks [DESCRIPTION]
748
Maximum 128 letters
TONER [PART NUMBER]
758
Maximum 20 digits
TONER [CONDITION]
760
1-99
TONER [QUANTITY]
759
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER [PART NUMBER]
761
Maximum 20 digits
USED TONER CONTAINER [CONDITION]
763
1-99
USED TONER CONTAINER [QUANTITY]
762
1-99
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 12 07/11
8.1.4
Order Sheet Format
The sample of order sheet is as follows. 1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.) *1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines) DATE & TIME CUSTOMER NUMBER CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS
:99-99-'99 99:99 :XXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE BLACK USED TONER CONTAINER
: XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX
QUANTITY 99 (*1) 99
DESCRIPTION AREA .............................................. ................................................................. DEVICE DESCRIPTION SERIAL NUMBER DEVICE FAX NUMBER DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL PRINT COUNTER 999999999 SCAN COUNTER 999999999
Fig. 8-14
8
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 13
2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order sheet.) SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST *1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines) Date&Time: '05-03-10 00:17 Customer Number: svc02 MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO720 SerialNumber: CV Device FAX Number: 1122 Device Email:
[email protected] OrderInformation: BLACK PartNumber: kuro-01 (*1) Quantity: 1 CounterInformation: PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:5 PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor:0 Black:0 ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0
Fig. 8-15
3) Result list *1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME CUSTOMER NUMBER CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS
ORDER XXXXXXXXX :99-99-'99 99:99 :XXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER
TONER CARTRIDGE BLACK USED TONER CONTAINER
QUANTITY
: XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX
99 (*1) 99
DESCRIPTION AREA .............................................. ................................................................. DEVICE DESCRIPTION SERIAL NUMBER DEVICE FAX NUMBER DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS
:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL PRINT COUNTER 999999999 SCAN COUNTER 999999999
Fig. 8-16
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 14
8.2 8.2.1
Service Notification Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or FAX. The following three are the items to be notified. •
Total Counter Transmit When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and time every month).
•
Service Call Transmit (E-mail only) When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call error.
•
PM Counter Transmit When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2
Setting
Note: When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails or FAXes are available. Confirm the details to the administrator.
[ 1 ] Preparation The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting. Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08). 08-774
Setting of notification display 0: Invalid (Default) 1: Valid
8
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 15
[ 2 ] Setting procedure (1)
Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password and press the [ENTER] button. • Confirm the password to the administrator.
(2)
Press the [SERVICE] button.
(3)
Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig. 8-17
Fig. 8-18
Fig. 8-19
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 16
(4)
Press the [E-MAIL] or [FAX] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION". • When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffective.
(5)
Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination. • When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Fig. 8-20
Fig. 8-21
•
Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
8
Fig. 8-22
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 17
(6)
Press the [ON] button to notify or the [OFF] button not to notify each item for E-mail and FAX. When Total Count Transmit is set to ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed. Then set the notification date with the following procedure.
Fig. 8-23
Set the date and time of the Total Counter. The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week also can be selected. • Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.) • Notify Date 1 • Notify Date 2 You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND NOW] button. •
Day of the week ([Sunday] to [Saturday] buttons) Pressing the buttons ([Sunday] to [Saturday]) of the desired day makes transmission on every specified day. More than one day can be selected. * This does not affect the settings of "Notify Date 1" and "Notify Date 2".
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 18 07/05
•
Notify Date 1 and Notify Date 2 ([DATE] button) Pressing the [DATE] button sets up to 2 dates on which you wand to send data. * This is not affected by the specified day of the week.
Fig. 8-24
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in "Notify Date 1" or "Notify Date 2" and press the [SET] button. ([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button. [SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be rectified.) •
Time setting ([CHANGE] button) Pressing the [CHANGE] button sets the time at which you wand to send data. This is the time when data are sent with "Day of the week", "Notify Date 1" and "Notify Date 2".
8 Fig. 8-25
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time". Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the minute column of "Time" and press the [SET] button. ([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button. [SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be rectified.) After all the settings are completed, press the [ENTER] button. The display returns to the screen in step (5).
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 19 07/05
(7)
Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
Note: Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08). Items Service Notification setting E-mail address 1 E-mail address 2 E-mail address 3 FAX number Total Counter Transmit setting Total counter transmission date setting Total counter transmission date setting(2) Day of total counter data transmission
08 code 767 768 777 778 1145 769 770 9880 9881
Total counter transmission interval setting (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Service Call Transmit setting PM Counter Transmit setting
776
Contents 0: OFF (Invalid) 1:E-mail 2:FAX Maximum 192 letters Maximum 192 letters Maximum 192 letters Maximum 32 digits 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid) 0 to 31 0 to 31 1 byte 00000000(0)-01111111(127) From the 2nd bit - Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday 00:00-23:59
775 771
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid) 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 20 07/05
8.2.3
Items to be notified
The items to be notified are shown below. 1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (XML file attached to E-mail has also the same format.) Subject: Counter Notification (In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".) 1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
21 22 23 24 25
Date : 01/01/2007 12:34 Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx SerialNumber : 1234567890 Total Counter : 00004787 Supplier: Name : SUPPLIER_NAME Tel Number : 1122334455 E-Mail :
[email protected] Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS Customer: Name : CUSTOMER_NAME Tel Number : 1234567890 E-Mail :
[email protected] Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician: Number : svc12 Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number : 0987654321 E-Mail :
[email protected] ChargeCounterFormat: LargeSizeChargeCount 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1 PMCounterFormat: LargeSizePMCount LargeSizePMPaperDefinition Charge Counter: Large Copy 00000000 Print 00000000 List 00000000 FAX 00000000 Copy Scan 00000000 FAX Scan 00000000 Net Scan 00000000 Transmit 00000000 Receive 00000000
1 0 Small 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Periodical Maintenance Counter: Set PM 00150000 Current PM 00004787 Set PMTime 00000000 CurrentPMTime 00000000 Printer Error History: Date Time ErrorCode ----------------------------------------------12/13/2006 16:44 F110 12/12/2006 22:28 F110 12/12/2006 22:23 F110 11/15/2006 22:23 F110 10/25/2006 11:12 F110
(*1)
8
Fig. 8-26
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 21 07/05
1
Date
2
Machine model name
3
Serial number
4
Total counter value
5
Supplier information
6
Customer information
7
Service technician information
8
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12
Number of output pages in the Copier Function
13
Number of output pages in the Printer Function
14
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode
15
Number of output pages in the FAX Function
16
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function
17
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function
18
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function
19
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function
20
Number of received pages in the FAX Function
21
PM count setting value
22
PM count present value
23
PM driving count setting value
24
PM driving count present value
25
History of error *1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 22 07/05
2) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by FAX *1 In case of the PM Counter Transmit, the title is replaced to "PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE NOTIFICATION". Sheet 1 COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1) 1 2 3 4
DATE MACHINE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER TOTAL COUNTER
: '07-01-01 12:34 : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx : 1234567890 : 00004787
5
CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS
: CUSTOMER_NAME : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS : 1234567890 :
[email protected]
6
SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL
: svc12 : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME : 0987654321 :
[email protected]
7
SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER SUPPLIER E-MAIL
: SUPPLIER_NAME : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS : 5544332211 :
[email protected]
Sheet 2 COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1) CHARGE COUNTER FORMAT 8 9
PM COUNTER FORMAT
LARGE SIZE CHARGE COUNT LARGE SIZE CHARGE PAPER DEFINITION
:1 :1
PRINT COUNTER COPY PRINT LIST FAX
SCAN COUNTER LARGE 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
SMALL 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
LARGE 00000000 00000000
SMALL 00000000 00000000
16 17 18
FAX COUNTER 19 20
25
TRANSMIT RECEIVE
:1 :0
10 11
CHARGE COUNTER
12 13 14 15
LARGE SIZE PM COUNT LARGE SIZE PM PAPER DEFINITION
COPY SCAN FAX SCAN NET SCAN
LARGE 00000000 00000000 00000000
SMALL 00000000 00000000 00000000
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER 21 22 23 24
SET PM CURRENT PM SET PM TIME CURRENT PM TIME
: : : :
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
8
PRINTER ERROR HISTORY DATE 06/12/13 06/12/12 06/12/12 06/11/15 06/10/25
TIME 16:44 22:28 22:23 22:23 11:12
ERROR CODE F110 F110 F110 F110 F110
DATE
TIME
ERROR CODE
(*2)
Fig. 8-27
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 23 07/05
1
Date
2
Machine model name
3
Serial number
4
Total counter value
5
Customer information
6
Service technician information
7
Supplier information
8
Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
9
Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter)
10
Count setting of large-sized paper (PM)
11
Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM)
12
Number of output pages in the Copier Function
13
Number of output pages in the Printer Function
14
Number of output pages at the List Print Mode
15
Number of output pages in the FAX Function
16
Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function
17
Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function
18
Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function
19
Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function
20
Number of received pages in the FAX Function
21
PM count setting value
22
PM count present value
23
PM driving count setting value
24
PM driving count present value
25
History of error *2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 24 07/05
3) Service Call Transmit Subject: Service Call Notification 1
Date: 01/01/2007 12:34 Machine Name: e-STUDIOxxx SerialNumber:1234567890 2 3
4 5 6
Function: Printer Severity: Error ErrorCode: XXXX Message: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
7
8
9
Supplier: Name Tel Number E-Mail Address
: SUPPLIER_NAME : 1122334455 :
[email protected] : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
Customer: Name Tel Number E-Mail Address
: CUSTOMER_NAME : 1234567890 :
[email protected] : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10
Service Technician: Number : svc12 Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number : 0987654321 E-Mail :
[email protected]
11
Printer Error History: Date Time ErrorCode -----------------------------------------12/13/2006 16:44 F110 12/12/2006 22:28 F110 (*1) 12/12/2006 22:23 F110 11/15/2006 22:23 F110 10/25/2006 11:12 F110
8 Fig. 8-28
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
8 - 25 07/05
1
Date (When an error occurs)
2
Machine model name
3
Serial number
4
Function: Fixed at "Printer"
5
Severity: Fixed at "Error"
6
Error code
7
Error message: The content of error is displayed.
8
Supplier information
9
Customer information
10
Service technician information
11
History of error *1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 REMOTE SERVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
8 - 26 07/05
9.
DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
In this equipment, the user data, setting items and SRAM data can be backed up / restored by turning the power ON after connecting the USB storage device on which the data cloning programs have been written to the USB connector mounted on the SYS board. The type of data to be backed up/restored can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows you to back up/restore only the necessary data individually or to back up/restore all data in a batch. Programs needed for data cloning with this method are given in the following table. Storage location Root directory
Program file name rootusb, clone_520_850
Important: • It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered / set data are lost. • The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data cloning operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed. - A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB). - A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Implementers Forum) Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass storage class) Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set) Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-only) *
• • • • • • • •
Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were originally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore, the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equivalent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1. Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use them for this operation. Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning. Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version. Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up. If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter values are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied. Before starting data cloning, check that “Acceptance of data cloning using USB storage device (08-9889)” is set at "0" (Accepted). If this is set at "1" (Not accepted), data cloning is disabled. In this case, ask the administrator to enable it on the TopAccess menu. Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9-1 07/11
9
[A] Data cloning procedure (Backup) Important: • The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening the properties of the device from Windows Explorer. • Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be damaged and the operation not carried out properly. • Back up or restore SRAM data only for the same equipment in the same ROM version. If SRAM data are restored into the other equipment, problems such as overlapping serial numbers may occur. (1)
Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device. • The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. • Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the PC in which these OS are installed.
(2)
Write the program file. • Write the data cloning program into the root directory.
(3)
Shut down the equipment.
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
USB storage device
Fig. 9-1
Notes: • Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together. • The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host). • In case the printer kit (GM-1050/1051), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040/2041) and scanner kit (GM-4010) are used, the data must be backed up after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9-2 07/11
(5)
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously. The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
Note: When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-3
(6)
Select the items to be performed with the digital keys. • In case of backup, select one of the following items. Select "1: User Data Back Up". Select "3: Setting Back Up". Select "5: SRAM Data Back Up". Note: After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9-3 07/11
(7)
Press the [1] button. The screen to select the user data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed up are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-4
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9-4 05/11
(8)
Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys. The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed. • To back up the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3" together.) • To back up the data individually, select the following items. Select "1: Address Book" only. Select "2: Mail Box" only. < Backing up Template> Select "3: Template" only. Select "4: Combined" only. Select "5: Department Code" only. < Backing up User management information> Select "6: User Info" only. E.g.: In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-5
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9-5 05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are backed up.) (9)
Press the [Start] button. The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-6
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-7
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9-6 05/11
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board. (13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously. The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-8
Notes: • After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time. • When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-9
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9-7 07/11
(14) Press the [3] button. The screen to select the setting backup item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be backed up are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-10
(15) Select the items to be backed up with the digital keys. The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed. • To back up the data individually, select the following items. Select "1: Network/Print Service" only. Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only. Select "3: Notification" only. Select "4: Directory Service" only. Select "5: FAX Kit" only. Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9-8 05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are backed up.) (16) Press the [Start] button. The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-11
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-12
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9-9 05/11
(19) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board. (20) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously. The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-13
Notes: • After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time. • When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-14
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 10 07/11
(21) Press the [5] button. The screen to select the SRAM data backup item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be backed up is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-15
(22) Select the item to be backed up with the digital keys. The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed. • To back up the data individually, select the following item. Select "1. SRAM". Note: The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model. The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.) (23) Press the [Start] button. The backup starts and the backing up status is displayed on the LCD screen.
9
Fig. 9-16
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 11 05/11
(24) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-17
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 12 05/11
[B] Data cloning procedure (Restore) Important: • The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format. Note that any device formatted in FAT32 or NTFS will not be operated. Its file system can be confirmed by opening the properties of the device from Windows Explorer. • Never turn the power of the equipment OFF during data cloning, or the data could be damaged and the operation not carried out properly. (1)
Shut down the equipment.
(2)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector(host)
USB storage device Fig. 9-18
Notes: • Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together. • The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host). • In case the printer kit (GM-1050/1051), printer/scanner kit (GM-2040/2041) and scanner kit (GM-4010) are used, the data must be restored after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 13 07/11
(3)
Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously. The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-19
Note: When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-20
(4)
Select the items to be performed with the digital keys. • In case of restore, select the following items. Select "2: User Data Restore". Select "4: Setting Restore". Select "6: SRAM Data Restore". Note: After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 14 07/11
(5)
Press the [2] button. The screen to select the user data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored are shown after the mark "*". (The items "4", "5" and "6" are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-21
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 15 05/11
(6)
Select the items to be restored with the digital keys. The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed. • To restore the data in a batch, select "4", "5" or "6". (Selecting "4" performs "1", "2" and "3" together.) • To restore the data individually, select the following items. Be sure to select the same item as the one backed up individually. Select "1: Address Book" only. Select "2: Mail Box" only. < Restoring Template> Select "3: Template" only. Select "4: Combined" only. Select "5: Department Code" only. Select "6: User Info" only. E.g.: In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-22
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 16 05/11
(The following screens are given as an example of when all items are restored.) (7)
Press the [Start] button. The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-23
(8)
"Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-24
(9)
Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info"). Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied. Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] → [ADMIN] → Enter the password → [COUNTER] → [DEPARTMENT SETTING] → Enter the password → [RESET ALL COUNTERS] * Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be disabled.
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 17 05/11
9
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board. (12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously. The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-25
Notes: • After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time. • When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-26
(13) Press the [4] button. The screen to select the setting restore item is displayed. In this screen, the items to be restored are shown after the mark "*". (No items are selected in the screen by default.)
Fig. 9-27
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 18 07/11
(14) Select the items to be restored with the digital keys. The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed. • To restore the data individually, select the following items. Select "1: Network/Print Service" only. Select "2: SaveAsFile/Email/InternetFAX" only. Select "3: Notification" only. Select "4: Directory Service" only. Select "5: FAX Kit" only. Select "6: WirelessLAN/Bluetooth Kit" only. Note: Be sure to restore the same option items in the same condition as when the option items were backed up.
(The following screens are given as an example of when all TopAccess items are restored.) (15) Press the [Start] button. The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-28
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 19 05/11
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-29
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 20 05/11
(18) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board. (19) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously. The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-30
Notes: • After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time. • When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-31
(20) Press the [6] button. The screen to select the SRAM data restore item is displayed. In this screen, the item to be restored is shown after the mark "*". (The item is not selected in the screen by default.)
9
Fig. 9-32
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 21 07/11
(21) Select the item to be restored with the digital keys. The mark "*" is shown on the selected item. The mark "*" can be deleted or added each time the corresponding digital key is pressed. • To restore the data individually, select the following item. Select "1. SRAM". Note: The backup/restore of the SRAM data can be performed only for the same model. The ROM version must be the same when the data are backed up and restored.
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.) (22) Press the [Start] button. The restore starts and the restoring status is displayed on the LCD screen.
Fig. 9-33
(23) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly completed.
Fig. 9-34
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 22 05/11
[C] Confirmation of the error "Back Up ERROR X" (X: Error number) is displayed at the top of the LCD screen when the data have not been properly backed up / restored. In this case, turn the power OFF and then check the following items. After confirming and solving the problem, back up / restore the data again from the beginning. • Does the USB storage device meet the conditions being used for this cloning? • Is the updated program file written on the USB storage device properly? • Is the USB storage device installed properly? • Is the USB storage device or the equipment damaged?
Fig. 9-35
Error number ERROR 1 ERROR 2 ERROR 3 ERROR 4 ERROR 5 ERROR 6 ERROR 7 ERROR 8 ERROR 9 ERROR 10 ERROR 11
Error content Copy error I/F error USB memory full error Working folder error File not found error Security error Checksum error Model check error Version check error Destination check error Serial number check error
9
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
9 - 23 05/11
[D] Backup file Backed up data files are encrypted. The folder "user_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it. Data item Address book Mailbox Template Back up the Address book, Mailbox and Template in a batch Department management information User management information
File name BACKUP_ADDR.sct BACKUP_MBOX.sct BACKUP_TEMP.sct BACKUP_ALL.sct BACKUP_Department.sct BACKUP_User.sct
The folder "setting_data" is created in the root directory and the following files are stored in it. Data item Network / Print service SaveAsFile / Email / InternetFAX Notification setting Directory Service FAX setting Wireless LAN setting / Bluetooth setting
File name network.sct scan.sct notice.sct ldap.sct fax.sct wl.sct, bl.sct
The folder "sram_data" is created in the root directory and the following file is stored in it. Data item
File name
SRAM
*
sram.sct
In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder. Back up item
File name user_data.txt setting_data.txt sram_data.txt
User data Setting item data SRAM data
Version: VTD08.100 J Serial Number: 0123456789 Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
•
File format (user_data.txt, setting_data.txt, sram_data.txt: all in common) Line 1: Version Line 2: Serial number Line 3: Date
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 DATA CLONING with USB STORAGE DEVICE
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
9 - 24
FG
N G L
LIVE
Black
NEUTRAL
Breaker 10A
White Black
2
1
Noise Filter 4
3 Black
White
Breaker 20A
White Black
2
1
Noise Filter
White
Black
FIL board
4
3
1
CN440 4 Black
White
2
J657 1
2 2
J657 1 1
Brown Blue 1 2 1 2
3 2 6 5
Blue White Brown Black
Brown
Blue
Brown Blue
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
10 - 1
06/09
J
I
1
2
J654 4
Blue
L
K
Brown
Fuser detection switch
4 3 J523 4 3
Black White J654 3
White Black
Black
White
D
C
Black White Brown Blue J611 2 2 1 1 3 3
1 2 3 4 J655 1 2 3 4
Blue Black Brown
J638 White 1 1 Black 2 2
Brown
Blue
White
C
F1
F2
S
CN454
IH coil control circuit
CN453
Center IH coil
G
3
White Black
Dram damp heater thermostat
Black
White
Scanner damp heater thermostat
FUS board
1
White Black Black
Dram damp heater
J34 J28 DH-SCN-N 1 1 DH-SCN-L 2 2
Scanner damp heater
CN451 J608 N 1
Side IH coil
J840 1 1 2 2
J839 2 2 1 1
Dram damp heater (Front)
Dram damp heater (Rear)
Scanner damp heater (Right) 1 1 2 2
J32
Scanner damp heater (Left) 1 1 2 2
J31
DC
DC
Fuser roller side thermostat
IH board
White
Switching regulator (Cover switch line)
Switching regulator (Main switch line)
Fuser roller center thermostat
6
3
4
Finisher (Option)
MJ-1029 only
Switching regulator
J658 1 2
CN401 1
CN452
CN607 CN450 1 L
Side IH coil
Fuser roller
Fuser
Brown
Blue
Black
White
White Black
ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/DAU/CND/KRD/TWD model: Standard, TNA/NAD/MJD/DMJ model: Option
Black
White
J637 DH-DRM-N 3 3 2 2 DH-DRM-L 1 1
J33 1 1 2 2
1 1
White Black
Blue White Brown Black
J645 4 4
G E H F
Main switch
Cover interlock switch
3 2 6 5
4 4
J521 1 1
1 2 J652 1 2
Black
White
Brown Blue
FG
N NEUTRAL G L LIVE Black
3
CN441 1
TNA/NAD/SAD model of all equipment, TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
Inlet (AC IN)
ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/DAU/MJD/DMJ/CND/KRD model of all equipment, TWD model of e-STUDIO850
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
10.1 AC Wire Harness White
Black Blue Brown
Blue
10
Fig. 10-1
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723/850/853 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
© 2005 - 2007 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
10 - 2
H
G
F
E
D
C
MODEM board
PC interface (IEEE1284)
Speaker
Download jig (for FAX)
+ -
CN503 1 2
D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] BOOTCS-0 A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDET0-0 +5.1VA LEDDL-0
CN602 34 1 33 2 3 32 31 4 5 30 6 29 28 7 8 27 26 9 10 25 11 24 12 23 13 22 21 14 15 20 19 16 17 18 18 17 16 19 20 15 14 21 13 22 23 12 11 24 25 10 9 26 27 8 28 7 6 29 30 5 4 31 32 3 2 33 34 1
HRNS-HDD-DES-390
1
TXB2 RXIN2 CML2-1 LD2 SG ATT3DB2-1 RLADJ12 RLADJ22 SG AG -12VA AG +12VA NC +5.1VA AG CI2-0 ANSDET2 REVA2-0 REVB2-0 NC NC +5.1VA AG +5.1VA -12VA AG +12VA NC NC
TXOUT1 RXIN1 CML1-1 LD1 EXTRG ATT3DB1-1 RLADJ11 RLADJ21 RGCLK AG -12VA AG +12VA +12VF 20Hz/16Hz AG CI1-0 ANSDET1 REVA1-0 REVB1-0 INTHOOK-0 EXTHOOK-0 +5.1VA AG +5.1VA -12VA AG +12VA +12VF AG
A
CN401 SG 8 AG 7 NC 6 NC 5 NC 4 -12VA 3 +12VA 2 NC 1
CN702 +12VF 1 AG 2 NC 3
CN812 1 2 3 4
CN9 or CN4 CN502 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30
CN9 or CN4 CN501 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30
CN805 CN701 +5.1VA 1 1 DA1 2 2 +5.1VA 3 3 DD0 4 4 +5.1VA 5 5 DD3 6 6 +5.1VA 7 7 DD6 8 8 +5.1VA 9 9 DD9 10 10 SG 11 11 DD12 12 12 SG 13 13 SG 14 14 SG 15 15 SG 16 16 SG 17 17 SG 18 18 +3.3VA 19 19 INTRQ-1 20 20 +3.3VA 21 21 +5.1VA 22 22 -12VA 23 23 SG 24 24 +12VA 25 25 DA0 26 26 DA2 27 27 IDECS1-1 28 28 DD[1] 29 29 DD[2] 30 30 DD[4] 31 31 DD[5] 32 32 DD[7] 33 33 DD[8] 34 34 DD[10] 35 35 DD[11] 36 36 DD[13] 37 37 DD[14] 38 38 DD[15] 39 39 DIOR-0 40 40 DIOW-0 41 41 DMACK-0 42 42 DLDCS0-1 43 43 RESET-0 44 44 DMARQ-1 45 45 NC 46 46 WAKEUP-1 47 47 SG 48 48 SG 49 49 NC 50 50
To Slot [0] or [1]
TXOUT2 +5.1VA +12VA +3.3VA MOD2DMA-1 SG MEM2CS-0 +5.1VA MEMRD2-0 CLKOE-1 TXEN2-1 +5.1VA A[16] A[14] A[12] A[10] A[8] A[6] A[4] A[2] A[0] +5.1VA CEP1RST-0 +5.1VA SG CEPCLK SG D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] D[8] D[10] D[12] D[14] SG MOD2DET-0 SG DREQC2-1 DACKC2-0 RXIN2 AG -12VA AG MD2INT-1 MOD2CS-0 MOD2RST-0 SG RXEN2-1 MEMWRH2-0 MEMWRL2-0 A[18] A[17] A[15] A[13] A[11] A[9] A[7] A[5] A[3] A[1] CPURST-0 CEP2INT-1 +5.1VA +5.1VA IORD2-0 IOWR2-0 D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] D[9] D[11] D[13] D[15] +5.1VA +5.1VA CEP2CS-0 DREQD2-1 DACKD2-0
Parallel interface kit
CN401 CN600 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 80 80
BUSY SELECT NACK NFAULT PEERR DATA[0] DATA[1] DATA[2] DATA[3] DATA[4] DATA[5] DATA[6] DATA[7] NINIT NSTROB NSELIN NAUTDF HLH SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG PLH
CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Scrambler board
FAX interface board
FAX board
B
CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
NCU board [Line 1]
NCU board [Line 2]
CN109
Option
To Slot [1]
To Slot [0]
CN811 2 1 NC 3
FAX power relay board
TRST# +12VA TMS TD1 +5.1VA INTA# INTC# +5.1VA RESERVED +3.3VA RESERVED
+3.3VAUX RST# +3.3VA GNT# SG PME# AD[30] +3.3VA AD[28] AD[26] SG AD[24] IDSEL +3.3VA AD[22] AD[20] SG AD[18] AD[16] +3.3VA FRAME# SG TRDY# SG STOP# +3.3VA RESERVED RESERVED SG PAR AD[15] +3.3VA AD[13] AD[11] SG AD[09] SG SG C/BE[0]# +3.3VA AD[06] AD[04] SG AD[02] AD[00] +3.3VA REQ64# +5.1VA +5.1VA -12VA TCK SG TDO +5.1VA +5.1VA INTB# INTD# PRSNT1# RESERVED PRSNT2#
RESERVED SG CLK SG REQ# +3.3VA AD[31] AD[29] SG AD[27] AD[25] +3.3VA C/BE[3]# AD[23] SG AD[21] AD[19] +3.3VA AD[17] C/BE[2]# SG IRDY# +3.3VA DEVSEL# SG LOCK# PERR# +3.3VA SERR# +3.3VA C/BE[1]# AD[14] SG AD[12] AD[10] M66EN SG SG AD[08] AD[07] +3.3VA AD[05] AD[03] SG AD[01] +3.3VA ACK64# +5.1VA +5.1VA
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 A31 A32 A33 A34 A35 A36 A37 A38 A39 A40 A41 A42 A43 A44 A45 A46 A47 A48 A49 A50 A51 A52 A53 A54 A55 A56 A57 A58 A59 A60 A61 A62 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 B31 B32 B33 B34 B35 B36 B37 B38 B39 B40 B41 B42 B43 B44 B45 B46 B47 B48 B49 B50 B51 B52 B53 B54 B55 B56 B57 B58 B59 B60 B61 B62
Slot [1] : CN803 Slot [0] : CN802
PCI slot
A
Download jig (for SYS)
DDR DIMM
50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN107 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
CN801 CN116 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 52 52 53 53 54 54 55 55 56 56 57 57 58 58 59 59 60 60 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 69 69 70 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 80 80 81 81 82 82 83 83 84 84 85 85 86 86 87 87 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 91 92 92 93 93 94 94 95 95 96 96 97 97 98 98 99 99 100 100 101 101 102 102 103 103 104 104 105 105 106 106 107 107 108 108 109 109 110 110 111 111 112 112 113 113 114 114 115 115 116 116 117 117 118 118 119 119 120 120
DATA0 DATA2 DATA4 DATA6 DATA8 DATA10 DATA12 DATA14 A21 A19 A17 A15 A13 A11 A09 A07 A05 A03 RDX CS0-A CS0-B +3.3VA +3.3VA SG SG DATA1 DATA3 DATA5 DATA7 DATA9 DATA11 DATA13 DATA15 A20 A18 A16 A14 A12 A10 A08 A06 A04 A02 A22 /CS +3.3VA RMSL /WRX SG SG
+3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA SG -12VA -12VA +5.1VA +5.1VA +3.3VA IDSEL0 OPBINT(0) SG IDSEL1 SG PCICLK(3) SG REQ(1) REQ(0) +3.3VA AD[31] AD[29] SG AD[27] AD[25] +3.3VA C/BE[3] AD[23] SG AD[21] AD[19] +3.3VA AD[17] C/BE[2] SG IRDY +3.3VA DEVSEL SG LOCK PERR +3.3VA SERR +3.3VA C/BE[1] AD[14] SG AD[12] AD[10] M66EN SG AD[8] AD[7] +3.3VA AD[5] AD[3] SG AD[1] +3.3VA +5.1VA SG +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA SG +12VA +12VA +5.1VA +5.1VA +3.3VA OPBINT(1) +3.3VA PCIRST +3.3VA PCICLK(4) +3.3VA GNT(1) GNT(0) SG PME AD[30] +3.3VA AD[28] AD[26] SG AD[24] +3.3VA +3.3VA AD[22] AD[20] SG AD[18] AD[16] +3.3VA FRAME SG TRDY SG STOP +3.3VA +3.3VA SG SG PAR AD[15] +3.3VA AD[13] AD[11] SG AD[9] SG C/BE[0] +3.3VA AD[6] AD[4] SG AD[2] AD[0] +3.3VA +5.1VA +5.1VA
M
+5.1VD APSC-0 SG
+5.1VD APS3-0 SG
+5.1VD APS2-0 SG
+5.1VD APS1-0 SG
J23 3 2 1
J22 3 2 1
J21 3 2 1
J20 3 2 1
HOME-SNR (S6)
J18 3 2 1
CN3 1 2 3
B7 B8 B9
B4 B5 B6
B1 B2 B3
A7 A8 A9
A4 A5 A6
CN2 A1 A2 A3
CN1 1 2 3 4 5
CN115 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124
1 2 3 4 5 6
CN8
CN5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
SCNM-BB +36VC SCNM-B SCNM-AB +36VC SCNM-A
+5.1VD +5.1VD SG SG CCDRS-0 SG CCDCP-0 SG CCDSH-0 SG CCDCK2B-0 SG CCDCK2A-0 SG CCDCK1A-0 SG CCD-EVEN-R SG CCD-EDD-R SG CCD-EVEN-L SG CCD-ODD-L SG AG AG AG +12VD +12VD +12VD
+3.3VA FRAME CLKRUN TRDY SERR STOP SG +3.3VA PERR DEVSEL C/BE[1] SG AD[14] AD[15] SG AD[13] AD[12] AD[11] AD[10] SG SG AD[09] AD[08] C/BE[0] AD[07] +3.3VA +3.3VA AD[05] AD[06] AD[04] RSV AD[02] AD[03] AD[00] +5.1VA RSV WIP AD[01] RSV WIP SG SG AC SYNC M66EN AC SDATA IN AC SDATA OUT AC BIT CLK AC CODEC ID0 AC CODEC ID1 AC RESET MOD AUDIO MON RSV AUDIO GND SG SYS AUDIO OUT SYS AUDIO IN SYS AUDIO OUT GND SYS AUDIO IN GND AUDIO GND AUDIO GND RSV MPC1ACT VCC5V +3.3VA
Download jig (for RADF)
SG HOME-0 +5.1VD
+5.1VD APSR-0 SG
NC +24VE FANSLG-0
DG DG LMPON-0A +24VE +24VE
Option
J24 3 2 1
J19 1 2 2 1
CN1 5 4 3 2 1
CN115 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
JPD/SAD/ASD/ASU/ AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/ TWD model only
APS1 (S1)
APS2 (S2)
APS3 (S3)
APS-C (S4)
APS-R (S5)
J25 1 2
CN2 1 2 INV-EXP (INV-EXP) 3 4
SLGFAN-MOT (M23)
LP-EXPO (EXP)
TIP RING BPMJ-3 BPMJ-1 BPMJ-6 BPMJ-2 BPMJ-7 BPMJ-4 BPMJ-8 BPMJ-5 LED1 GRNP LED2 YELP ENABLE/DISABLE LED2 YELN CHSCND RSV INTB +5.1VA +3.3VA INTA RSV RSV SG +3.3VA CLK RST SG +3.3VA REQ GNT +3.3VA SG AD[31] PME AD[29] RSV SG AD[30] AD[27] +3.3VA AD[25] AD[28] RSV AD[26] C/BE[3] AD[24] AD[23] IDSEL SG SG AD[21] AD[22] AD[19] AD[20] SG PAR AD[17] AD[18] C/BE[2] AD[16] IRDY +3.3VA
Wireless LAN adapter
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
J26
CN11 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2
CN31 3 DFLD-EXIT-SNR 2 (S68) 1 CN34 3 DFAPS-SNR 2 (S64) 1
CN29 3 DFOPN-SNR 2 (S65) 1 CN30 3 DFREAD-SNR 2 (S69) 1
DF-LD-SOL (SOL5)
DENG-SOL (SOL6)
DF-SD-SOL (SOL4)
1
CN32 1 2 3
+24V LSOL
RSOL
+24V
+24V SSOL
5 6
4
3
CN4 1 2
4 5 6
CN3 1 2 3
+5.1VD SG APS NC
CN33 +5.1VD 3 *LOUTS 2 LOUTLED 1
+5.1VD *READS READLED
10 11 12 13
7 8 9
4 5 6
CN54 CN11 +5.1VD 6 1 SG 5 2 DFOPNS 4 3
4 3 5 2 6 1
CN55 1 2 3
+24VG *COPSW C_COM
+24VG *DFOPSW DF_COM
CN25 3 NC 2
CN28 CN27 1 2 2 1
CN26 1 2 3
CN24 CN23 1 2 2 1
CN21 4 DF-COVINTLCK-SW 2 (SW10) 1 CN22 4 DF-OPNINTLCK-SW 2 (SW9) 1
KMOT_*B KMOT_B KMOT_*A KMOT_A +24V +24V
RMOT_*B RMOT_B RMOT_*A RMOT_A +24V +24V
CN8 1 2 3 4 5 6
CN9 1 2 3 4 5 6
LMOT_*B LMOT_B LMOT_*A LMOT_A +24V +24V NC
SMOT_*B SMOT_B SMOT_*A SMOT_A +24V +24V
CN6 1 2 3 4 5 6
CN7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
UDMOT_*B UDMOT_B UDMOT_*A UDMOT_A +24V +24V
CN5 1 2 3 4 5 6
M
DF-FEED-MOT (M37)
DF-READ-MOT (M36)
DF-L-EXIT-MOT (M39)
DF-S-EXIT-MOT (M40)
DF-TRY-MOT (M38)
M
M
M
M
M
PWA-F-SLG (SLG)
SCAN-MOT (M1)
PWA-F-CCD (CCD)
PWA-F-SYS (SYS)
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
CN109
SG DQ4 DQ5 VDD DM0 DQ6 DQ7 SG NC NC NC VDD DQ14 DQ13 DM1 VDD DQ14 DQ15 CKE1 VDD NC DQ20 A12 SG DQ21 A11 DM2 VDD DQ22 A8 DQ23 SG A6 DQ28 DQ29 VDD DM3 A3 DQ30 SG DQ31 CB4 CB5 VDD CK0 /CK0 SG DMB A10 CB6 VDD CB7 SG DQ36 DQ37 VDD DM4 DQ38 DQ39 SG DQ44 /RAS DQ45 VDD /CS0 /CS1 DMS SG DQ46 DQ47 NC VDD DQS2 DQS3 NC VDD DM6 DQS4 DQS5 VDD NC DQ60 DQ61 SG DM7 DQ62 DQ63 VDD SA0 SA1 SA2 VDD-SPD
93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
D0 D2 D4 D6 *RD A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 A12 A14 A16 A18 SG SG D1 D3 D5 D7 *CS2 A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 A13 A15 A17 ROMSEL +5.1VD LED
Download jig (for SLG)
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TXD+ TXDRXIN+ GND GND RXINGND GND
INV-LCD (INV-LCD)
CN6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
CN118 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
DFTRY-VR-SNR (S54)
CN44 3 DFTRY-SNR 2 (S53) 1
CN38 3 DFSIZE-SNR1 2 (S56) 1 CN39 3 DFSIZE-SNR2 2 (S57) 1 CN40 3 DFSIZE-SNR3 2 (S58) 1 CN41 3 DFRGST-SNR 2 (S55) 1
CN35 3 DFCOV-SNR 2 (S61) 1 CN36 3 DFEMP-SNR 2 (S60) 1 CN37 3 DFU-LMT-SNR 2 (S59) 1
PWA-F-ADF (ADF)
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
MDT[0] MDT[2] MDT[4] MDT[6] MRD-0 MAD[0] MAD[2] MAD[4] MAD[6] MAD[8] MAD[10] PNLDT1 PNLDT3 MAD[16] MAD[18] SG SG MDT[1] MDT[3] MDT[5] MDT[7] PNLCS-0 MAD[1] MAD[3] MAD[5] MAD[7] MAD[9] PNLDT0 PNLDT2 MAD[15] MAD[17] ROMDT-0 +5.1VD LED
CN43 12 11 10
CN45 1 2 3
CN46 3 2 1
10 3 11 2 12 1
7 6 8 5 9 4
4 9 5 8 6 7
CN42 1 2 3
CN9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CN10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
PWA-F-KEY2 (KEY2)
10 11 12
7 8 9
4 5 6
CN13 1 2 3
7 8 9
4 5 6
+5.1VD TRVR SG NC 4 5 6 7
CN14 +5.1VD 1 SG 2 TRYS 3
+5.1VD SG REGS
+5.1VD SG SIZS3
+5.1VD SG SIZS2
+5.1VD SG SIZS1
+5.1VD SG ULMTS
+5.1VD SG EMPS
CN12 +5.1VD 1 SG 2 COPS 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
+5.1VD SG CSEN NC
4 5 6
CN114 +12VA 1 SG 2 SG 3 +5.1VA 4
+5.1VD *SSBS SSBLED
CN51 3 2 1 CN50 1 2 3
+24V PWRFN-0A
CN53 3 DF2 SD-REV-SNR (S66) 1
CN52 3 DF2 SD-EXIT-SNR (S67) 1
CN49 3 DF2 MID-TR-SNR (S70) 1
CN48 3 DF2 LENG-SNR (S63) 1
CN1 1 2 CN2 1 2
CN404 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+36VD PG +24VE DG +24VG +24VG DG DG
+24V PWRFN-0A
CN408 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN405 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN171 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
CN170
+3.3VC SG +5.1VD +5.1VD SG SG +12VD AG PWRDWN-1
+3.3VA +3.3VA SG SG +5.1VA +5.1VA +5.1VB SG SG SG AG AG PWR-DN +12VB PWR-EN +12VA NC NC NC NC
CN47 3 DF2 L-LMT-SNR (S62) 1
PS-FAN-MOT2 (M35)
M
CN101 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 11 14 12 13
PWA-F-DSP (DSP)
A
CN113 /RESET 1 SG 2 DD7 3 DD8 4 DD6 5 DD9 6 DD5 7 DD10 8 DD4 9 DD11 10 DD3 11 DD12 12 DD2 13 DD13 14 DD1 15 DD14 16 DD0 17 DD15 18 SG 19 NC(KEY) 20 MDARQ 21 SG 22 /DIOW 23 SG 24 /DIOR 25 SG 26 IORDY 27 SG 28 /DMACK 29 SG 30 INTRQ 31 NC(RESERVED) 32 DA1 33 /PDIAG 34 DA0 35 DA2 36 /CS0 37 /CS1 38 /DASP 39 SG 40
Standard
PS-FAN-MOT1 (M34)
+5.1VD *LNGS LNGLED
CN16 +5.1VD 1 SG 2 SHS 3
7 8 9 10
4 5 6
CN5-2A
M
NC
18 18 NC 19 19 NC 20 20
J501 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17
CN15 +5.1VD 1 SG 2 DLMTS 3
FG
J17 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1
CN102 SG 26 SG 25 EXPON-0 24 +3.3VC 23 SG 22 SYSRST-0 21 SG 20 SRTS-0 19 SRXD-1A 18 STXD-1 17 SCTS-0A 16 SG 15 SG 14 TX0-0 13 TX0-1 12 SG 11 TX1-0 10 TX1-1 9 SG 8 TX2-0 7 TX2-1 6 SG 5 CLK-1 4 CLK-0 3 SG 2 SG 1
TCP (TCP)
+3.3VC SG +5.1VD SG +12VD AG +24VE DG +36VD PG PWRDWN-1
LAN connector (10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX)
Option
CN112 VDD 1 NC 2 NC 3 D4 D+ 5 NC 6 NC 7 DETACH 8 NC 9 SG 10 NC 11 NC 12 /RESET 13 NC 14 NC 15 NC 16 NC 17 NC 18 NC 19 SG 20
LCD(LCD)
CN4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CN1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN4-2 CN4-1
CN6 1 2 3 INV_VDD5V INV_CONT INV_GND CN1 1 2 3 CN2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 J16 DFAK-0 1 1 DFSCST-0 2 2 DFRXD-0 3 3 SG 4 4 DFTXD-0 5 5 SG 6 6 DFRAK-0 7 7 DFRRQ-0 8 8 DFRQ-0 9 9 DFCNT-0 10 10 NC 11 11
Bluetooth module
12 13 NC 14 15 16 17 18 NC 19 20 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CN2 3 1 2 4 5 6 7
3
FG
CN2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 INV_VDD5V INV_GND OUTP4PW OUTP3PW COM2PW RET8 RET7 RET6 SCN4 LW MID UP INV_CONT FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
PWA-F-KEY1 (KEY1)
4
4
HDD (HDD)
CN407 +5.1VE 1 +5.1VF 2 SG 3 SG 4 +3.3VB 5 +12VC 6 SG 7 AG 8 PWR-DN 9 CN403 +24VD 1 DG 2 +36VC 3 PG 4 +5.1VH 5 SG 6
SG +5.1VH +5.1VH SG DDISO2-1 WRAPC2-0 SG LVDS2-0 LVDS2-1 SG SG WRLV2-1 SG +5.1VH +5.1VH SG
J201 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 11 12 13 14 15 NC 16
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J417 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9
NC
SG +5.1VH +5.1VH SG DDISO1-1 WRAPC1-0 SG LVDS1-0 LVDS1-1 SG SG WRLV1-1 SKHSLV1-1 +5.1VH +5.1VH SG
J201 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 4 1 2 14 12 10
CN211 5 15 6 16 7 13 8 11 9
J208 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J207 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
J213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
VBUS0 DD+ SG VBUS1 DD+ SG
CN117 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
VBUS0 DD+ SG VBUS1 DD+ SG
CN111 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
e-STUDIO850/853
PWA-F-LDR2 (LDR2)
PWA-F-LDR1 (LDR1)
Internal USB connector (for Data overwrite kit)
USB connector (Host)
USB connector (Device)
VBUS DD+ SG
CN110 1 2 3 4
SE_VCC SE_VOUT SE_GND SE_TOUT
M
TNR-MOTINTLCK-SW (SW11)
Option
J502 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4
J670 1 10 2 9 3 8 4 7 5 6 6 5 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1
1 2 3 4 5
M
PWA-F-SNS (SNS)
POL-MOT (M2)
NC NC NC NC
Finisher
M
MIR-GLV (GLV)
PWA-F-SNS (SNS)
POL-MOT (M2)
e-STUDIO850/853
CN212 GLV2-0 1 GLV2-1 2
J217 2 1
J215 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J210 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 SG SG +5.1VF +5.1VF +5.1VF BMRST-0 BMSW3-0 BMSW2-0 BMSW1-0 BMSW0-0 CSEXT-0 LVCNT-0 OSEL-0 BMDIN-1 BMSCK-1 CSINT-0 DOUT EOUT MOUT NOUT +5.1VF NC OUTAB-0 +5.1VF NC BMCK-0 +5.1VF EOCNV-0 RSTITG-0 WLOWL-0 WUPPL-0 +5.1VF +5.1VF SG SG
5 4 3 2 1
CN206 PMCLK-1A 1 PMOK-0A 2 PMON-0A 3 DG 4 +24VD 5
e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723
CN203 CN202 +5.1VE 1 3 BEAMDT-0 2 2 SG 1 3
CN209 27V 1 DG 2 PMON-0A 3 PMOK-0A 4 PMCLK-1A 5
M
Coin controller
SYS-FAN-MOT (M33)
CN204 IDATX4 1 IDATX3 2 IDATX2 3 IDATX1 4 IDATX0 5 SG 6 MVDEN 7 RGTAS 8 PLRST 9 LSBSY 10 LCTS 11 LRTS 12 LRXD 13 LTXD 14 IVSYNC 15 IHSYNC 16 SG 17 IRCLK 18 SG 19 IVDEN 20 SG 21 IHDEN 22 SG 23 IDCLK 24 SG 25 IDATX7 26 IDATX6 27 IDATX5 28
Option
PS-ACC (PS)
A B
J501 U-FRNT-COV-SW 2 (SW7) 1
CN108 +12VA 1 SG 2
D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] CS2-0 A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDT +5.1VE LED-1
J592 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1
CN806 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
CN104 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
J503 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
J628 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18
SFBCOV-SNR (S25)
5
J517 3 2 1 J599 1 6 2 5 3 4 ATTRN-SNR (S12) 4 3 5 2 6 1 J613 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 J558 3 FEEDCOV-SNR 2 (S26) 1
J505 1 2 TNR-TR-MOT 3 (M6) 4 NC 5
A B J504 1 TNREMP-SNR 2 (S10) 3 TNR-SW (SW2)
TNR-MOT (M5)
SE_VCC SE_VOUT SE_GND SE_TOUT
TEMP/HUMI-SNR (S7)
CN106 L/S 1 FULL-C 2 NONO-C 3 B/W 4 +5.1VA 5 SG 6 NC 7
M
CN7 1 2 3 4
CN8 1 2 3 4 CN1 4 3 2 1
2
CN410 +12VF 1 NC 2 AG 3
DISP FRM LOAD CP VDD VSS DF D0 D1 D2 D3 VEE VLCD
CN5-2B CN5-1B FG SE_TOUT SE_GND SE_VOUT SE_VCC RET1 SCN1 SCN2 SCN3 SCN4 OUTP8 OUTP7 OUTP6 OUTP5 OUTP4 OUTP3 OUTP2 OUTP1 COM1 COM2
Download jig (for PLG)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN5-1A SG RET8 RET7 RET6 RET5 RET4 RET3 RET2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CN1 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 J526 A15 A1 A14 A2 A13 A3 A12 A4 A11 A5 A10 A6 A9 A7 A8 A8 A9 A7 A6 A10 A5 A11 A4 A12 A3 A13 A2 A14 A1 A15 B15 B1 B14 B2 B13 B3 B12 B4 B11 B5 B10 B6 B9 B7 B8 B8 B7 B9 B6 B10 B5 B11 B4 B12 B3 B13 B2 B14 B1 B15 CN105 XSCL-1A A1 LP-1A A2 WF-1A A3 YP-1A A4 SG A5 BZON-0A A6 CPPOW-0A A7 LDCLKA A8 LDDAT-0A A9 LDLTH-0A A10 LDON1-0A A11 LDON0-0A A12 SG A13 +5.1VA A14 +5.1VA A15 +5.1VA B1 +5.1VA B2 CPRST-0A B3 SG B4 RTS0-0A B5 CTS0-0A B6 SOUT0-0A B7 SIN0-0A B8 SG B9 UD3-1A B10 UD2-1A B11 UD1-1A B12 UD0-1A B13 SG B14 LCDEN-1A B15
VREF DQ0 SG DQ1 DQS0 DQ2 VDD DQ3 NC NC SG DQ8 DQ9 DQS1 VDD CK1 /CK1 SG DQ10 DQ11 CKE0 VDD DQ16 DQ17 DQS2 SG A9 DQ18 A7 VDD DQ19 A5 DQ24 SG DQ25 DQS3 A4 VDD DQ26 DQ27 A2 SG A1 CB0 CB1 VDD DQS8 A0 CB2 SG CB3 BA1 DQ32 VDD DQ33 DQS4 DQ34 SG BA0 DQ35 DQ40 VDD /WE DQ41 /CAS SG DQ55 DQ42 DQ43 VDD NC DQ48 DQ49 SG /CK2 CK2 VDD DQS6 DQ50 DQ51 SG VDD-ID DQ56 DQ57 VDD DQS7 DQ58 DQ59 SG NC SDA SCL
CN810 2 1
PWA-F-PLG (PLG)
06/09 5
CN409 NC 6 DG 5 +24VF 4 +24VF 3 SG 2 +5.1VG 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
NC
CN330 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SG +5.1VC AD0 AD2 AD4 AD6 I/O0 I/O2 I/O4 I/O6 SG WE CSIP2-0A +5.1VC IPCSW-0 SG +5.1VC AD1 AD3 AD5 AD7 I/O1 I/O3 I/O5 I/O7 SG OE RST-0 VDD SG
+24VB TOLON-0A KCTRC-1A MCRUN-0A EXTCTR-0A DG BKCTR-0A MNCTR-0A SG SIZE3-0A SIZE2-0A SIZE1-0A SIZE0-0A +5.1VC CTRCN2-0
PD[0] PD[2] PD[4] PD[6] PRD-0 PA[0] PA[2] PA[4] PA[6] PA[8] PA[10] PA[12] PA[14] PA[16] PA[18] SG SG PD[1] PD[3] PD[5] PD[7] PBOOTCS PA[1] PA[3] PA[5] PA[7] PA[9] PA[11] PA[13] PA[15] PA[17] PROMDETO-0 +5.1VC PLED-1
CN325 34 1 33 2 32 3 31 4 30 5 29 6 28 7 27 8 26 9 25 10 24 11 23 12 22 13 21 14 20 15 19 16 18 17 17 18 16 19 15 20 14 21 13 22 12 23 11 24 10 25 9 26 8 27 7 28 6 29 5 30 4 31 3 32 2 33 1 34
CN344 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NC 11
D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] BOOTCS A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDETO-0 +5.1VC LED-1
CN342 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
A14 A15 A16
A10 A11 A12 A13
A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
CN338 A1 A2 A3
CN324 34 1 33 2 32 3 31 4 30 5 29 6 28 7 27 8 26 9 25 10 24 11 23 12 22 13 21 14 20 15 19 16 18 17 17 18 16 19 15 20 14 21 13 22 12 23 11 24 10 25 9 26 8 27 7 28 6 29 5 30 4 31 3 32 2 33 1 34
TNMTON-0A TNMTCW-0A +5.1VC DG +24VB HOPSW-1A SG +5.1VC TNRES-0 SG DG +24VB TNHMLK-0 TNHMON-0A UFTCS-0 SG
SG SDCOV-1A +5.1VC
+5.1VC HUMIS-1A SG TEMPS-1A
ATSSW-1 ATSVR-1A +24VB ATS-1A SG SG
SG SFCOV-1A +5.1VC
IPC board (Finisher)
CN402 +24VA 1 +24VB 2 +24VC 3 DG 4 DG 5 DG 6 +36VA 7 +36VB 8 PG 9 PG 10 PWRFN-0A 11 CN406 +3.3VD 1 +5.1VC 2 SG 3 SG 4 PWR-DN 5 +12VE 6 AG 7
CN103 LTXD 1 LRXD 2 LRTS 3 LCTS 4 LSBSY 5 PLRST 6 RGTAS 7 MVDEN 8 SG 9 CMD 10 CBSY 11 CACK 12 CERR 13 SG 14 STS 15 SBSY 16 SACK 17 SERR 18 SG 19 MCNT 20 SYSRST 21 EXPON 22 +5.1VC 23 +3.3VD 24
CN805 CNT-GND 10 F-CNT 9 NC 8 NC 7 NC 6 NC 5 SG 4 TXD 3 SG 2 RXD 1
FG
A3 A2 A1
A14 A15 A16
B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A7 A6 A5 A4
A10 A11 A12 A13
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16
A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8
A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
J635 A1 A16 A2 A15 A3 A14
Download jig (for MAIN) Download jig (for PFC)
1
DG +24VB RTNMTLK-0 RTNMTON-0A RSTSW-0A +24VB NC NC NC NC WCLMTB-0A WCLMTA-0A +24VB ERSLP-0A SG MCLSW-0A CLNSW-0A SG DRTH-0A SG +12VE AG CTDVR-1A CTDVD-1A CTDVC-1A NC NC NC NC NC
DG +24VB RTNHMLK-0 RTNHMON-0A
DCTIF-0A +24VA
LDFAN-0A +24VA
DVMBK-0A +5.1VC DEVMON-0A SG +5.1VC DEVCK-1A DG DG +24VA +24VA
DCTF2-0A +24VA
SG TFUSW-1A +5.1VC
TCMTA-0A TCMTB-0A +5.1VC TRCS1-0A SG +5.1VC TRCS2-0A SG
J596 3 2 1
J549 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LSU-FAN-MOT (M32)
DEV-MOT (M10)
A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
SG TFUSW-1A +5.1VC NC
TCMTA-0A TCMTB-0A +5.1VC TRCS1-0A SG +5.1VC TRCS2-0A SG
RGTA-0A +24VC RGTC-0A RGTB-0A +24VC RGTD-0A CPSW2-0 SG
M
PS-HVT (HVT)
6
M
M
M
TRB-MOT (M14)
M
M
OUT5 A
OUT4 C
D D
REV-MOT (M19)
M
B Magnetic roller
F Transfer belt cleaning brush
E Transfer belt power supply roller
D Grid
OUT2 C OUT3 A
B Main charger wire
M
J621 1 1 TRB-CAM-MOT (M15) 2 2 J622 1 TRB-SNR1 2 (S16) 3 J623 1 TRB-SNR2 2 (S15) 3
OUT1 A
B B
J596 3 USD-TNRFLL-SNR 2 (S11) 1
J549 8 1 7 2 6 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 8
M
* Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC
3 9 1 11 7 5
* Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC
9 11
DRM-MOT (M11)
J604 1 THMS-DRM (THM5) 2 J610 1 2 TNR-LVL-SNR 3 (S14) 4 5
* Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC
3 9 1 11 7 5
LP-ERS (ERS)
M
B CH-CLN-POS-SW (SW4) A
J602 CN1 2 1 1 2
J589 3 RGST-SNR 2 (S18) 1 J609 1 3 5 RGST-MOT (M16) 7
CN422 +36VB 1 +36VB 2 TRMA-0 3 TRMBB-0 4 TRMB-0 5 TRMAB-0 6
CN421 +36VB 1 +36VB 2 DRMA-0 3 DRMBB-0 4 DRMB-0 5 DRMAB-0 6
e-STUDIO600/850 e-STUDIO603/853
B9 B10 B11 B12
M
M
5 4 3 2 1 NC 10
M
5 4 3 2 1 10
DCT-I-FAN-MOT (M30)
J595 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FUS-FAN-MOT (M28)
DEV-FAN-MOT (M31)
CN341 NC A1 SG A2 PSTPS-1 A3 +5.1VC A4
J559 NC CN351 9 PFMON-0A 1 8 SG 2 7 +5.1VC 3 6 PFMCK-1A FEED-MOT 4 5 (M20) PG 5 4 PG 6 3 +36VA 7 2 +36VA 8 1
CN412 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J618 2 2 1 1 J616 2 2 1 1
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
Not used
SPRT-FING-SOL (SOL1)
J590 4 3 2 1
J632 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6
MAIN-SW (SW6)
M
M
PWA-F-LGC (LGC)
J594 1 2 HOP-MOT 3 (M7) 4 NC 5 J593 1 2 RCY-TNR-MOT 3 (M8) 4 NC 5
DEV-SW (SW3)
J601 1 CH-CLN-MOT (M12) 2
B A
J524 2 6 1 5
J653 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1
4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
5 6 7 8
J507 8 1 7 2 6 3 5 4
J629 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
5 6 7 8
B A
1
CN605 4 3 DRUM-SUF-SNR (S13) 2
2 5 1 6
J633 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4
J515 1 2 DRM-CLN-MOT 3 (M13) 4 NC 5
NC NC NC NC NC
M
PWA-F-MOT (MOT)
Option
Copy Key Card
CN347 HVTAC-0A 1 HVTER-0 2 HVTM-0A 3 HVTVR-1A 4 HVTT-0A 5 HVTBB-0A 6 HVMVR-1A 7 DG 8 +24VB 9 HVDVR-1A 10 HVDAC-0A 11 HVDDC-0A 12
CN343 1 15 2 14 3 13 4 12 5 11 6 10 7 9 8 8 9 7 10 6 11 5 12 4 13 3 14 2 15 1
e-STUDIO520/720 e-STUDIO523/723
B9 B10 B11
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
RGTA-0A +24VC RGTC-0A RGTB-0A +24VC RGTD-0A NC NC
J589 3 2 1 J609 1 3 5 7 9 11
CN420 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 3 1 4
J600 2 2 1 1 J570 2 2 1 1
DG +24VB DFURMLK-0 DFURMON-0A
DEVFA-0A +24VA
J598 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4
A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20
A7 A8 A9 A10
A5 A6
J597 2 2 1 1
CN341 SG A1 PSTPS-1 A2 +5.1VC A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B20
A13 A12 A11 A10
A15 A14
NC NC NC NC
EXIT-MOT (M18)
J624 A19 A1 A18 A2 A17 A3 A16 A4
J619 4 1 3 2
6 5 4 3 2 1
+24VA SCRP-0A
CN340 +36VB 1 +36VB 2 PG 3 PG 4 DRCLK-0A 5 DRVRST-0 6 DRMVR-0A 7 DRMEN-1A 8 DRMCW-0A 9 +5.1VC 10 SG 11 TRMCK-0A 12 TRMVR-0A 13 TRMEN-1A 14 TRMCW-0 15 PG 16 +36VB 17
B13 B14
B11 B12
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10
A13 A14
A11 A12
A7 A8 A9 A10
A5 A6
CN339 SG A1 KCTRC-1A A2 +24VA A3 KCTRON-0A A4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
7 8 9 10
5 6
SG DEVSW-0A
CN337 DG 1 SG 2 DRV0-1A 3 +24VB 4
CN336 +24VB 1 +24VB 2 EXTMA-0A 3 EXTMC-0A 4 EXTMB-0A 5 EXTMD-0A 6
6
5 2 6 1 3 4
+24VB +24VB MTMA-0 MTMBB-0 MTMB-0 MTMAB-0
M
M
M
EXIT-FAN-MOT (M29)
M
J528 2 2 1 1
Option
External LCF
J850 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 10 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PWA-FMOT2-RV (MOT2-RV)
J561 2 2 1 1 J562 3 REV-SNR1 2 (S23) 1 J563 3 REV-SNR2 2 (S24) 1 J567 3 EXIT-SNR 2 (S22) 1 J568 2 EXIT-COV-SW (SW5) 1 J564 2 2 REV-FAN-MOT1 (M24) 1 1 J565 2 2 REV-FAN-MOT2 (M25) 1 1 GATE-SOL (SOL2)
J415 1 2 3 4 5 6
J569 2 2 1 1 J571 2 2 1 1
CN455 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J532 2 2 1 1 J529 2 2 HRZ-DR-CLT2 (CLT2) 1 1 J530 2 2 HRZ-DR-CLT3 (CLT3) 1 1 J533 3 HRZ-TR-SNR1 2 (S19) 1 J534 3 HRZ-TR-SNR2 2 (S20) 1 J535 3 HRZ-TR-SNR3 2 (S21) 1 HRZ-DR-CLT1 (CLT1)
IH-FAN-MOT (M26)
PWA-F-IH (IH)
M
M
SG P2BTM-1A +5.1VC
PLTRM-0A PLTRM-1A SG P3BTM-1A +5.1VC SG P4BTM-1A +5.1VC
J551 3 2 1 J555 2 2 1 1 J643 3 2 1 J644 3 2 1
CST4BTM-SNR (S48)
CST3BTM-SNR (S42)
CST-TRY-MOT2 (M22)
J420 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7
FG
J516 1 2 USD-TNR-MOT 3 (M9) 4 NC 5 J585 10 9 8 7 6 FUS-MOT (M3) 5 4 3 2 1
DCT-O-FAN-MOT (M27)
M
J579 2 2 1 1 J580 3 WEB-SNR 2 (S8) 1 J581 3 3 2 2 WEB-MOT (M4) 4 4 1 1 THMS-L-HTR (THM4)
J577 3 FUS-TR-SNR 2 (S9) 1 J578 8 8 THMS-R-HTR (THM3) 5 5 4 4 7 7 THMS-F-HTR (THM1) 6 6 3 3 2 2 THMS-C-HTR (THM2) 1 1
M
SG P1BTM-1A +5.1VC
J550 3 CST1BTM-SNR 2 (S30) 1 CST2BTM-SNR (S36)
PUTRM-0A PUTRM-1A
J554 2 2 1 1
CST-TRY-MOT1 (M21)
NC
NC
NC NC NC
NC NC NC NC
NC NC
NC
NC
B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B12 B11
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
J822 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 2 2 1 1
J560 1 11 2 10 3 9 4 8 5 7 6 6 7 5 8 4 9 3 10 2 11 1
13 12 11
16 15 14
J614 18 17
B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
6 7 8
3 4 5
1 2
B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20
J611 A1 A20 A2 A19 A3 A18 A4 A17 A5 A16 A6 A15 A7 A14 A8 A13 A9 A12 A10 A11 A11 A10 A12 A9 A13 A8 A14 A7 A15 A6 A16 A5 A17 A4 A18 A3 A19 A2 A20 A1 B1 B20 B2 B19 B3 B18 B4 B17 B5 B16 B6 B15
J584 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1
J615 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1
B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12
A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 B1 B2
J645 A1 A12 A2 A11 A3 A10
FG
SG DG PFCPM2-0A PFCPM1-0A LC-FCLT-0 LCPCLT-0 LCFDMB-0A LCFDMA-0A LCTRMB-0A LCTRMA-0A +24VC +24VC LCFINT-0 LC-FEED LC-PICK LC-TRAYUP LC-BTH LC-CST LC-PEMP LC-SET LC-JUDGE +5.1VC NC
+24VB +24VB DG DG REVMC-0A DRVRST-0 RVNVR-0A REVME-0A REVCW-0A +5.1VC SG NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
ADUFA2-0A +24VC
SG EXCSW-1A +5.1VC ADUFA1-0A +24VC
SG EXTSW-1A +5.1VC
SG REVS2-1A +5.1VC
SG REVS1-1A +5.1VC
STKSL-0A +24VC
SG ADTR1-1A +5.1VC SG ADTR2-1A +5.1VC SG ADTR3-1A +5.1VC SG ADCNT-1A
ATRC4-0A +24VC ATRC1-0A +24VC ATRC2-0A +24VC
H1EER3-0 H1EER2-0 H1EER1-0 IHDUTY-1A SG IH1ON-1 H2PWR3-0A H2PWR2-0A H2PWR1-0A H1PWR3-0A H1PWR2-0A H1PWR1-0A +5VSW IH2ON-1 IHFAN-0A +24VC NC
HTRMT-0C SG HTRML-0A SG +5.1VC HTRCK-1A PG PG +36VA +36VA
DG +24VB AGMLK-0 AGMON-0A
+24VC DCTOF-0A +24VC RVSFA-0A
SG WEBED-0 +5.1VC WEBMTB-0A WEBMTA-0A +5.1VC WEBCN-0 SG NC NC
+5VSW STH--1A STH+-1A ETH--1A ETH+-1A MTH--1A MTH+-1A FUSSW-1A NC PTH--1A PTH+-1A
SG HEXTS-1A +5.1VC
CN346 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
17 18
12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11
6 7 8
3 4 5
CN335 1 2
B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
CN334 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
5 6 7 8
CN333 1 2 3 4
B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12
A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 B1 B2
CN332 A1 A2 A3
B6 B7 B8
B3 B4 B5
B1 B2
A6 A7 A8
A3 A4 A5
CN331 A1 A2
JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ/TWD(e-STUDIO600/720) model only NAD/DMJ(e-STUDIO603/723) model only
M
M
7
+24VB +24VB DG DG MTMCK-0A DRVRST-0 MTMRF-0A MTMEN-0A NC +5.1VC SG
+24VC SFBC-0A NC NC SG RGTAS-1 +5.1VC
SG SFBS0-1A SFBS1-1A SFBS2-1A SFBS3-1A
+5.1VC SFBSW-1A SG
SG P2FED-1A +5.1VC
+24VC P2FDC-0A
+24VC P2RGC-0A
SG PCST2-1A +5.1VC
SG P2RGT-1A +5.1VC
SG P2TOP-1A +5.1VC
SG P2EMP-1A +5.1VC
SG P1FED-1A +5.1VC
+24VC P1FDC-0A
+24VC P1RGC-0A
SG PCST1-1A +5.1VC
SG P1RGT-1A +5.1VC
SG P1TOP-1A +5.1VC
SG P3FED-1A +5.1VC
+24VC P3FDC-0A
+24VC P3RGC-0A
NC SG PCST3-1A +5.1VC
TPUSL-0A +24VC
SG P3RGT-1A +5.1VC
SG P3TOP-1A +5.1VC
SG P4FED-1A +5.1VC
+24VC P4FDC-0A
10 11
21 22 23 24
19 20
16 17 18
12 13 14 15
7 8 9
4 5 6
+5.1VC TLLEMP-1A SG
TLTRM-0A TLTRM-1A
TEFSL-0A +24VC TLCFS-1A +5.1VC
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
B9 B10 B11
B7 B8
B5 B6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4
A4 A5 A6
B9 B10 B11
B7 B8
B5 B6
B1 B2 B3 B4
A10 A11
A7 A8 A9
A4 A5 A6
B3 B2 B1
B5 B4
B7 B6
A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B11 B10 B9 B8
A8 A7 A6
B9 B10 B11
B7 B8
B5 B6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4
A4 A5 A6
J642 A11 A1 A10 A2 A9 A3
B3 B2 B1
B5 B4
B7 B6
B11 B10 B9 B8
A2 A1
A5 A4 A3
A8 A7 A6
J641 A11 A1 A10 A2 A9 A3
B3 B2 B1
B5 B4
B7 B6
A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B11 B10 B9 B8
A8 A7 A6
NC NC NC
NC
CST2-TR-CLT (CLT7)
CST2-SNR (S35)
CST2TR-SNR (S39)
CST2TRY-SNR (S38)
CST2FEED-SNR (S40)
LCF-PICK-SOL (SOL7)
J536 3 CST3EMP-SNR 2 (S43) 1 J537 3 CST3TRY-SNR 2 (S44) 1 J538 3 CST3 TR-SNR 2 (S45) 1
3 2 1
CST2-FEED-CLT (CLT8)
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
CST2EMP-SNR (S37)
CST1FEED-SNR (S34)
2 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
2 2 1 1 J541 2 2 1 1
J542
CST4-TR-CLT (CLT11)
CST4-SNR (S47)
CST4TR-SNR (S51)
CST4TRY-SNR (S50)
CST4EMP-SNR (S49)
3 2 1
CST4FEED-SNR (S52)
CST4-FEED-CLT (CLT12)
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
J539 3 CST32 FEED-SNR (S46) 1
CST3-FEED-CLT (CLT10)
CST3-TR-CLT (CLT9)
J540 3 CST3-SNR 2 (S41) 1
14 13 12
16 15
19 18 17
5 4 3 2 1 22 21 20
8 7 6
NC
NC NC
J588 2 LCF-TRY-MOT (M41) 1
B3 B2 B1
B5 B4
B8 B7 B6
A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B11 B10 B9
A8 A7 A6
J503 A11 11 A10 10 A9 9
M
J507 1 LCF-ENDF-MOT M (M42) 2 J511 1 1 LCF-ENDF-SOL (SOL8) 2 2
J509 1 LCF-ENDFHP-SNR 2 (S73) 3 J510 1 LCF-ENDFSTP-SNR 2 (S75) 3
J508 1 LCFEMP-SNR 2 (S74) 3 J512 1 LCFMST-SNR 2 (S72) 3
J506 1 LCFBTM-SNR 2 (S71) 3
8
J519 1 2 3 4 5
MT-MOT (M17)
M
Tandem LCF
4th drawer
3rd drawer
2nd drawer
1st drawer
* Pins 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 are NC
3 9 1 11 7 5
SFBSIZE-SNR (S28)
J518 1 SFB2 FEED-SNR (S27) 3
CN424 +24VB 1 +24VB 2 MTMA-0 3 MTMBB-0 4 MTMB-0 5 MTMAB-0 6
TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/ KRD/TWD(e-STUDIO850) model only
J543 2 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
CST1-TR-CLT (CLT5)
CST1-SNR (S29)
CST1TR-SNR (S33)
CST1TRY-SNR (S32)
CST1EMP-SNR (S31)
PWA-FMOT2-MT (MOT2-MT)
CST1-FEED-CLT (CLT6)
3 2 1
2 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
2 2 1 1
3 2 1
J640 A11 A1 A10 A2 A9 A3
NC NC NC
NC NC NC
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
3 2 1
B7 B8
B5 B6
A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4
A4 A5 A6
J583 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
J557 3 MID-TR-SNR 2 (S17) 1
B9 B10 B11
B3 B2 B1
B5 B4
B7 B6
A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B11 B10 B9 B8
A8 A7 A6
J639 A11 A1 A10 A2 A9 A3
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J517
SFB-SOL (SOL3)
J514 5 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 5 J516 2 2 SFB-FEED-CLT (CLT4) 1 1
1 2 3
J515 2 2 1 1
TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD/ TWD(e-STUDIO850) model only
TLTMM-0A TLTMM-1A
+5.1VC TLTGE-1A SG
NC +5.1VC TLTGS-1A SG
+5.1VC TLEGC-1A SG
11 12
6 7 8 9 10
3 4 5
J527 14 1 13 2 12 3
2 1
7 6 5 4 3
10 9 8
J513 12 1 11 2
JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ/ TWD(e-STUDIO600/720) model only
+24VC P4RGC-0A
SG PCST4-1A +5.1VC
SG P4RGT-1A +5.1VC
SG P4TOP-1A +5.1VC
CN345 +5.1VC 1 TLFBTM-1A 2 SG 3
17 18 19
15 16
13 14
10 11 12
7 8 9
4 5 6
CN350 SG 1 P4EMP-1A 2 +5.1VC 3
20 21 22
18 19
16 17
12 13 14 15
10 11
7 8 9
4 5 6
CN328 SG 1 P3EMP-1A 2 +5.1VC 3
36 37 38
34 35
32 33
29 30 31
26 27 28
23 24 25
20 21 22
17 18 19
15 16
13 14
10 11 12
7 8 9
4 5 6
CN329 SG 1 P1EMP-1A 2 +5.1VC 3
B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14
A11 A12 A13 A14 B1 B2 B3
A6 A7 A8 A9 A10
A3 A4 A5
CN327 +24VC A1 SFBSL-0A A2
8
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
10.2 DC Wire Harness
10.3 Electric Parts Layout 1) Scanner unit a. A4 series
1) Scanner unit c. Heater, thermostat S5
2) Control panel
3) Laser unit a. e-STUDIO520/523/600/603/720/723
3) Laser unit b. e-STUDIO850/853
4) Fuser related section
M1
S4 M23
INV-EXP
THM3 SLG
S6
KEY2
THMO3
SW1
THMO1
THM1
LDR1
LDR1
INV-LCD
DH2
M3
THM2 THMO2 LDR2
CCD
S7
S3 S1
EXP
PLG
S2
M4
KEY1 PLG
DH1
IH-COIL
TCP/LCD
1) Scanner unit b. LT series
GLV S9
S5
M1 DSP
S4 M23
INV-EXP
M2
M2
SNS
SNS
S8
THM4
SLG
S6
CCD S3 EXP S2
5) Toner cartridge related section
6) Toner recycle / used toner recovery unit
7) Developer unit / drum/ transfer belt unit related section a. Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, lamp, thermistor
8) Paper transport unit
9) Paper exit / reverse section
S13
M10
S22
S18
M16
S12
M11
SW2
7) Developer unit / drum/ transfer belt unit related section b. Heater, thermostat, PC board
S23
DH3
SW4 S11
M5
SW3
M13
S17
M14
CLT3
M8
S10
M17
SOL1 M9
CLT2
THM5
M18
S15
M7
CLT1 M6 M12
S16
M24
ERS M19 S14
M15
11) Equipment (right view)
12) Bypass feed unit
SOL2 M25
S20
FUS THMO4
10) Equipment (left view)
MOT2-RV
S21
S24
SW5
S19
13) Paper feeding section
14) Tandem LCF
15) Equipment (rear view)
M32
SW6
S27
M27
S31
SW11 M30
SW7
M28
S30 MOT
S32 S33
CLT4
HDD
M21 SOL7
S34
S72
SOL3 M31
CLT5
M29
S28
IH
CLT6 S29 CLT7 CLT8 S35 M20
S39 S38 S37 S36 S40
S25
S45
MOT2-MT
S44 S43
M26
S48 S49 S50 S51 S52
S42 S46
S26
16) AC input section a. e-STUDIO600/720: JPD model
16) AC input section b. e-STUDIO850: JPD model
16) AC input section c. e-STUDIO520: TNA/NAD model, e-STUDIO600/720: TNA/NAD/SAD/TWD model, e-STUDIO850: TNA/NAD/SAD model, e-STUDIO523/603/723/853: TNA/NAD model
HVT
SYS M42
CLT9 CLT10 S41
S47 SW8
M33
SOL8
M41
CLT11 CLT12
M34 S73
M22
LGC M35
S71
S74
PS
S75
16) AC input section d. e-STUDIO520: AUD/DAU/MJD/DMJ model, e-STUDIO600/720/850: ARD/AUD/DAU/MJD/DMJ/CND/KRD model, e-STUDIO850: TWD model e-STUDIO523/603/723/853: ARD/MJD/DMJ/CND model
17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) a. Sensor
17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) c. Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, PC board SW10
SOL4
M40
SW9
ADF M37
S53
M36
S54
S57 S64 S56
M38 S55
S58
17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) b. Sensor
NF1
NF1
S61
NF1
S60
SOL6 M39
S65
SOL5
17) Reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) d. Sensor
S59
RLY S67 BRK1 BRK2
BRK1
FIL
NF1 NF2
BRK1 S62
BRK1
S66 S69 S63
Motors Symbol M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21
M22
M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40
M41
M42
Sensors and Switches Name SCAN-MOT Scan motor POL-MOT Polygonal motor FUS-MOT Fuser motor WEB-MOT Web motor TNR-MOT New toner supply motor TNR-TR-MOT New toner transport motor HOP-MOT Hopper motor RCY-TNR-MOT Recycle toner transport motor USD-TNR-MOT Used toner transport motor DEV-MOT Developer unit motor DRM-MOT Drum motor CH-CLN-MOT Wire cleaner drive motor DRM-CLN-MOT Cleaning brush drive motor TRB-MOT Transfer belt motor TRB-CAM-MOT Transfer belt cam motor RGST-MOT Registration motor MT-MOT Transport motor EXIT-MOT Exit motor REV-MOT Reverse motor FEED-MOT Feed motor CST-TRY-MOT1 Tray-up motor-1 CST-TRY-MOT2 Tray-up motor-2 * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
SLG-FAN-MOT SLG board cooling fan REV-FAN-MOT1 Reverse section cooling fan-1 REV-FAN-MOT2 Reverse section cooling fan-2 IH-FAN-MOT IH board cooling fan DCT-O-FAN-MOT Duct out fan FUS-FAN-MOT Fuser cooling fan EXIT-FAN-MOT Exit section cooling fan DCT-I-FAN-MOT Duct in fan DEV-FAN-MOT Developer unit fan LSU-FAN-MOT Laser unit cooling fan SYS-FAN-MOT SYS board cooling fan PS-FAN-MOT1 Switching regulator cooling fan-1 PS-FAN-MOT2 Switching regulator cooling fan-2 DF-READ-MOT Read motor DF-FEED-MOT Document feed motor DF-TRY-MOT Tray lift motor DF-L-EXIT-MOT Large original exit motor DF-S-EXIT-MOT Small original exit motor LCF-TRY-MOT Tandem LCF tray-up motor * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-ENDF-MOT Tandem LCF end fence motor * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
Figure 1)-a 1)-b 3)-a 3)-b
Wire harness location
Symbol
8-B
S1-5
5-E
S6
4)
7-D
S7
4)
7-C
S8
5) 5) 6)
5-B 5-B 6-B
S9 S10 S11
6)
6-B
S12
6)
7-C
S13
7)-a
6-D
S14
7)-a
6-E
S15
7)-a
6-B
S16
7)-a 7)-a 7)-a
6-D 6-E 6-F
S17 S18 S19
8)
6-F
S20
8)
8-B
S21
9)
6-A
S22
9)
7-G
S23
13)
6-H
S24
13)
7-A
S25 S26
13)
7-B S27
1)-a 1)-b
2-E
S28
9)
7-F
S29
9)
7-F
S30
10) 10) 10) 10)
7-E 7-C 6-D 7-C
S31 S32 S33 S34
11)
6-D
11)
6-D
S36
11)
6-D
S37
15)
5-C
S35
S38
15)
4-F
S39
15)
4-F
S40
17)-c
3-H
17)-c
3-H
S41
S42 17)-c
3-G
17)-c
3-G
S43
17)-c
3-G
S44
14)
8-H
S45 S46
14)
8-G
S47
S48
Name APS1-3, APS-C, APS-R Automatic original detection sensor HOME-SNR Carriage home position sensor TEMP/HUMI-SNR Temperature/humidity sensor WEB-SNR Web detection sensor FUS-TR-SNR Fuser transport sensor TNR-EMP-SNR Toner cartridge empty detection sensor USD-TNR-FLL-SNR Toner bag full detection sensor ATTNR-SNR Auto-toner sensor DRUM-SUF-SNR Drum surface potential sensor TNR-LVL-SNR Image quality sensor TRB-SNR2 Transfer belt release detection sensor TRB-SNR1 Transfer belt contact detection sensor MID-TR-SNR Intermediate transport sensor RGST-SNR Registration sensor HRZ-TR-SNR1 Horizontal transport sensor-1 HRZ-TR-SNR2 Horizontal transport sensor-2 HRZ-TR-SNR3 Horizontal transport sensor-3 EXIT-SNR Exit sensor REV-SNR1 Reverse sensor-1 REV-SNR2 Reverse sensor-2 SFB-COV-SNR Bypass feed unit cover sensor FEED-COV-SNR Feed cover sensor SFB-FEED-SNR Bypass feed sensor SFB-SIZE-SNR Bypass paper size detection sensor CST1-SNR 1st drawer detection sensor CST1-BTM-SNR 1st drawer bottom sensor CST1-EMP-SNR 1st drawer empty sensor CST1-TRY-SNR 1st drawer tray-up sensor CST1-TR-SNR 1st drawer transport sensor CST1-FEED-SNR 1st drawer feed sensor CST2-SNR 2nd drawer detection sensor CST2-BTM-SNR 2nd drawer bottom sensor CST2-EMP-SNR 2nd drawer empty sensor CST2-TRY-SNR 2nd drawer tray-up sensor CST2-TR-SNR 2nd drawer transport sensor CST2-FEED-SNR 2nd drawer feed sensor CST3-SNR 3rd drawer detection sensor CST3-BTM-SNR 3rd drawer bottom sensor * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
CST3-EMP-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF empty sensor CST3-TRY-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF tray-up sensor CST3-TR-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport sensor CST3-FEED-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed sensor CST4-SNR 4th drawer detection sensor * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
CST4-BTM-SNR 4th drawer bottom sensor * Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
Figure 1)-a 1)-b 1)-a 1)-b
Wire harness location 2-E
Symbol
S49
2-F
2)
5-A
4)
7-C
S50
S51 4) 5)
6-F
6-B 6-C
7)-a
6-F
7)-a
6-F
8)
8-B 6-E 7-E
8)
7-E
8)
7-E
9)
7-F
9)
7-F
9)
7-F
11)
5-A
11)
5-B
S53 S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 S67 S68
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
CST4-TR-SNR 4th drawer transport sensor
DF-TRY-SNR Original tray sensor DF-TRY-VR-SNR Original tray width sensor DF-RGST-SNR Original registration sensor DF-SIZE-SNR1 Original width detection sensor-1 DF-SIZE-SNR2 Original width detection sensor-2 DF-SIZE-SNR3 Original width detection sensor-3 DF-U-LMT-SNR Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor DF-EMP-SNR Original empty sensor DF-COV-SNR Jam access cover sensor DF-L-LMT-SNR Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor DF-LENG-SNR Original length detection sensor DF-APS-SNR APS operation sensor DF-OPN-SNR RADF opening/closing sensor DF-SD-REV-SNR Small original reverse sensor DF-SD-EXIT-SNR Small original exit sensor DF-LD-EXIT-SNR Large original exit sensor DF-READ-SNR Read sensor DF-MID-TR-SNR Original intermediate transport sensor LCF-BTM-SNR Tandem LCF bottom sensor
12)
8-B
13)
8-C
13)
7-A
13)
8-C
* Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
8-C
LCF-MST-SNR Standby side mis-stacking sensor
13) 13) 13) 13)
S71
S72
8-C 8-C
S73
8-D
13)
7-A
13)
8-D
S74
S75 13)
8-D
13)
8-D
SW1
13)
8-D
SW2
13)
8-E
SW3 SW4
13)
7-B SW5
13)
8-E
SW6
13)
8-E
SW7
13)
8-E
SW8
13)
8-E
SW9
13)
8-F
SW10 SW11
13)
8-F
13)
8-F
13)
8-F
Symbol CLT1
CLT3
CLT5 CLT6
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
8-A
S70
13)
Electromagnetic spring clutches
CLT4
12)
S69
Wire harness location
CLT2
CST4-TRY-SNR 4th drawer tray-up sensor
5-B
7)-a
8)
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
CST4-FEED-SNR 4th drawer feed sensor
5-A
8)
CST4-EMP-SNR 4th drawer empty sensor
7-B
7)-a
7)-a
Figure
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
S52 6)
Name
* Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-ENDF-HP-SNR End fence home position sensor * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-EMP-SNR Standby side empty sensor * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
13)
8-F CLT7
17)-a
3-H
17)-a
3-H
CLT8 CLT9
* Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
FSR-SW Fuser detection switch TNR-SW Toner cartridge detection switch DEV-SW Developer unit detection switch CH-CLN-POS-SW Wire cleaner position detection switch EXIT-COV-SW Exit cover switch MAIN-SW Main switch U-FRNT-COV-SW Front cover switch COV-INTLCK-SW Cover interlock switch DF-OPN-INTLCK-SW RADF opening/closing switch DF-COV-INTLCK-SW Jam access cover opening/closing switch TNR-MOT-INTLCK-SW Toner motor interlock switch
Name HRZ-DR-CLT1 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 HRZ-DR-CLT2 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 HRZ-DR-CLT3 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-3 SFB-FEED-CLT Bypass feed clutch CST1-TR-CLT 1st drawer transport clutch CST1-FEED-CLT 1st drawer feed clutch CST2-TR-CLT 2nd drawer transport clutch CST2-FEED-CLT 2nd drawer feed clutch CST3-TR-CLT 3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport clutch CST3-FEED-CLT 3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed clutch CST4-TR-CLT 4th drawer transport clutch
17)-a
3-G
17)-a
3-G
17)-a
3-G
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
17)-a
3-G
CST4-FEED-CLT 4th drawer feed clutch
17)-b
3-G
17)-b
3-G
Solenoids
17)-b
3-G
Symbol
17)-b
4-F
SOL1
17)-b
4-F
SOL2
17)-c
2-H
17)-c
2-G
17)-d
4-G
17)-d
4-G
17)-d
2-H
17)-d
2-G
17)-d
4-G
14)
8-G
CLT10
CLT11
CLT12
SOL3 SOL4 SOL5 SOL6
SOL7
SOL8
* Only for JPD/NAD/SAD/DAU/DMJ model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720
Name SPRT-FING-SOL Drum separation finger solenoid GATE-SOL Gate solenoid SFB-SOL Bypass pickup solenoid DF-SD-SOL Small original exit solenoid DF-LD-SOL Large original exit solenoid DENG-SOL Large original exit roller release solenoid LCF-PICK-SOL Tandem LCF pickup solenoid * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
LCF-ENDF-SOL Tandem LCF end fence solenoid * Only for TNA/ASD/ASU/ARD/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850
Wire harness location
Symbol
8)
7-E
EXP
8)
7-E
ERS
8)
7-E
IH-COIL
12)
8-B
DH1
13)
8-C
DH2
13)
8-C
DH3
13)
8-D
13)
8-D
Symbol
13)
8-E
THM1
13)
8-E
THM2
13)
8-F
14)
8-G
CCD SLG
14)
8-G
DSP KEY1
14)
8-G
KEY2
14)
8-G
4)
AC wire harness
5)
5-B
7)-a
6-B
7)-a
6-C
LDR1 LDR2 SNS
FUS
8-F
THM5 THMO1
Figure
Wire harness location
7)-a
6-C
9)
7-F
12)
8-A
17)-c
2-G
17)-c
2-G
17)-c
2-G
13)
8-E
THMO2 THMO3 THMO4
14)
8-H
Name PWA-F-CCD CCD driving PC board (CCD board) PWA-F-SLG Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) PWA-F-DSP Display PC board (DSP board) PWA-F-KEY1 Key PC board-1 (KEY1 board) PWA-F-KEY2 Key PC board-2 (KEY2 board) PWA-F-PLG Laser control PC board (PLG board) PWA-F-LDR1 Laser driving PC board-1 (LDR1 board) PWA-F-LDR2 Laser driving PC board-2 (LDR2 board) * Only for e-STUDIO850/853 models PWA-F-SNS H-sync detection PC board (SNS board) PWA-F-FUS Fuse PC board (FUS board) * Optional for TNA/NAD/MJD/DMJ model, standard for other mod-
Figure 1)-a 1)-b 1)-a 1)-b 2)
9)
7-F
IH
10)
6-B AC wire harness
MOT
10)
5-B
MOT2-MT
10)
AC wire harness
MOT2-RV
17)-c
2-G
SYS
17)-c
2-G
LGC
10)
5-B
FIL
PWA-F-IH Heater control PC board (IH board) PWA-F-MOT Motor driving PC board (MOT board) PWA-F-MOT2-MT Transport motor driving PC board (MOT2-MT board) PWA-F-MOT2-RV Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board) PWA-F-SYS System control PC board (SYS board) PWA-F-LGC Logic PC board (LGC board) PWA-F-FIL Filter PC board (FIL board) * Only for TNA/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model
HVT
PWA-F-ADF RADF control PC board (ADF board)
Wire harness location
1)-a 1)-b
2-D
7)-a
6-C
4)
AC wire harness
1)-c
AC wire harness
1)-c
AC wire harness
7)-b
AC wire harness
Figure
Wire harness location
THMS-F-HTR Fuser roller front thermistor THMS-C-HTR Fuser roller center thermistor THMS-R-HTR Fuser roller rear thermistor THMS-L-HTR Pressure roller thermistor THMS-DRM Drum thermistor THERMO-C-HTR Fuser roller center thermostat THERMO-S-HTR Fuser roller side thermostat THERMO-SCN-DH Scanner damp heater thermostat THERMO-DRM-DH Drum damp heater thermostat
4)
7-B
4)
7-B
4)
7-B
4)
7-C
7)-a
6-C
4)
AC wire harness
4)
AC wire harness
1)-c
AC wire harness
7)-b
AC wire harness
Name
Figure
Wire harness location
PS-HVT High-voltage transformer
15)
6-G
Figure
Wire harness location
1)-a 1)-b
2-D
2)
3-B
2)
3-B
2)
3-A
3)-b
5-G
Others Symbol
LCD
INV-LCD
3-E
GLV
Name INV-EXP Lamp inverter board LCD LCD panel TCP Touch panel INV-LCD LCD inverter board MIR-GLV Galvanic mirror * Only for e-STUDIO850/853
3-F 4-A 4-A
2)
3-A
HDD PS
NF1
5-E
NF2
3)-b
4-F
3)-a 3)-b
5-E 5-F
HDD Hard disk PS-ACC Switching regulator NS-FIL1 Noise filter-1 NS-FIL2 Noise filter-2
15)
4-C
15)
5-G AC wire harness
16)-a 16)-b 16)-c 16)-d
AC wire harness
16)-b
AC wire harness
16)-a 16)-b 16)-c 16)-d
AC wire harness
16)-b
AC wire harness
16)-b
AC wire harness
* Only forJPD model of e-STUDIO850
4-E BRK1
BRK2
BREAKER1 Breaker-1 BREAKER2 Breaker-2 * Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850
7)-b
AC wire harness
RLY
RELEY Relay * Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850
10)
7-D
15)
6-E
11)
8-B
9)
7-G
15)
3-B
15)
6-A
16)-c
AC wire harness
17)-c
3-F
of e-STUDIO600/720
ADF
Name
Symbol
Wire harness location
2)
3)-a 3)-b 3)-a 3)-b
LP-EXPO Exposure lamp LP-ERS Discharge LED IH-COIL IH coil SCN-DH-L Scanner damp heater (Left) SCN-DH-R Scanner damp heater (Right) DRM-DH Drum damp heater
Figure
Transformer
INV-EXP
els
7-B
07/11
THM3 THM4
13)
Name
Thermistors and thermostats
TCP
Symbol
S70
Lamps and heaters Figure
PC boards
PLG
LCF-ENDF-STP-SNR End fence stop position sensor
S68
